>^ ^ r

?. ;^

_ >^^

f^*^, ^

ii/-

v*^*.

v^r "

■-■v^J^St^t

^' *

;^-\L,:'

-:f4;

.-•'^■^?«(

*^>^

z^..-

. ^ V-^ j*r fir* jy^Ri/iifi

HARVARD UNIVERSITY.

I. I B K A 11 Y

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

uoio "b,V^\.0 -- ©(iJtcrW. L.\^ \<^K

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

Incorporated A. D. 1799
VOLUME XVI ..

Publications
of Yale University

YALE UNIVERSITY PRESS

NEVvA HAVEN, CONNECTICUT

THE R. WAGNER SOHN PRESS

1

OFFICERS FOR 1910-11.

I'resitlent.

Hon. SIMEON E. BALDWIN.

Vice- Preside nis.

Prof. ALEXANDER W. EVANS, Prof. CLIVE DAY,

Prof. HANNS OERTEL.

Sccretari/.

Dr. GEORGE F. EATON.

Treasurer,

Mr. GEORGE PARMLY DAY.

Jjtbrnrian.

Mr. JOHN CHRISTOPHER SCHWAB.

Conniiittee on Publication.

Hon. S. E. BALDWIN, Chairman,
Prof. A. S. COOK,
Prof. E. S. DANA,
Prof. E. P. MORRIS,

Prof. A. W. EVANS,
Prof. CLIVE DAY,
Prof. H. OERTEL,
Mr. J. C. SCHWAB.

!i>

A

COJSTTIilNTS

Page

Additions to the Library, May 1, 1910 to June 30, 1911 . . vii— xxix

Art. 1.— The Ajiphipoda OF Bermuda. By Beverly Waugh Konkel 1—116
Art. II.— The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. By Austin

Morris Harmon 117 — 245

Art. III. — Nutrition Investigations on the Carbohydrates of
Lichens, Algae, and Related Substances. By Mary

Davies Swartz 247-382

Art. IV.— New Spiders from new England. By J. H. Emerton 383—407

ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY

OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES
By Gib^t and Exchange from May 1, 1910, to June 30, 1911.

Aix-eh-Troxehce.— Unive7-site.

Faculte des lettres. Annales I-III, 2. 1907-09.

Taculte de droit. Annales I-IV, 2. 1907-10.

Faculte de droit et des lettres. Annales I— II; 2. 1905—06.
Altenburg, S.-A. Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes.

Mitteilungen aus dem Osterlande. N. F. 1910.
Atnerican Academy of Arts and Sciences.

Proceedings. XLVI, 13-24, XLVII, 1-3. 1911.
American Antiquarian Society.

Proceedings. XX, 2. 1910.
American Geographical Society.

Bulletin. XXXIX, 1-XLIII, 6. 1907-11.
American Museum of Natural History (New York).

American Museum Journal. X, 3— XI, 5. 1910—11.

Guide Leaflet. 24. 26-30, 33. 1907-11.
American Philosophical Society.

Proceedings. XLVIII, 194-L, 198. 1909-11.
American Society of Sanitary and Moral Prophylaxis.

Educational pamphlets. 1—6. 1910.
Amherst College.

Catalogue. 1910-11.
Amiex.s. — Academie des Sciences.

Memoires. I.VI. 1909.
Sociefe Linneenne du Nord de la France.

Bulletin. No. 225, 1891 ; XIX, 381-92. 1908-09.
Amsterdam. — Koninkl. Akademie van Wetenschappen.

Jaarboek, 1909.

Proceedings. Section of sciences. XII, 1-2. 1909/10.

Verliandelingen. Afd. Natuurkunde, Sectie II, Deel XV, 1—3,
XVI, 1-2. 1909/10.

Verslagen van de gewone vergaderingen van de wis- en natuur-
kundige afdeeling. Deel XVIJI, 1-2. 1909/10.
MaatschappiJ tot nut van 't Algemeen.

Publikation. 93, also IX, 4. 1911.
The Apteryx. (Roger Williams Park Museum, Providence, P. I.), 1, 1—3. 1910.
Argentine Republic.

Agricultural and pastoral census of the nation. Monograph. I—
III. 1908.

VIII Additions to the Library.

Australasian Association for Advancettient of Science.

Report of Meeting. XII. 1909.

Address of President. 1907. Section C.
Bamberg. — Remeis Sternivarte.

Veroffentlichungen. Reihe II. Band I, Heft 1. 1911.
Basel. —Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Bericht. XXI. 1909.

Verhandlungen. XX, 3-XXl. 1910.
Batavia. — X. Natuurkundige Yereeniging.

Natuurkundig Tijdschrift. XL, Ser. 8, I ; XLIII, 1-4.
R. Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory.

Observations. XXX-XXXI and append. 1907-08.
Observatory.

Erdbeben Bericlit. 6a~c, 7a-b, 8 a, 9 a, 11a, 12 a. 1909.

Seismological Bulletin. Jan. to Dec. 1910; Feb. 1911.
Belgium. — Academic 11. d'' Archeologie de Belgique.

Bulletin. I-IV. 1910.
Bergen. —Museum.

Aarsberetning. 1909.

Aarbog. 1909, 2 to 1910, 2.

Crustacea of Norway. By G. O. Sars. Vol. V, parts XXVII-XXX.
Berlin.— JiT. Museum fiir Naturkunde.

Mitteilungen aus dem Zoologischen Museum. IV, 3 ; V, 1—2.
1910-11.

Bericlit des Zoologischen Museums. 1909.

Birmingham.— A^aiM/-a/ History and Philosophical Society.

List of Members and Annual Report. 1910—11.
Proceedings. I— XII.
Bologna. — R. Accademia delle Scienze deW Istituto di Bologna.

Memorie. Classe di Scienze Morali. Sezione di Scienze Storico-

Pilologiche. Ser. I. T. Ill, 2-IV, 1. 1908-10. Sezione di

Science Giuridiche. Ser. I. T. Ill, 2-IV, 1. 1908-10.

Adunanza, June 22. 1910.
Rendiconti. Classe di Scienze Morali. Ser. I. T. III. 1909_10.

Classe di Scienze Fisiche. Anno 1883—4; N. S., V, 1—4.

1900-01; XIII, 1908-09.

Bombay. - R. Asiatic Society.

Journal, Bombay Branch. LXIV. 1909.

Bonn. — Naturhistorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande und Westfalens.
Sitzungsberichte. 1909, 2 to 1910, 1.

Verhandlungen. 1~IV, VI-VII, XXIII, 1-2,1844-66; LKVI, 2.
1910.

Bordeau.x. — Commission Meteorologique de la (iironde.
Bulletins. 1908, 1909.
Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles.

Additions to the Library. IX

Memoires. T. V, 1.

Proces-verbaux. 1908-09; 1909-10.
Boston, Mass. — Museum of Fine Arts.

Bulletins. 46-51.

Annual Report. XXXV, 1910.
Society of Natural History.

Proceedings. XXXIV, 9-12. 1910.
Bradford. — Scientific Association.

Journal. Ill, 2. 1910.
Bremen. — Meteorologisches Observatoriurn.

Deutsclies Meteorologisclies Jahrbuch. XX. 1909.

Breslad. — Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir vaterlandische Cultur.
Jahres-Bericlit. LXXXVIII, 1909.
■ Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein.

Abhandlungen. XX, 1. 1910.

Brooklyn. — Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciotces.

Bulletins. IV, 11, 14-16; VI, 3-8, 15. 1910-11.

Science Bulletins. I, 17 and Index, 1910.

Museum News. V, 6-8; VI, 1-8. 1911.

Year Books. 1907/08-1909/10.
Brcnn. — Nuturforsihender Verein.

Verhandlungen. XLVII. 1909.
Brunswick. — Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft.

Jahresbericht. XVI. 1907/08-1908/09.

Brussels. — Acadanie E. des Sciences^ des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de
Belgique.

Annuaire. LXXVI-LXXVII, 1910-11.

Bulletins. Classe des Sciences. 1909, 9 to 1911, 4.

Memoires. Classe des Sciences. Ser. II. T. II. Fasc. VII—
VIII. T. III. Ease. I -IV in 8vo. T. II.
Jardin Botanique de VEtat.

Bulletin III, 1.
Musee R. d'Hisfoire Naturelle.

Memoires. T. IV-V. 1907-08.
Observatoire Royale.

Annales Astronomiques XII, 2— XIII, 1. 1910.

Annuaires Astronomiques. 1911—12.
Societe Entomologique.

Annales. LIII-LIV.

Memoires. XVIII. 1911.
Societe R. de Botanique.

Bulletins. XLVI, 1-4, XLVII, 1-4; also XVI-XVII, 1-3,
XVIII, XX. 1878-1881.
Societe R. Bclye de Geographie.

Bulletin. XXXIII, 1-XXXlV, 6. 19U9-10.

X Additions to the Library.

Brussels.— S'ocie/e R. Zoologique et Malacologique.
Annales. XLIV. 1909.
Societe cles Sciences.

Annales. XXXIV, 2-4; XXXV, 1-2. 1909/11.
Revue des Questions Scientifiques. Ser. Ill, XVII, 1— XIX, 2.
1910-11.
Bdcarest. — Observatornl Astronomic si Meteorologic.
Bulletin Lunar. XVI. 'l907.
Societe des Sciences.

Bulletins. XVI, 1-2; XVIII, 5-XXI, 1; also II, 7-12. Ill,
1-2, X, 5.
Buchan Field Club Museum, Peterhead.

Transactions. X. S. I, 1.
Budapest. — Academic Hongroise des Sciences.

Matliematisclie und Xaturwissenscliaftliclie Berichte aus Ungarn.

XXIV-XXV. 1906-07.
Rapport sur les Travaux. 1909.
Kiralyi Magyar Tudomdny, Egyetem Tanrede.
1903/04; 1905/06-1908/09; 1910/11.
Buenos Aires. —Dn-ecdo« General de Estadistica.

Boletin Mensual. X, 108-XI, 120. 1909-10.
Museo Nacional.

Anales. Ser. III. T. XI-XIII. 1910.
Sociedad Cientifica Argentina.

Anales. LXIX, 1-LXX, 4. 1910.
Buffalo.— S'ociV^?/ of Natural Sciences

Bulletins. X, 1. 1910.
Caen. — Societe Linneenne de Normandie.

Bulletin. Ser. 6, T. II. 1908-09.
Memoires. XXIII, 1-2. 1908-09.

Calcutta. — Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Journal and Proceedings. IV (Index) ; V, 1—11 ; VI. 1—6.

1908-10.
Memoirs. Ill, 1.
Historical Society.

Annual Report. 1910.
Journal. V (No. 10). 1910.

Halifornia Academy of Sciences.

Proceedings. I, pp. 7-288 (4th Ser.); HI, pp. 57-72 (4th Ser.).

Cambrai. — Societe d^ Emulation.

Memoires. LXIII-LXIV. 1908-09.

Cambridge (England).— Observatory.
Report. 1909-10.
Fhilosophical Society.

Transactions. XXI, 12-14: Index to XIII.

Addilious to the Library. XI

Cameron, J^si.. — Gulf Biologic Staiion.

Bulletin. V.. 1910.
Cah ADA. — Geological Survey.

Depai'tmeut of Mines. Sunimaiy Eeport. 1909.

Maps 1006, 1008, 1077, 1082, 1091, 1093, 1101, 1110, 1115. 1137.
1143, 1170.
Department of the Interior.

Maps, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Alberta. 1909.

Forestry- Branch. Bulletin. 9, 16-20.
Canadian Railway Club.

Official Proceedings. X, 1-5. 1911.
Caradoc and Severn Valley Field Clubj Shrewsbury.

Record of Bare Facts. 20, 1910.

Transactions. V, 2,
Catania. — Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali.

Bolletino delle Sedate. Ser. II, 11-17. 1910-11.
Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiana.

Memorie. XXXIX, 1-7, 9-11 ; XL, 1-3. 1910-11.
Cellule, La. XXVI, 1. 1910.
CuAVTJhTKVEG. — Observed or io AstronoDtico National.

Anuario. XXXI. 1911.
Chemnitz. — Naturwissevschaftliche Gesellschaft.

Bericht. XVII. 1909.
Cherbourg. — Societe Rationale Academique.

Memoires. XVIII.
Chicago. — Field Museum of Natural History.

Publications. 142-150.
Christiania.— A'z/^ Maguzin for Naturcideiiskaberne. XLIX, 1. 1911.
V idenskabs-Selskabet .

Porhandlinger. 1909.
CnuR. — Naturforschende Gesellsc/ia/t Graubiindens.

Jahres-Bericht. LII. 1909-10.
Cincinnati. — L?o^(^ Library.

Bulletins. Mycological Series, 3 (1902), no. 1 ; 13 (1909;, no. 4.
Pharmacy Series, 12 (1910), no. 2.

Report of Lloyd Mycological Museum. I. 1895.

Bibliographical Contributions. 1-2. 1911.

Mycological Notes. 32-5. 1909-10. Index to II. 1905-08.
Museum Association.

Annual Report. XXIX. 1909.

Journal. XX 1, 2. 1910.
University.

Report of Chairman and President. 1909.

Observatoiy Publications. 17. 1905—10.

Record. VI, 5-VII, 4. 1910-11

University Studies. Ser. IL Vol. VI, 1-4. 1910.

XII Additions to the Libra)-}'.

Colorado College.

Publications. General Series. 50-52. 55. Science Series. XII,
25, 47—49. Social Science Series. II, 3.
Colorado Scientific Society.

Proceedings. IX, 345 -X, 38.

Year-Books. 1882-1910.
Colorado. — University of.

Studies. Vir, 2-VIIL 3. 1910-11.
Comiecticut Historical Society.

Annual Eeport. 1910.
Copenhagen. — L'.4caf^fmie jR des Sciences et des Lettres de Danemark.

Bulletin (Oversigt). 1909, (3-1911, 1.
Xaturhistoriske Forening.

Viden.skabellge Meddelelser. 1909.
CoRDNA. — R. Acadeniia Gallega.

Boletin. V, .35-VI, 46.
Cracow. — Academic des Sciences.

Materyaly. 1907-09.
K. K. Sternnrtrte

Eesultate. 1910.

Meteorologische Beobachtungen. March 1910-May 1911.
Croydon. — Microscopical Club.

Reports and Abstracts of Proceedings. I-V, VI-VIIl, 1871-
1878.

Annual Proceedings and Transactions. 1878/81 to 1909/10 ; In-
dex to 1870/83.
Natural History and Scientific Society.

Annual Proceedings and Transactions. 1909—10.
Danzig. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Katalog der Bibliothek. Heft 2.

Schriften. N. F. Bd, XII, 4.
Westpreussischer Botanisch-Zoologischer Vereiu.

Bericlite XXVI-XXIX; XXXI-XXXII. 1905-10.
Davenport, Ia. — Academy of Sciences.

Proceedings. XII, pp. 223-40.
Denison University.

Bulletin of the Scientific Laboratories. XVI, pp. 1-346. 1910.
Detroit. — Museum of Art.

Annual Report. 1910.

Bulletins. IV, 2-V, 2. 1910-11.
Di.ioN. — Academic des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres.

Memoires. 3e Ser. T. II-III. ]874-7(;. 4e Ser. T. II.
1907-10.

DoRi'AT.— GeZe/tr^e Estnische Gesellschaft.
Sitzuuo-sberichte. 1909.

Additions to the Library. XIII

DoRPAT. — Naturforscher-Gesellscha^t.

Archiv. Ser. II, Band VI.

Sitznngsberichte. XVIII, 2-4. 1909.
Dresden. — Naturwisseiischaftliche Gesellschaft Isis.

Sitzungsberu'hte und Abhandhingeii. JuU', 1909 to Dec, 1910.
DvBLia. —Eoyal Dublin Society.

Economic Proceedings. II, 1—2.

Scientific Proceedings. N. S. VII, 24-3B ; Index. 1898-1909.

Scientific Transactions. V, 2d Series. VI.
R. Irish Academy.

Proceedings. Series A, XXVIII, 1-XXIX. 2: Series B.

XXVIII, 1-XXIX. 4; Series C, XXVII, 10, XXVIII, 1-

XXIX, 4.

CJare Island Survey. XXXI, 4-5, 22, 39.
Trinity College.

Hermathena. 34-36. 1908-10.
Dutch East Indies. — K. Natuurkundige Yereeniging.

Natuurkundige Tijdsclmft. LXIX.
East Kent Scientific and Natural History Society.

Transactions and Reports. Ser. II. Vol. IX.
HiGmBVRGR.— Botanical Society.

Transactions and Proceedings. XXV.
Geological Society.

Transactions. IX, special part and V.
B. Observatory.

Annals. III. 1908.
R. Physical Society.

Proceedings. XVIII, 2.
Royal Society.

Proceedings. XXX, 5, 7; XXXI, 1-3.
Elberfeld. — CJiemisches Untersuchnngsamt.

Bericht fiber die Tatigkeit. 1908.
Katurivissenschafflicher Verein.
Jahres-Bericht. XII. 1909.
Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society.

Journal. XXV, 3-XXVI, 4.

Emden. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Jaliresbericht. XCIV. 1908/09.
Kleine Schriften. 4, 6-10, 14.

Erfurt. — K. Akademie geineimiUtziger Wissenschaften.
Jahrbucher. XXXV. 1909.

Essex Institute.

Annual Eeport. 1910, 1911.

Florence.— Bii^toffca Nazionale Centrale.
Bolletino. 110-124.

XIV Additions to the Libra)-}'.

France. — Minidh-e de V Instruction Piibliqne, dcs Beaux-Arts et des Cultes.
Rapport sur les Observatoires Astronomiques de Province.
XXIV, XXIX, XXXI, XXXVIII, XLIII, LVI, LXII, LXVII,
LXX, LXXII, LXXIV, LXXVIII, LXXXI, LXXXIII, LXXX VII,
XC, XCIII. 1887-1906.
Frankford, Vk.— Historical Society.

Papers. II, 2.
Frankfurt, a. ^i.— Deutsche Malakologische Gesellschaft.

Nachrichtsblatt, XLII, 3-XLIII, 2. 1910-11.
Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellscha/t.
Abluindlungen. XXXI, 1-XXXIII, 3.
Bericht. 1-4. 1910.
Verein fiir Geographic nnd Stafistik.

Jahresbericht. LXXIII-LXXIV. 1909-10.
Frankfort, a. O.—Naturwi^senschaftlicher Verein.
Helios. XXVI. 1910.

Monatliche Mitteilunoen. II, 7-VI. 188.5-87.
Franklin Institute.

Journal. CLXIX, 3-CLXXII, 1. 1910-11.
Fradenfeld. — Thurgnuische Naturforschende Gesellscliaft.

Mitteilungen. XIX. 1910,
Freibdri;, i. 'B.— Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Bericht. XVIII, 1. 1910.
Fribodrc4.— Socie^e Fribourgeoise des Sciences.

Bulletins. Ill, 1888/87 ; IV, 1887/90 ; VII, 1893 97-XII. 1903/04
XIV, 1905/OBXV-lI, 1908/09.
Geneva. — L'Insfifut National Geneoois.

Bulletins. XXXVIII-XXXIX. 1909.
Memoires. XIX-XX. 1901-10.
Societe de Physique et d^Histoirc Naturelle.

Comptes rendus des Seances. XXVII. 1910.
Memoires. XXXVI, 2-XXXVII, 1, 1910-11.
Ge^oa. — Museo Civico di S'oria Naturale.
Annali. Ser. 3. IV. 1908-10.
Germany. — Kaiserl. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische deutsche Akademie der Natur-
forfcJier.
Abhandlungen. Nova Acta. XC, 2-4; XCI, 3; XCII, 1

XCIII, 2.
Leopoldina. XLV-XLVI. 1909-10.
Giessen. — Oberhesiische Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heilkunde.
Bericht. N. F. Medizinische Abteilung. \. 1909.

Naturwissenschaftliche Abteilung. III. 1908-

1909.
Kegister zu Biinden I-XXXIV.
Gi^kHGOW'.— Natural History Society.

Journal. H, 1-4. 1909/10.

Additions to the Library. .XV

Glasgow.— Glasgow Naturalist. I— II. 1909—10.
-R. Philosophical Society.

Proceedings. XLI. 1909-10.
GoETEBORG.— X Gescllschaft der Wissenschafteti.

Handlingar. 4de folj H. 12. 1909.
GoETTiNGEN.— ZiT. GesellscJutft der Wissenschaften.

Nachrichten. Geschaftliche Mitteilungen. 1910, 1.

JMathematisch-physikalische Klasse. 1908—10.
Philosophiscli-historische Klasse. 1910, 1—2.
Graz. — Naturicissenschaftlicher Verein fur Steiermark.

Mitteilungen. XXVII-XLIV. 1890-1907.
Great Britain.— i^02/a^ Photographic Society.

Annual Exhibition. LV. 1910.
Grenoble.— ["?n'j;ersi/e.

Aunales. XX, 2-3; XXI, 1-3; XXII, 1-3, et supplement ;
XXIII, 1.
Haarlem. — Mttsee Teyler.

Archives. Ser. II. XII, 1. 1910.
Soeiete HoUandaifie des Sciences.

Archives neerlandaises. Ser. II, XV, 1—5. 1910-11.
Teylers Godgeleerd Genootschnp.
Verhandlingen. N. S. XVII.

Hamburg. — Deutsche Seewcirte.

Aus dem Archiv. XXXII, 2-XXXIII, 4. 1909-10.
Ergebnisse der meteorologischen Beobachtungeu. 1901 -05.
Deutsches meteorologisches Jahrbuch. XXXII. 1909.
Jahresbericht. XXXIII. 1910.
AnnalenderHydrographieundmaritimenMeteorologie. XXXVIII,

4-XXXIX, 6. 1910-11.
Xachtrag zum Katalog. IX. 1909-10.
Na turivissoischaf/licher Verein.
Abhandlungen. XIX. 3—5.
Verhandlungen XVII. 1909.

Harvard College. — Astronomical Observatory.

Annals. LIX, 6; LXV ; LXVI; LXVIII, 1; LXXI, 1.
Annual Report. LXV. 1910.
Circulars. 153—65.
Museum of Comparative Zoology.
Annual Report. 1909/10.
Bulletins. LII, 15-17; LIII, 5; LIV, 2-5.
Memoirs. XL, 1-2; XLI, 1-2; XXVI, 7; XLV, L

Havana.— C'o^e^io de Belen.

Observaciones meteorologicas y magneticas. 1909.
Havre. — Soeiete freoJogique de Normandie.

Bulletin. XXIX. 1909.

XVI Additio)is to the Library.

Heidelberg. — Historisch-philosophischer Verein.

Neue Heidelberger Jahrbiicher. XVI, 1-2. 1909.
Helsingfors. — Societas Scientiarum Fennica.

Acta. XXXV, 1--10; XXXVI, 1-4; XXXVII, 1-2. 4-11;
XXXVIII, 1, 3; XXXIX, 4; XL, 1-4, also XIX. 1893.

Bidrag till kaniiedom af Fiulands natur ocli folk. 52—53, 1893 ;
67 (1-3), 68 (1-2), 1910.

Ofversigt af forhandlingar. VI- VIII, 1863-66 ; LI, A-C, LII,

A-C, 1908-10.

Meteorologisches Jalirbuch. Ill, 1903 & Supplement.

Observations meteorologiques. 1899—1900.
Hermannstadt. — Siebenbiirgischer Verein fur Naturwissenschaft .

Verhaudluugen und Mitteilungen. LIX. 1909.
Hudson Codnty, N. H.— Historical Society.

Publications. 1-7. 1908.
Illinois. — State Laboratory of Natural History.

Bulletins. VIII, 4-5 and Index ; IX, 1-3. 1910.

India. — I. Department of Agriculture.

Report on Progress of Agriculture. 1909/10.

Memoirs. Botanical series. I, Index; 11,9; III, 1-6; IV. 1.

Chemical series. 1, 8—9.
Agricultural Researcli Institute, Pusa. Report. 1909/10. Bulletin
16, 1910.
Geological Survey.

Memoirs. XXX VII, 4-XXXVIII. 1910. Palfeontologica In-

dica. Ser. XV. Vol. IV, 2-3; VI, 2; X. S. Ill, 1.
Records. XXXVIIl, 4-XL, 3. 1910.
Meteorological Department.
Animal Summary. 1909.
Memoirs. XX, 8 and Index; XXI, 2.
Monthly Weather Review. Dec, 1910 to Feb., 1911.
Rainfall of India. XIX. 1909.
Report of Administration. 1909/10.
Board of Scientific Advice.

Annual Report. 1908/9; 1909/10.
Indian Museum. (Calcutta). — Annual Report. 1907—09.

Catalogue of the Indian Decapod Crustacea. I, 2.
Echinoderma. Part VI, Asteroidea, 2. 1910.

Indiana. — Academy of Science.
Proceedings. 1909.

Iowa. — State University.

Bulletins. Laboratory of Natural History. VI, 1.
Contributions. Physical Laboratory. I, 4. 1911.

'L'BiKl.kSD.— Pharmaceutical Society.

Calendar. XXXV. 1911.

Additions to the Library. XVII

Italy.— i?. Coinifato Geologico.

Bollettiiio. 2-3. 1910.
Jamaica Institute. — Journals. I, 1—3 ; II, 2, 5— G.

Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Natnrwissaischaft. XXXIX, 1— XL, 2. 1^*10—11.
JoJm Crerar Library.

Annual Eeport. XVI. 1910.

Handbook. 1910.

List of Books ou the Histoiy of Science. Jan., 1911.
Johns Hopkins University. — Circulars. 1910, 4—1911, 5.
Kansas. — University.

Science Bulletin. V, 1-11. 1910.
Iv.^Sk'^.—Observatoire Meteorologique.

Bulletins. 1904-09.
Societe Pliysico-Mathematique.

Bulletin. Ser. II, XVI, 3. 1910.
Kharkoff. — Societe cles Sciences Physico-Chimiques.

Travaux. XXXVI, 1908.
KiKL.—Jyonimission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der detifschen Meere.

AVissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen. Abteilung Kiel. N. F.
XI-XII.
K. Universitdt.

Verzeichnis der Vorlesungen. W. 1909/10. S. 1910.

Clu-onik. 1909/10.

Dissertations.
Kiev.- — Societe des Naturalistes.

Memoires. XX, 4-XXI, 2. 1910.
Kladsenbdrg. — Universite.

Annales. 1907/08-1908. 1909.
Kodaikanal Observatory. — Annual Report. 1909—10.

Bulletins. XIX-XXIII. 1910.
KoENiGSBERG, i. Pr. — Physikalisch-ukonomische Gesellschaft.

Schriften. L. 1909.

Kyoto.— 7. University. College of Science and Engineering.
Memoirs. II, 1-14; III, 1-3. 1909-11.

La Plata. — Archivos de Pedagogia y Ciencias Afines. 16—23. 1909—11.

La Rochelle. — Academic. Section des Sciences Naturelles.

Annales. 35. 1906/07.

Flore de France. XIV. 1910.
Ladsanxe. — Institut Agricole.

Observations Meteorologiques. XVIII, 1904 ; XXII, 1908.
Societe Vnudoise des Sciences Naturelles.

Bulletins. Ser. V, 167-72; also Ser. II, XI, 66, 68. 1871/73.
Leiden. — Nederlandsche Dierkundige Yereeniging.

Aauwinsten der Bibliotlieek. I. 1908/09.

Tijdschrift. Ser. II. Deel XI, 3-XII, 2.

II

XVIII Additions to the Library.

Leiden. — Rijksuniversiteit. Sterrewacht.

Verslag. 1908-10.
Leipzig. — K. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.

Berichte. Mathematisch-pliysische Klasse. LXI, 4-5; LXII,
1-5. 1909-10.
Verein fur Erdkunde.

Mitteilungeu. 1908-09.
Leriche. Maurice. Les poissons oligocenes de la Belgirpie. Annee 1910.
Lemberg. — Seccenko- Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
Chronik. II, 38 ; III, 39 ; IV, 40. 1909.

Sammelsclirif t. Mathematisch - Nat urwissenschaf tlich-Arztliclie
Section. VII, 1 : IX ; XIV.
Liege. — Societe R. des Sciences.

Memoires. VIII. 1909.
Limbdrg. — Provinciaal Genoofschap voor Geschiedkundige Wetenschappen,
Taal en Kunst.

Limburg's Jaarboek. XVI, 4 ; XVII. 1910-11.

Linz. —Museum Francisco-Carolinuni.
Jahresbericlit. 69.

Lisbon. — Sociedade de Geographia.

Boletim. Ser. XXVIII, 1-12: XXIX, 1-3. 1910-11.
Liverpool. — Geographical Society.

Transactions and Annual Eeport. XVIII-XIX. 1909-10.
London. — Biological Society.

Proceedings. XXIV. 1909/10.
R. Geographical Society.

Geographical Journal. XXXV, 3-XXXVII, 5. 1910-11.
Geological Society.

Quarterly Journal. 261-65. 1910-11.

Geological Literature added to Librar^^ 1909.
Linnaean Society.

Journal. Botany. 272. 1909. Zoology. 201, 202, 207. 1910.

List. 1910/11.

Proceedings. 122. 1909-10.
Mathematical Society.

Proceedings. VIII, 3-7; IX, 1-7. 1910-11.
R. Microscopical Society.

Journal. 1910, 1-1911, 3.
National Physical Laboratory.

Annual Report. 1909, 1910.

Collected Eesearches. VI- VII. 1910-11.
Patent Office.

Catalogue of Library. I. Authors. 1899.

Library Series. 1-2, 4-18. 1905-07.

Subject Lists. X. S. AA-BE, BF-BL. 1908/09.

Additions to the Library. XIX

London. — Royal Society.

Philosophical Transactions. Ser. A. 161-76.' Ser.B. 273-84. 1910-11.
Proceedings. Ser. A. 563-79. Ser. B. 555-68. 1910-11.
Louisiana. — State Museum.

Natural History Survey. Bulletin. 1. 1911.
Ldeneburg. — Naturii'issenschaftlicher Verein.

Jahreshefte. XVIII. 1908/10.
Ldnd. — K. Universitet.

Acta. :N. F. V, 1-2, 1909; Register. 1864-1904.
Biblioteks Arsberattelse. 1909.
LuxEMBODRGf. — Institut Grand-Ducal.

Section des sciences naturelles, physiques et niatheniatiques.
Archives trimestrielles. N. S. IV, 1-V, 1. 1909-10.
Lyons. — Academic des Sciences.

Memoires. Ser. Ill, 11. 1911.
Sociefe d' Agriculture., Sciences et Industrie.

Annales. 1909.
Universite.

Annales. Science-Medecine. X. S. 1, 6, 25-29. 1899-1909.
Annales. Droit-Lettres. X. S. II, 4, 21, 22. 1900-1910.
Societe des amis de I'Universite. Bulletins. XXIII, 1— XXIV, 1,
1910-11.
Bulletin Historique du Dioclse de Lyon. I, 6 ; II, 2. 1909. 1911.
Madras. — Fisheries Bureau.

Bulletins. 4—5.
Madrid.— ii. Academia de Ciencias Exactas. Fisicas y Naturales.
Memorias. XV.
Revista. VIII, 7-IX, 8.
Comision del Mapa Geologico.
Boletin. X-XI. 1908/09.
Observafo7-io.

Anuario. 1911.

Eesumen de las Observaciones Meteorologicas. 1902—05.
MAGDEBDRG.—iVf nse«m fih- Natur- und Heimatkunde.

Abhandlungen und Berichte. II, 1. 1910.
Maine Agricultural Experiment Station.

Bulletin. 190. 1911.
Manchester, England —Geographical Society.

Journal. XXV, 2-XXVI, 2. 1909-10.
Literary and Philosophical Society.

Memoirs and Proceedings. LIV, 2-LV, 1. 1909-11.
Museum.

Publications. 67- 71. 1910.
University.

Publications. Historical Series. IX— XL 1911. Medical Series.
XIII. 1911.

II*

XX Additions to the Library.

Mannheim. — Verein fur Naturkunde.

Jalu'esbericlit. 75. 1910.
Marburg. — Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der gescnufen Naturwissenschaften.

Schriften. X, 2-4, G-7, 10, 12 ; XII, 1-7 ; XIII. 1-6.

Sitzungsberichte. 1909-10.
Mecklenburg. — Verein der Freunde der Nafurgeschichte.

Archiv. LXIII, 2-LXW. 1909-10.
Melbourne. — National Museum.

Memoir. 3. 1910.
Mexico. — Instituto Geologico.

Boletin. 25, 27. 1910.

Parergones. Ill, 3-8. 1909-10.
Instituto Medico Nacional.

Anales. July, 1908 to Feb., 1909 and March to April, 1910.
Ohservatorio Meteorologico Magnetico Central.

Boletin. May, 1909 to Dec, 1909 ; Feb. to June, 1910.
Sociedad Cientifica ^'•Antonio Alzate'\

Memorias y Revista. XXVII, 4 -XXVIII, 8.
Michigan. — Academy of Sciences.

Report. XII. 1910.
Middelburg. — Zeeuwsch GenootscJuip der Wttensclm]>pe)i.

Archief. 1910.

Milan. — jB. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere.

Rendicouti. Ser. II. XLII, 16-20, XLII, 16. 1910.
R. Osservntorio Astronoiuico di Brera.

Pubblicazioni. XL VII. 1910.
Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali e del Mnseo Civico.

Atti. XLVIII, 4-L, 1. 1910-11.

Milwaukee. — Public Museum.

Annual Report. XXVII-XXXVIII. 1909-10.

Bulletin. I, 1.
Minnesota. - Geological and Natural History Survey.

Botanical Series. Report of Survey. V.

Botanical Studies. IV, 1, VIII; Ser. II, 1-6; Ser. Ill, 1-8.

Plant Studies. I-IV.

Bulletins. 1, 2, 5, 8, 10.

Zoological Series. II— IV.

MissovRL—B ota'fiical Garden.

Annual Report. XXI. 1910.

MoDENA. — R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti.

Memorie. Ser. II, T. XII, 1, 1896; Ser. Ill, T. VIII. 1910.
Societa dei Naturalisti e Mafematici.

Annuario. II-VI, VII, 2-4, XU, 3-4, Ser. II, T. XIV.

Atti. Rendiconti. Ser. Ill, T. VII, 2; Ser. IV, T. Ill, 1-2,

VI, XI and XII.

Additions to the Library. XXI

^o-^Tk-^x.— Agricultural Experiment Station (Bozeman).
Annual Report. XVI. 1909.
■ Bulletins. 77-80, 82-83, 85. 1909-11.
College of Agriculture and Mechanical Arts.
Experiment Station Circular. 4. 1910.
University of Montana.
Bulletin, m. 1910.
Montevideo. —Museo Nacional.

Auales. IV, 1-2. 1910 ; also Ser. II, T. I, 3.
Observatorio Nacional Fisico-Climatologico.
Boletin. 79-84. 1909.
MoNTPELLiER. — Academic des Sciences et Lettres.

Bulletin Mensual. 1910, 4-7; 1911, 1-4.
Memoires de la Section de Medecine. Ser. II, T. III.
Memoires de la Section des Sciences. Ser. II, T. IV, 1—2, V, 2.
Moscow. — Societe I. des Naturalist es.

Bulletins. 1908, 3-1909. N. S. XXIII.
MiJNSTER i.'SV. — West fdlischer Provitizial-Verein fiir Wissenschaft undKunst.

Jahresbericht. XXXVIII. 1909-10.
Munich. — K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften.

Abhaudlungen. Mathematiscli-physikalische Klasse. XXIV, 3 ;
XXV, 1-4. 1909-10. Snpplement-Bande. I, 7-10; II, 2;
III, 1 ; IV, 1-2.
Sitzungsbericlite. Mathematiscli-physikalisclie Klasse. 1909.
Abhandlung. 1909, 15-1910, 9.

Philosophisch-philologisch und historisclie
Klasse. 1909. Abhandlung. 1909. 7-9.
1910. 1-6.
Xancy. — Academic de Stanislas.

Memoires. Ser. VI. T. VI- VII. 1908-10.
N.iPLES.— i2. Instituto d'Incoraggiamento.

Atti. Ser. VI. T. LX-LXI. 1908-09.
R. Accademia delle Scienze Fisiclie e Matematiche.
Atti, Ser. II, T. XIV.

Rendiconti. Ser. III. T. XV, ^-XNi, 12. 1910 ; also supple-
ment 189.
R. Accademia di Scienze Morcdi e Politiche.
Atti. XXXIX-XL. 1910.
Rendiconti. XLVIII-XLIX. 1909-10.
R. Universitd.

Museo Zoologico. Annuario. X. S. Ill, 1-12. 1910.
Xat.\l. — Government Museum.

Annals. II, 2. 1911.
Naturae Novitates. 1910, 3 to 1911, 7.
Nedchatel.— ,4ca«?emte Facidte des Lettres.
Recueil des Travaux. V. 1910.

XXII Additions to the Library.

Neuchatel. —Societe Keuchateloise des Sciences Natnrelles.

Bulletins. XXXV-XXXVIT. 1907-10.
New South Wales.— iiwMerm Society.

Proceedings. No. 135-8. 1909-10.
New York. — Academy of Sciences.

Annals. XIX, 2-XX, 2; XXI, pp. 1-86. 1910-11.
Botanical Garden.

Bulletins. VI, 21-22; VII, 25. 1910-11.
Public Library.

Bulletins. XIV, 4-XV, 6. 1910-11.
State Museum.

Memoirs. XII, 1 ; XIII. 1909-10.
New Zealand. — Institute.

Transactions and Proceedings. XLII. N. S. 1910.
Newcastle-upon-Tyne.— iVor//io/J5^7?^te«f/ Institute of Milling and Mechanical
Engineers.

Transactions. LX, 1-9; LXI, 1-4. 1910-11.

Annual Report. 1909/10.
Norfolk and Norioich Naturalists' Society.

Transactions. IX, 1. 1910.
North Carolina. — University.

Philological Club. Studies in Pliilology. V-VII. 1910-11.
North Dakota. — University.

Quarterly Journal. I, 1-4. 1910/11.

School of Mines Bulletin. N. S. I, 2, 6. 1909.
North Staffordshire Field Club.

Annual Report and Transactions. XLIV-XLV. 1909-10.
1910-11.
Northamptonshire Natural History Society and Field Club.

Journal. XV, 117-24. 1909-10.
NortJmmbet-land, Durhat)i and Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Natural History Society.

Transactions. I, 1-3; II. N. S. Ill, 1-2. 1911.
Nova Scotia. — Department of Mines.

Report. 1910.
Nova Scotian Institide of Science.

Proceedings and Transactions. XI, 3-4; XII. 2. 1904-8.
Nuremberg. —A^afwr/jis^onsc/ie Gesellschaft.

Abhandlungen. VIII; XV, 1-3; XVIII.
Odessa. — Observatoire Mcteorologique et Magnefique.

Annuaire. 1908-09.
Ohio. - State Academy of Science.

Proceedings. V, 6. 1910.
Geological Survey.

Bulletins. 10-12. 1909-10.
O K L ahoma . — Geological Survey.

Bulletins. 2, 5. G. 1911.

Additions to the Library. XXIII

Oklahoma. — State University.

Eesearcli Bulletins. 3-4. 1910.
Oporto. — Academia Polytechnica.

Annaes Scientificas. Ill, 3-V, 4. 1910-11.
Oxford. — Eaddiff'e Library.

Catalogue of books added during- 1910.
University Observatory.

Astrograpliic Catalogue. V— VI. 1910.
Paedologisches Jaarboek. I, 1900 ; VI-VII. 1906-09.
Palermo. — Societd di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche.

Giornale di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche. XXVIII, 1911.
Paris. — Ecole Polyteclmique.

Journal. 2e Ser. XIII-XIV. 1910-11.
Ecole Normale Superieure.

Annales. XLV, 1-XLVIII, 6. 1908-11.
Museum d'Histoire Naturelle.

Bulletins. 1909, 8; 1910, 1-5.

Laboratoire de Phanerogamie. Xotulae Systematicae, par H.
Lecomte. T. I-II, 2. 1909-11.
Observatoire.

Papport Annuel. 1909-10.
Societe Zoologique de France.

Bulletins. XVII, 1, 8; XXXIV.

Memoires. XXII. 1909.
Pasadena. — T/troop Institute.

Bulletins. 46-50. 1910-11.
Pathological Revista Quindicinale. II. 36—44. 1910.
VF.wj.—Ministerio de Fomenlo.

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas. Boletin. 75—76. 1910.
Philadelphia. — Academy of Natural Sciences.

Journal. XIV, 2.
Geographical Society.

Bulletins. VIII, 2-IX, 2. 1910-11.
Wagner Free Institute.

Transactions. VII. 1910.
Photographic Journal, London. L, 2— LI, 6 and supplement to 5. 1910—11.
FiSA.—Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali.

Atti. Memorie. XXV. 1910.

Processi Verbali. XIX. 2-5: XX, 1. 1910-11.
PiTTSBCRGH. — Camcgie Library.

Annual Reports. V— VIII, XIII-XIV. 1901-4, 1909-10.
Carnegie Museum.

Memoirs. IV, 2, 5—6.

Publications. 60, 61, 63, 66.
Potsdam. — A strophysikalisches Observatorium.

Publikationen. XX-XXII, 1. 1910-11.

XXIV Additions to the Libnuy.

Potsdam.— Photographische Himmelskarte. V, 1910.
Prag. — K; K. Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaffen.
Jahresbericht. 1909, 1910.
Sitzuiigsberichte. 1909, 1910.^
Ceske Spoleciwsti Entomologkke. Casopis. VII, 1 -VIII, 1. 1910—11.
Deutscher Naturwissenschaftlich-niedizirnscher Verein /«>• Bolnnoi.

Lotos. LVri-LVIII. 1909-10.
K. K. Sternioarte.

Magnetisclie uiid lueteorologisclie Beobachtungen. 1909.
Providence. — Roger 'Williams Park Museum.
Bulletins. 7-8.
Monographs. 14, 1-5, 17.
Quebec. — Literary and Historical Society.

Transactions. V, 1 ; 1900-1902. ^o. 24.
Province.

Guides. 1909-10.
Societe de Geographic.

Bulletins. IV, 1-V, 3. 1910-11.
Regensbdrg. —ffis^omcAer Verein von Oberpfalz luid Regensburg.
Bericht. VII. 1907-09.
Verhandlungen. LXI. 1909.
Zoologisch-Mineralogischer Verein.

Abliandlungen. Hefte 1, 3, 5, 7-9. 1849-64.
Repertoire d''Art et d' Archeologie. Annee I, 1—4. 1910.
RiGx.— Naturforscher -Verein.

Arbeiten. N. F. XII. 1910.
Korrespondenzblatt. LIII. 1910.
Bio de Janeiro. — Institute Oswaldo Cruz.
Memoria. I[, 1-2, 1910.

Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research.
Studies. X-XII.

Roentgen Society. Journal. VI, 23-VII, 27. 1910-11.
Rome.— jR. Accademia dei Lincei.

Atti. Serie V. Rendiconti. Classe di Scienze fisiche, mate-

matiche e natural!. XIX, 6-XX, 10. 1910-11.
Rendiconto dell'adunanza solenne. 1910, II.
Accademia Pontifica Romana dei Nnovi Lincei.
Atti. LII, 1-2; LXIII, 1-7. 1909/10.

St. Louis. — Academy of Sciences.

Transactions. XVIII, 6; XIX, 2-11; XX, 1-3.
St. Petersbourg. — Academic I. des Sciences.

Bulletins. Classe Phys.-Math. Ser. V, 1898, 5 ; Ser. VI, 1910, 6 -

1911, 11. '

Memoires. Classe Phys.-Matb. Ser. VIII, V, 3. T. XVIII,
9, 14, 1.5; XXI, (i; XXrv. 1, 2, 4-10; XXV, 1-8.

Additions to the Library. XXV

St. Petersbourg. — Memoires. Classe Hist.-Phil. Ser. VIII, T. Ill, ] ;
VII, 1-2; VIII, 13-14.
I. Botanic Garden.

Acta. XXVI, 2 ; XXVII, 3 ; XXVIII, 3.

Comife Geologique.

Bulletins. XXVIII-XXIX, 4. 1908-10.
Memoires. X. S. 40, 51-2, 56-7, 59. 1908-10.

I. Bu8sia7i Geographical Society.

Bulletins. XLV, 1-9; XLVI, 1-5. 1909-10.
Report. 1909.

Santi.4Go de Chile. — Dentscher NafunvissenscJiaftlicher Verein.
Verhaudlungen. V, 1—2 ; VI, 1.
Soeiedad Cientifica de Chile.
Actes. XIX. 1909.

Sao 'Pavlo.— Soeiedad Scientifica.

Revista. Jan., 1909 to Aug., 1910.

Schweizerische Naturforschetide GesellscJiaff.

Verhandluugeu. XCII-XCIII. 1909-10.
Sharp, D.- — Fauna Hawaiiensis. II, part. Ill ; III, part VI.
Siena. — ii. .Accademia dei Fisiocratici.

Atti. Ser. IV, II, 1-6.

Smithsonian Institution.

National Museum. Bulletins. 39, 71—4.

Contributions from National Herbarium.

XIII, 3-9; XIV, 1-2; XV.
Proceedings. XXXVII-XXXVIII. 1911.
Report. 1910.
Bureau of American Ethnolog3^ Bulletins. 37, 43, 45, 49—50.

Societa Entomologica Italiana.

Bulletins. XLI, 1-4. 1909.

South Africa. —i?o^«Z Society.

Transactions. II, 1—2, 1910—11, and Index.

South-Enstern Union of Scientific Societies (Woking).
South-Eastern Naturalist. 1910.

South London Entomological and Natural History Society.
Proceedings. 1909-10; 1910-11.

Staten Island Aftsociation of Arts and Sciences.
Proceedings. Ill, 1-2.

Staten Island, N. Y. — Natural Science Association.

Proceedings. II, 3—4.
Stockholm. — /sT. Svenska Vetenskaps-Academi.

Arkiv for Botanik. IX, 2-X, 1.

Arkiv for Kemi, Mineralogi ocli Geologi. Ill, 4—6; IV, 1.

XXVI Additions to the Library.

Stockhol:«.— Arkiv for Matematik, Astronomi ocli Fysik. VI. 1-3.

Arkiv for Zoologi. VI, 1-4; VII, 1.

Arsbok. 1910.

Handlingar. XLV, 3-XLVI. 3.

Meteorologiska lakttagelser. L, Append., LI.

Les Prix Nobel ; 907-8.
K. Bibliothek.

Accessions-Katalog. 23. 1908.
Entomologisk Forening.

Eutomologisk Tidskrift. XXXI, 1-4. 1910.
Forstliche Vers uch san stalt.

Meddelanden. 7. 1910.

Stuttgart. — Verein fur Vaterldndische Nafnrkunde in Wilrttemherg.
Jahreshefte. 1910, 1.

Sydney. — Australian Museum.
Memoir. IV, 12.
Report. LVI. 1910.
Special Catalogue. No. I, Vol. Ill, pt. 1.

Tasmania.— Royal Society.

Papers and Proceedings. 1909.

Texas. — University.

Bulletins. 129, 134-8, 140, 142-3, 145-6, 152-3, H;6-7, 170, 178.

TiFLis. — Physikalisches Observatoriuni.
Beobachtungen. 1899-1904.
Seismische Mouatsberichte. 1909. 1—7.

Tokyo. — Deutsche Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Volkerkunde Osfasiens.
Mitteilungen. XII, 2. 1910; also XI, 2. 1908.

University.

Journal of tlie College of Science. XXVII, 7-20. XXXVIII, 1-6.
Calendar. 1909-10.
Toronto. — Canadian Institute.

Proceeding.s. II, no. 12, part 6.
Transactions. VIII, no. 19, part 4.

University.

Publications. Biological Series. 8.

G-eological Series. 6—7.

Toulouse.— ^ca^^emie des Sciences.

Memoires. Ser. X. T. IX.
Universite.

Eaculte des Sciences. Annales. Ser. II, T. X. 3—1 ; Ser. Ill,

T. I, 1, 3.
Bihliotheque Meridionale. Ser. I, T. I, 4 XIII, XIV; Ser. II,
T. III. VIII-X, XII-XIII.

Additions to the Lilrra}'}'. XXVII

Toulouse. — Annuaire. 1899—1900.

Bulletins. B, 1-2.
Observatoire Astronomiqne, Magmiique et Meteorologique.

Annales. VI. 1907.
Sociefe (VHistoire Naturelle.

Bulletins Trimestr. XLII, 3-4; XLIII, 2-8.
Triest. — Osservatorio Maritimo.

Eapporto Annuale. 190(i.
Tromsoe. —Museum.

Aarsberetning. 1908-09.

Aarshefter. 30-32. 1907-09.

Geologiske Undersegelser. IV, Pettersen.
Teondheim. — li. Norske Videnskabers Selskab.

Skrifter. 1872, I ; 1874, I-II ; 1909.
Tufts College.

Studies. Scientific Series. Ill, 1.

Turin. — Mtisei di Zoologia ed Anatomia Comparatu.

Bolletini. XXVI, 616-33 and index.
United States. — Department of Agrictdture.
Crop Reporter. 1910, 5-10.
Library. Bulletins. 46—53.

Monthly Bulletins. I, 3-II, 4.
Division of Publication. Xo. 713.

Weatlier Bureau. Mt. Weather Observatory. Bulletins. II,
4-III, 5 and Index. 1910.

Department of the Interior.

Geological S^rve3^ Annual Eeport. XXXI. 1910.

Bulletins. 323-4, 328, 337, 343, 361, 364-8,
370, 381-2, 385-6, 398, 406-7, 415, 417,
419-20, 422, 425-30, 432-47, 453, 465.
Geologic Atlas. Polios 167-176.
Professional Papers. 68.
Water Supplj^ and Irrigation Papeis. 237,
239, 241, 243-55, 260, 262, 264.
Library of Congress.

Outline Scheme of Classes (preliminary), Dec, 1909.
Publications issued since 1897, Jan., 1911.
Report of Librarian. 1910.
Naval Observatory.

Publications. 2d Ser., VI-VII. 1911.
Superintendent. Synopsis of Report. 1910.
Upsala. — K. Universitef.

Arsskrift. 1909.

Geologiska Institution. Bulletins. IX, 17—20, 1908—11 ; and
Index, I— X.

XXVIII Additions to the Libraiy.

Utrecht. — K. NederlandscJi Meteroloyisdi Insiituuf.
Annuaire. 1909, A-B.

Mededeelingen en Verliandlingen. 102 (10-11), 1910/11.
Provinciaal Utrechfsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschap2>en.
Aateekeningen van het Verhandelde in de Sectie-Vergaderingen

1910.
Verslag van het Verhandelde. 1910.
Vanderbilt Southern History Society.

Publications. 1.
Vanderbilt University.

Oriental Series. VI-VII. 1908-10.
Vienna. — K. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften.

Erdbeben-Konnnission. Bericht und Chronik. V. 1910.
Mitteilungeu. XXXVII. 1909.
Sitzungsberichte. Mathenmt.-natiirwiss. Klasse. CXVIII, 8—
CXIX, Abt. Ill, 5.
K. K. Central-Anstalt f'iir Meterologie und Geodynamik.

Jahrbiicher. N. F. XLIII-XLV.
K. K. Geologische Eeichsanstnlt.

Abhandlungen. XVI, 3; XX, 3; XXII, 1.
Jahrbiicher. LX, 1-3. 1910.

Verhandlungen. 189B (13-15); 1903 (1); 1909 (15-18); 1910
(1-18).
K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmusenm.

Annalen. XXIII, 4 -XX IV, 2. 1909-10.
Verein zur Verbreitung Naturwissenscliaftlicher Kenntnisse in Wien.

Schriften. L.
K. K. Zoologlscli-Botanisdie Gesellschaft.
Verhandlungen. LIX, LX. 1909-10.
Virginia^ University of.

Philosophical Society. Publications. Bulletins. I, 1—4. 1910.
Humanistic Series. I. 1. 1911.
Scientific Series. I. 1-5. 1910-11.

Warren, Pa. — Academy of Sciences.

Transactions. I, 2. 1908/09.

Western Pennsylvania Engineers' Society.

Proceedings. XXVI, 4-XXVn, 5. 1910-11.

Wiesbaden. — Nassauischer Verein fiir Naturkunde.
Jahrbuch. (J3. 1910.

Wilson Ornithological Club. Oberlin, O.

Wilson Bulletins. 70-4, 1910-11; also XXIII, 2 ; Indices to
XXI-XXII.

Wisconsin Geoloyical and Natural History Society.
Bulletins. XIX-XXII.
Road Pamphlet. 5.

Additions to the Library. XXIX

Wisconsin Natural History Society.

Bulletins. N. S. VII, 3-4, VIII, 4 -IX, 2. 1909-11.
Occasional Papers. I, 1, 3, II, 1—3, III.

WtJRZBDRG. — Physikalisch-medizinische Gesellschaft.

Sitzungs-Berichte. 1909, 1-5; 1910, 1-5.
Wyoming Historical and Geological Society.

Proceedings and Collections. XI. 1910.
Yale University.

Astronomical Observatory^. Transactions. II, 2. 1910.
Z iJRicH. — Naturforscli ende Gesellschaft.

Vierteljahrsschrift. LIV, 3-LV. 2. 1909-10.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

Incorporated A. D. 1799

VOLUME 16, PAGES 1-116.

MAY, 1910

The
Amphipoda of Bermuda

BY

B. W. KUNKHL, Ph.D.

SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL, YALE UNIVERSITY

I'UBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF

YALE UNIVERSITY

NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT
1910

vf

AUG

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

Incorporated A. D. 1799

VOLUME 16, PAGES 1-116.

MAY, 1910

The
Amphipoda of Bermuda

BY

B. W. KUNKEL, Ph.D.

SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL, YALE UNIVERSITY;

PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF

YALE UNIVERSITY

NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT

IQIO

WEIMAR : PRINTED BY R. WA(JXER SOHN

I. — The Amphipoda of Bermuda.
By B. W. KuNKEL, Ph.D.

The Amphipoda of the Bermudas and West Indies apparently have
been almost entirely neglected by systematists. The only notices
which we have of Amphipoda from Bermuda are those of Caprella
danilevskii (Czerniavski, 1868), recorded by Stebbing in the " Chal-
lenger " Report (vol. 39, p. 1364, pi. 145), Cyamns fascicularis
(Verrill, 1903) from a sperm whale captured off Bermuda and ex-
hibited at St. George's, and Orchestia agilis (Smith, 1873) which
Verrill notes as being abundant (Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. XI, p. 21—22,
1903).

The greater part of the material for the present study was col-
lected by Prof. Verrill and parties during two expeditions to the
islands in the spring of 1898 and 1901, and was turned over to the
writer for study in the spring of 1906; besides this material, several
vials bore the label of G. Brown Goode, 1876—77, several that of
W. M. Rankin, 1898, and one vial was received from Dr. L. J. Cole,
dated Bermuda Biological Station, July 15, 1903.

In general, no exact data regarding the localities and surrounding
conditions were recorded, but where such are known due reference
will be made to them. The collecting by Verrill was done in shallow
water along the shore, at most in only a few fathoms, and nearly
all the forms are shallow water species.

The most striking peculiarity of the Amphipodous fauna of Ber-
muda is its close relationship to that of the Mediterranean. Of the
45 species recorded from Bermuda, 19, or possibly 20, of them
occur also in the Mediterranean, and nearly all of these are abundant
in European waters. Eighteen of these 45 species are peculiar to
Bermuda and only 7 species which are not endemic, are not found
also in the Mediterranean. Thus nearly ^25 or 44*^/0, of the known
species of Bermuda Amphipoda are Mediterranean. In contrast
to the richness of European forms the 9 species common to South
and Central American shores is striking, especially in view^ of the
fact that 93 ^{^ of the Decapod Crustacea of Bermuda have been re-
corded from the Florida Keys and the West Indies (Verrill, Trans.
Conn. Acad., vol. XIII, p. 452, 1908). This paucity of forms from
Central and South America probably has little significance, however,

4 B. W. Kunket,

and is due simply to the small amount of collecting of the smaller
Crustacea from these waters.

The distribution of the species of Amphipoda known to occur in
the waters of Bermuda is designated in the following hst. New
species are printed in heavy-faced type and new genera are preceded
by an asterisk.

1. Lysianassa punctata. Naples.

2. Amphilochus brunneus. Naples.

3. Leiicothoe spinicarpa. Arctic Ocean, North Atlantic, North Sea

and Skagerrak, Greenland ; Norway, British Isles, Azores,
France, Mediterranean.

4. Stenothoe marina. North Atlantic, North Sea, Adriatic Sea.

5. kS. valida. Rio Janeiro, Mediterranean ?

6. *Pariphinotus tuckeri.

7. Colomastix piisilla. British Isles, France, Mediterranean.

8. Panoploeopsis porta.

9. Eusiroides crassi. South Atlantic.

10. Pontogeneia verrilli.

1 1 . Melitafirsiielii. Rio Janeiro, Singapore, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales.

12. M. planaterga.

13. CcradocHs orchestiipes. Mediterranean.

14. C. parkeri.

15. C. colei.

16. Maera inaeqiiipes. Mediterranean, Azores.

17. M. raihbunae. Key West, Fla.

18. M. tinkerensis.

19. ElasmopHS rapax. British Isles, Christianiafjord, France, Azores,

Mediterranean.

20. E. magnispinatus.

21. E. pocillimauus. Mediterranean, Atlantic coast of North America

(Long Island Sound, Vineyard Sound;.

22. Gammarus breweri.

23. *Insula antennulella.

24. Orchestia platensis. Rio de la Plata, Atlantic coast of North

America (Bay of Fundy to New Jersey), Mediterranean, Sea
of Tiberias.

25. Hyale prevostii. Mediterranean, Atlantic Coast of North America,

Rio Janeiro, Valparaiso, Peru.

26. H. ponlica. North Atlantic, North Sea, Mediterranean.

27. H. trifoliadens.

28. *Parhyalella batesoni.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 5

29. MicrodeutopHs anomalus. Atlantic coast of Norway, Shetland

Isles, Black Sea.

30. Autonoe longipes. Naples, Scandinavia, British Isles, Port Jack-

son, N. S. Wales.

31. Eurystheus lina.

32. Podoceropsis sophia. Arctic Ocean, Scandinavia, British Isles,

Shetland.

33. Isaea longipalpus.

34. Amphithoe longimana. New England coast.

35. A. nibricata. North Atlantic and adjoining seas of Europe.

36. A. pollex.

37. Grubia crassicornis. Naples, Black Sea.

38. G. coei.

39. Ericthonius brazilicnsis. Atlantic coast of North America, Nor-

way, Adriatic Sea, Rio Janeiro, San Francisco, Cal.

40. Chelura terebrans. Atlantic coast of North America, Norway

to Black Sea.

41. Caprella equilibra. Mediterranean, Norway, Charleston, N. Car.,

Rio Janeiro, Hong Kong, N. S. Wales.

42. C. bennudia.

43. C. danilevskii. Mediterranean, Black Sea, Copenhagen, Bay of

Biscay, Sea of Japan, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales, Rio Janeiro.

44. Protellopsis stebbingii. Gulf of Mexico.

45. Cyatnus fascicularis.

The specimens were all of relatively small size, the largest specimen
measuring less than 20 mm. in length, which is in accord with previous
observations that the Amphipoda of Arctic regions are of larger
size than those of warm waters.

The classification of the Gammaridea into families is in a rather
unsatisfactory condition and no attempt at revision has been made
in the following pages. Boeck (i876) divides them into 10 famihes
and 22 subfamilies ; Stebbing (1888) in the " Challenger " Report makes
26 families and in his later work on the Gammaridea (1906) he
recognizes 41 families; Delia Valle (1893) in his monograph re-
cognizes only 10 families which, however, differ from Boeck's ; and
Sars (1895) divides the Gammaridea of Norway alone into 26 families.

For complete synonomy, reference should be made to the exten-
sive works of Stebbing, Sars, and Delia Valle. Acknowledgment
is made at this time of the privileges of the laboratory of the U. S.
Bureau of Fisheries at Woods Hole, Mass. where part of this work
was done in the summer of 1906.

Tribe Gammaridea.

Head rather small, not fused with first thoracic segment ; e3'es
rarely of very large. size, usually compound, first antennae consisting
of 3-jointed peduncle and flagellum ; second antennae with peduncle
usually consisting of 5 joints and flagellum ; maxillipeds with inner
plates free and with 2- to 4-jointed palps.

Body usually compressed; thorax of 7 distinct segments, rarely
reduced to 6 ; 5 or 6 segments bearing gills ; 4 segments in female
bearing marsupial plates; thoracic legs overlapped at base by epi-
mera, the first 4 being usually larger than the posterior 3.

First 3 abdominal segments always free ; posterior 3 usually dis-
tinct ; uropod 1 always biramous.

Key to the genera of the Gammaridea.

I Guathojjod 2 with tliuxl joint elongate .... Lysiauassa
I Gnathopod 2 with third joint short .... 2

IGnathopod 2 with fifth joint greatly prolonged ;
telson elongate, tapering, entire Amphilochus
Not with same combination of characters . . 3
IGnathopod 1 with chela formed bj^ fifth and sixth
joints Leucothoe
Gnathoj)od 1 otherwise 4

Epimeron 4 enormously developed Stenothoe

Epimeron 4 not especially large 6

Gnathopods 1 and 2 simple ; body depressed and
ridged dorsally ; pleopod 3 with j)eduncle ex-
panded to form long process Pariphinotus

Not with same combination of characters . . G

Gnathopod 2 with second joint rather slender and

greatlj^ enlarged distally, gnathopod 1 ver3'

small Colomastix

Gnathopods otherwise 7

Epimera 1—3 tapering acutely ventrally .... Fanoploeopsis
Epimera 1—3 more or less rounded ventrally . 8

Antennae with calceoli 9

Antennae without calceoli 10

10

1]

12

13
14

15

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

\ Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum Eusiroides

\ Antenna 1 without accessory flagellum .... Pontogeneia

Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum of more than
2 joints ; pereiopods 1 and 2 without glands ;
uropod 3 projecting beyond others, biramous ;
telson cleft 11

Not Avith same combination of characters . 15

\ Uropod 3 with raini'very unequal Melita

\ Uropod 3 with rami not very unequal . . 12

Maxillae 1 and 2 with outer and inner plates very

setose 13

Maxillae 1 and 2 with outer and inner plates not

very setose 14

I Pleon segments 4—6 with dorsal spinules . . . Gammarus
I Pleon segments 4—6 without dorsal spinules . . Ceradocus

\ Pereiopods 3—5 slender Maera

I Pereiopods 3—5 robust Elasmopus

Antenna 1 with no accessor^^ flagellum ; mandible
without palp ; pereiopods 1 and 2 without
spinning glands ; uropod 3 small, uniramous 16

Not with tliis combination of characters . 19

Maxilliped with 3-jointed palp Insula

Maxilliped with 4-jointed palp 17

Antenna 1 shorter than peduncle of 2 .... Orchestia
Antenna 1 longer than peduncle of 2 . . 18

Maxilla 1 with palp Hyale

Maxilla 1 without palp Parhyalella

Antenna 1 with accessor^' flagellum well developod ;

maxilla 1 with inner plate small ; pereiopods 1
19 I and 2 with spinning glands ; gnathopod 1

larger than gnathopod 2 20

Not with this combination of characters . 21

I Gnathopod 1 in male with fifth joint produced to
form a large tooth Micro deutopus
Gnathopod 1 in male with fifth joint not so produced Autonoe
Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum ; low^er lip
with anterior margin of outer plate entire ;
21 I pereiopods 1 and 2 with spinning glands ; uro-
pod 3 not uncinate 22

Not with this combination of characters . 24

22

Telson emarginate Eurystheus

Telson entire 23

23 I

24

25

26

B. W. Ktmkel,

Pereiopods 1—5 not subchelate Podoceropsis

Pereiopods 1—5 subclielate Isaea

(Lower lip with anterior margin of outer plate in-
cised ; pereiopods 1 and 2 with spinning glands ;
uropod 3 uncinate 25

y Not with these characters 26

I Antenna 1 without accessory ilagellum .... Amphithoe

1^ Antenna 1 with accessory ilagellum Grubia

Antenna 1 without accessory flagellum ; antenna

2 with Ilagellum not spatulate Ericthonius

Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum ; antenna 2

with spatulate flagellum Chelura

Lysianassa punctata (O. G. Costa, 1840), Stebbing, 1906.

1840. Caliisoma punctata. O. G. Costa, Fauna Reg. Napoli,
Crost., Cat. p. 5.

1906. Lysianassa punctata. Stebbing, Das Tierreich, Lief. 21,
p. 40.

Eyes large, compound, reniform, ocelli large and not crowded
together, pigmented in specimens preserved in alcohol.

First antennae very short ; first joint of peduncle twice as long
as second, third joint shorter than second ; principal flagellum made
up of about 10 joints, about as long as peduncle ; accessory flagellum
composed of 4 joints, about half as long as principal flagellum.
Second antennae shorter than first and more slender ; flagellum
shorter than peduncle, made up of 5 joints ; fourth and fifth joints
of peduncle subequal ; third joint shorter than fourth.

Mandibles with body rather slender ; cutting edge not denticulated ;
palp long, 3-jointed, third joint slender and not quite as long as
second, provided with several spinules apically ; molar tubercle
wanting. Lower lip with inner plates small and rounded ; outer
plates triangular, much longer than broad. First maxillae with inner
plates very small ; outer plates with branched spines on distal margin ;
palp made up of 2 joints, of which the first is very short and the
second has a serrated, blunt distal end. Second maxillae with inner
plate much broader than outer and of about same length, broader
at distal end which is oblique and provided with spinules. Maxil-
lipeds with 3-jointed palp having terminal dactyl-like spine ; second
joint rather long and slender, with slender spinules on inner margin ;
third joint with long spinules apically; inner plates with 3 teeth on
round distal margin, fine cilia on inner margin ; outer plates moder-

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 9

ately broad, unarmed, extending nearly as far as second joint of
palp.

In female, lirst gnathopods with triangular epimeron, with anterior
ventral angle rounded ; second joint fairly stout, cylindrical ; third
joint broader than long; fourth triangular with posterior margin
convex and provided with setae toward apex ; wrist somewhat longer
than broad and provided with setae apically ; hand slender and

Fig. 1. Lysianassa punctata (O. G. Costa).

tapering, not subchelate, posterior margin provided with long setae
and sharp tooth-like spines ; linger short and curved, unguiform.

Second gnathopods with narrow epimeron more than twice as high
as long, rhomboidal ; second joint long and very slender, slightly
broader distall}' than proximally ; third joint 4 times as long as broad ;
fourth joint about ^l^ as long as third, broader at distal end than
at proximal, rounded apically, articulating with wrist by distal half
of anterior margin ; wrist longer than third joint, triangular, broad-
est at middle, posterior margin convex, anterior margin straight
with many fine setae near middle ; hand shorter and narrower than
wrist, subrectangular, broader at distal margin which is transverse
and concave, anterior margin with abundant fine setae toward apical
portion, distal portion of posterior margin with many closely set

10 B. IV. Kunkrl,

sharp teeth ; finger very short and curved, not as long as width of
distal end of hand.

Pereiopods of usual form without spinning glands ; epimera rather
high, third epimeron rectangular; fourth greatly elongated at in-
ferior margin forming a posterior projection above which the an-
terior margin of fifth epimeron fits ; fifth epimeron with inferior
margin incised by deep split.

Postero-inferior margin of third abdominal segment rounded, entire.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami subequal, styliform and slender ;
first pair projecting beyond second ; second projecting beyond ter-
minal ; in first and second pairs rami and peduncle subequal ; ter-
minal uropods short, with rami shorter than peduncle.

Telson small, longer than broad, bearing apically a slight de-
pression medially and a short toothlike spine on each side.

There were only 2 females in the collection.

The species has been recorded previously only from Naples.

Amphilochus brunneus Delia Valle, 1893.

1893. Delia Valle, Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel,

vol. 20, p. 596; pi. 4, fig. 5 and pi. 29, fig. 1-15.

Eyes circular, compound, made up of many ocelli closely packed
together.

Fig'. 2. Amphilochus hriinnetis Delia Valle.

First antennae short, first and second joints of peduncle each
about as broad as long and about ^/s as long as third which is
about twice as long as wide; flagellum short and thick, composed
of 8 or 9 segments, each of which is provided with a long and a short
spine at distal margin. Second antennae slightly longer than first
with moderately slender gland cone ; fourth and fifth joints of equal
length, but fourth much thicker than fifth ; flagellum short and thick,
about ^/s as long as peduncle, composed of 6 segments.

The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 1 1

Mandibles with slender 3-jointed palp, the third joint of which is
longer than second, cutting edge expanded and divided into 7 teeth ;
molar tubercle small, with no true triturating surface. First maxillae
with inner plate small and Ijroad and bearing a single spine on apex ;
outer plate narrow, moderately long, sides parallel to near distal
end where plate tapers, inner margin of apex armed with about
12 broad, curved spines: palp 2-jointed, first joint as broad as long,
second joint twice as long as broad, rounded at apex which is
armed with a tooth and several spines. Second maxillae with inner
plate narrow at base and inner edge olDlique and slightly convex ;
outer plate narrow, somewhat longer than inner plate, bearing 3
or 4 spines on narrow apex and fine setules on inner margin.
Maxillipeds with inner plate long and narrow, having lateral mar-
gins parallel and with rounded apex provided with 2 toothlike spines,
extending as far as apex of first joint of palp ; outer plate rather
large, extending to middle of second joint of palp, oval in form,
twice as long as wide, outer margin strongly convex, the distal portion
of which bears many fine setae, inner margin distally serrate, proxi-
mally bearing several submarginal spines, apex bearing large tooth
and spine; palp 4-jointed, first joint longer than broad, with a few
spines on outer distal corner and outer margin ; second joint rather
narrower than first, slightly longer than broad, with a few spines
on distal margin ; third joint about twice as long as wide and not
more than half as wide as second joint, provided with spines on
apex ; fourth joint clawlike, about ^/s as long as third joint.

First gnathopods with oval epimeron, which is higher than long ;
second joint long, more than 3 times as long as broad with a few
setae on anterior margin and apex ; third joint not as long as broad
armed with a few spines apically ; fovirth joint more slender than
third, rounded apically, twice as long as broad, with fascicle of
spines at apex ; wrist triangular, broader than long, articulating with
anterior margin of fourth joint, posterior margin prolonged distall}'
to form a triangular process which extends to the middle of the
hand parallel to its posterior margin ; hand subtriangular, articulat-
ing with wrist by apex, anterior margin slightly convex, palm also
slightl}' convex and passing into posterior margin by obtuse angle,
marked by 2 prehensile spines, finely serrate and armed with sub-
marginal spines ; finger moderately strong, curved, slightly longer
than palm, inner margin with fine teeth.

Second gnathopods with epimeron 1^/2 times as high as long,
ventral margin strongly convex ; second joint very long and slender,
more than 4 times as long as broad ; third and fourth joints as in

12 B. IV. Kunkel,

first gnathopods; wrist with posterior margin greatly elongated to
form slender triangular process which extends as far as apex of
posterior margin of hand, which is much larger than that of first
gnathopods, more triangvilar in form with palm at right angles to
axis of joint and ^/s as long as anterior margin, and finely serrate,
and with prehensile angle provided with 2 stout spines ; finger long,
curved, with fine teeth on inner margin.

Uropods, 3, biramous ; terminal uropods extending beyond others,
with outer ramus shorter than inner and somewhat shorter than
peduncle which is slender.

Telson slender, triangular, entire.

The species was represented by several specimens about 3 mm.
long from Flalts Village in sand from low water to 2 fathoms, and
also from Castle Harbor in dead coral.

Delia Valle recorded the species from the Gulf of Naples at
5 fathoms.

Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard, J 789), Boeck, 1860.

1789. Gammarns spimcarpus. Abildgaard, in O. F. Miiller,
Zool. Danica, vol. 3, p. 66; pi. 119, fig. 1-4.

1860. Leucothoe spinicarpa. Boeck, Bemaerk. norske Amphip.
Forhandl. ved de Skand. Naturforsk., p. 654.

Eyes compound, reniform, of medium size.

First antennae scarcely ^/s as long as body, slightly longer than
second ; peduncle about 2^/2 times as long as flagellum ; first joint
moderately stout, cylindrical ; second of about same length but more
slender; third joint hardly more than ^/4 as long as second and
scarcely to be differentiated from first joint of flagellum which is
short and composed of 8 or 9 segments ; accessory flagellum 1-jointed,
rudimentary. Second antennae with short flagellum ; third joint of
peduncle short, twice as broad as long ; fourth joint long and slender ;
fifth joint about -/a as long as fourth ; flagellum about as long as
last joint of peduncle and composed of about 7 segments.

Mandibles without molar tubercle but with incisive plate well
dentated and with numerous spines on spine row ; palp well devel-
oped, first joint short, with small process on inner margin ; second
joint long with spines on inner margin ; third joint somewhat longer
than first and provided with a few spines on rounded apex. Lower lip
with plates broad and rounded. First maxillae with inner plates small,
triangular and with single spine on apex ; outer plates moderate with
usual spines on oblique distal margin ; palp 2-jointed, somewhat longer
than outer plate, armed apically with a few spines. Second maxillae

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

13

with outer plates curved, slender and longer than inner plates which
are more or less tapering and provided with rather long spines on
inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plate rudimentary^ provided
with 4 odontoid spines apically; outer plates likewise rudimentary,
represented by small process bearing sharp spine ; palp 4-jointed, all
of which are provided with slender spines on the inner and distal
margins, first and second joints much wider distally than proximally

Fig. 3. Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard).

and subequal ; third joint somewhat club-shaped, about as long as
preceding joint ; fourth joint in form of nail bearing single cilium
on inner concave margin.

First gnathopods with epimeron small, rhomboidal, having antero-
ventral angle prolonged slightly ; second joint rather long and stout,
and broadest at middle, with short spines on both anterior and
posterior margins; third joint moderately long, ^twice as long as
broad and broader distally than proximally ; fourth joint somewhat
shorter than third and more slender; wrist large, oval, not much
longer than broad but bearing by a prolongation of posterior margin
a long slender, slightly curved spur which extends as far as distal

U B. IV. Kunkel,

end of hand and which forms a true chela with hand, anterior
margin of spur provided with a few short ciha ; hand long and
slender of nearly uniform width throughout, palm not marked off
definitely from posterior margin ; finger slender and of usual form.

Second gnathopods with oval epimeron longer than high ; second
joint moderately long with anterior margin straight and provided
with a few slender spines ; third joint about as broad as long ; fourth
joint very short, somewhat cup-shaped with distal end broader than
proximal ; wrist weak, bearing a long shell-hke process distally and
posteriorly which is provided with many slender setae and into
which the proximal portion of the hand fits ; hand oval, with posterior
margin rather more convex than anterior, palm also convex, not
dilTerentiated from posterior margin, bearing distally 3 or 4 tooth-
like convexities, hand provided with fascicle of spines apically ; finger
long and slender, curved and pointed.

Epimera increasing in height to fourth ; third being shortest and
terminating rather acutely ventrally ; pereiopods without spinning
glands, ending in unguiform dactyls.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, first and third ]:)airs projecting be3'ond
middle pair; rami subequal except in second pair where outer ramus
is rather shorter than inner, more or less styliform ; peduncles of
first and second equal respectively to rami in length ; peduncle of
third pair rather longer than rami.

Telson long and slender, triangular, tapering uniformly to acute
apex, 3 times as long as broad, entire.

Length 8 mm.

Numerous specimens were present in the collection from Harring-
ton Sound, from Flatts Village from low water to 2 fathoms, and
from Castle Harbor W'here they were found in dead coral.

The species is very widely distributed over the North Atlantic,
being reported from the Arctic Ocean, Norway, the British Isles,
the Azores, France, the Mediterranean. Sometimes it occurs in the
l)ranchial sac of Ascidians.

Stenothoe marina (Bate, 1857), Boeck, 1870.

1857. Moiitagua marina. Bate, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 2,
vol. 19, p. 137.

1870. Stenothoe marina. Boeck, Forh. Videnskabs-Selsk. Chris-
tiania, 1870, p. 139.
Eyes large, compound, subtriangular.

First antennae -/3 as long as body, peduncle short with first joint
rather stout, tapering somewhat ; second joint slightly shorter than

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

15

first, cylindrical ; third joint short, hardl}' to be distinguished from
first segment of flagellum, which is made up of about 20 segments
which are longer than broad ; no accessory flagellum. Second an-
tennae slightly shorter than first ; peduncle nearly as long as flagellum ;
fourth joint somewhat longer than fifth.

Mandibles rather broad, without palp and molar tubercle ; prin-
cipal and secondary cutting edges denticulated ; numerous spines in
spine row. First maxillae with inner plate small, triangular, furnished
with single setule apically ; outer plate short, tapering slightly toward
apex, with very minute setules on inner margin and 4 or 5 stout

Fig. 4. Stenothoe marina (Bate).

spines on apical margin ; palp stout, 2-jointed, with second joint
rounded and provided with numerous teeth and spines apically,
proximal joint only slightly shorter than second. Second maxillae
with plates normally developed, but with inner plate having a single
setule. Maxillipeds with inner plate reduced to a slight eminence and
(Hiter plate entirely absent so that maxilliped appears to be made
up of very small inner plate and a 5-jointed palp, of which all the
joints are cylindrical except the terminal one which tapers to a
slender point and bears fine cilia on the inner margin.

In male, first gnathopods much smaller than second ; epimeron
moderate in size ; second joint long and slender of uniform width
throughout ; third joint cylindrical, slightly longer than broad ; fourth
joint large, more or less cup-shaped with distal margin long and
oblique and posterior margin, which bears a few spines, much longer

16 B. IV. Kunkel,

than anterior; wrist triangular, about as broad as long, provided
with spines on distal margin and posterior apex ; hand oval with
distal portion more slender than basal portion and with palm long
and oblique, very finely serrate and furnished with long slender
spines and 4 prehensile spines , finger moderate with concave margin
serrate.

Second gnathopods with moderate epimeron which is higher
than long with small tooth on postero-ventral angle ; second joint
long and slender ; third joint cup-shaped and wider distally than
proximally ; fourth joint much wider distally than proximall}' with
posterior distal angle acute, articulating with wrist b}' anterior margin ;
wrist triangular and broader than long, provided with a few spines
on posterior apex ; hand oval, about twice as long as broad with
palm long and oblique and bearing near middle a triangular process,
also provided with spines and setae and 2 prehensile spines ; finger
long and slender.

Pereiopods with epimera large, that of fourth being largest;
pereiopods slender, provided with unguiform dactyls and without
spinning glands.

Uropods, 3 pairs ; first extending beyond second which in turn
extends beyond the third pair ; first and second biraraous, third with
single ramus; rami styliform, subequal, and somewhat shorter than
peduncle ; rami of terminal uropods stouter than others.

Telson entire, triangular, longer than wide with lateral margins
slightly convex and provided with 4 stout spines on each side.

There was a single male specimen in the collection which measured
about 3 mm. in length.

The species has been recorded from the North Atlantic and North
Sea and from the Adriatic at a depth of from 19 to 47 fathoms.

Stenothoe valida Dana, 1853.

1853. Dana, U. S. Expl. Exped. vol. 13 II, p. 924, pi. 63, fig. 1.

Eyes small, compound, reniform, situated between first and second
antennae.

First antennae moderately long and slender with fiagellum about
twice as long as peduncle; first and second joints of peduncle
cylindrical and subequal in length and each about as long as head,
third joint less than ^j^ as long as second ; fiagellum made up of about
20 segments which are short proximally but become longer and more
slender distally. Second antennae shorter than first in female (fiagel-
lum broken off in single male specimen at hand) with gland cone
small and inconspicuous, third joint cylindrical and slightly longer

The Amphipoda of Bermnda.

17

than broad, fourth joint long and cyHndrical, fifth joint somewhat
shorter than fourth; flagellum made up of about 17 segments, less
than twice as long as peduncle.

Mandibles without pal]) or molar tubercle, but with incisive plate
moderate. First maxillae with ver}' small, triangular inner plate
bearing single spine apically; outer plate rather broad and short,
having 4 or 5 rather larger spine teeth on distal margin ; palp
2-jointed, first joint short, second joint rather large, about 3 times

Y'm. 5. Stenothoe valida Dana.

as long as first, rounded apically and provided with short setae
on apex and inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plates rudimentary
and outer plates wanting; palps 4-jointed, rather long and slender,
first joint rather short, slightly longer than broad, second joint longer
than first, cylindrical, third joint clawlike and slender, as long as
third.

In male, first gnathopods rather small, with very small epimeron
having a few setae on ventral margin, second joint long and slender ;
fourth joint oblong with free anterior margin ver}- short and posterior

Trans. Conn. Ac-id., Vol. XVI. 2 May, 1910.

18 B. fV. Kiinkel,

margin forming an oval lobe which is provided with cilia posteriorly
and spines distally, wrist triangular, shorter than fourth joint, with a
few long spines on distal apical angle ; hand subrectangular rather
narrow, with anterior and posterior margins parallel and with mo-
derate palm somewhat oblique, serrated and provided a with few
spines, prehensile angle bearing a few stout spines ; finger of usual
form and moderate size.

Second gnathopods with epimeron higher than long and with
ventral margin rounded ; second joint moderately long and slightly
curved ; third joint cylindrical, about twice as long as broad ; fourth
joint longer than broad, with posterior margin convex and provided
with about 6 rounded processes and a few short setae, wrist ex-
ceedingly small, triangular; hand large, suboval, anterior margin
convex, straight posterior margin, which serves as palm, provided
with 2 strong processes near articulation of finger, palm provided
with many slender setae ; finger long and very slender and rather
strongly curved, with 2 slight processes near proximal end of con-
cave margin.

First pereiopods with moderate epimeron which is subrectangular
and rather higher than long with ventral margin very finely serrate ;
fourth joint rather broad with posterior margin straight and anterior
margin convex and projecting distally to form rather strong triangular
process ; fifth joint about as long as fourth, and more slender ; sixth
joint rather longer than preceding with straight posterior margin
provided with rather stout spines ; finger clawlike. Second pereio-
pods with very large triangular epimeron, greatly expanded ventrally
and with ventral margin gently rounded. Third pereiopods with
second and fourth joints expanded ; third, fourth, and fifth pereiopods
with very small epimera; all pereiopods closely resembling each
other in distal segments.

Uropods, 3 pairs ; first and second pairs biramous with rami styli-
form ; third pair projecting slightly beyond the other two, with single
2-jointed ramus, not as long as peduncle, the distal one of which
bears a blunt projection apically and is longer than the proximal.

Telson triangular, rather prominent, entire, with 3 lateral spines
on each side.

Length 5 mm. The species was represented by a male and a
female specimen.

The female is much smaller than the male and differs from it
principally in that the hand of the second gnathopod is broader
and the palm is shorter and devoid of the 2 toothlike processes
near the finger.

The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 19

The species has also been reported from Rio Janeiro and pos-
sibly from the Mediterranean.

Pariphinotus gen. nov.

Body depressed and ridged dorsally.

First and second antennae short ; iirst without accessory flagellum ;
flagella of both short.

Mandibles without molar tubercle or palp, principal cutting edge
denticulated. Lower lip without inner plates. First maxillae with
obsolete palp and without inner plates. Second maxillae with inner
and outer plates coalesced except at apex. Maxillipeds with short,
truncated inner plates not reaching as far as second joint of palp,
apical margin with 3 sj^ine teeth ; outer plates broad and rounded,
unarmed, extending nearly to distal end of second joint of palp which
is moderate in size and made up of 4 joints, the terminal one of
which is unguiform.

Gnathopods simple ; epimera low.

Third pleopods with 2 rami and with peduncle expanded to form
arm-like process tipped with 3 coupling hooks.

Uropods, 2 pairs, biramous. Telson semicircular, entire, thick.

The genus is closely related to Iphinotus (Stebbing) but has only
2 pairs of uropods which are both moderately stout whereas in
Iphinotus the first is slender and the second stout.

Pariphinotus tuckeri sp. nov.

Head provided with broad, square rostrum with rounded corners
and with prominent lateral lobes which bear the large, prominent,
compound eyes.

Antennae short; first being slightly longer than second, with
flagellum very short ; first antennae with first joint of peduncle much
Ijroader distally than proximally and about as broad as long ; second
joint about '^\^ as long as first and about ^2 as wide, with outer
margin produced slightly distally ; third joint about ^/s as long as
second, cylindrical in form ; flagellum short, about as long as second
joint of peduncle, made up of 2 joints of which the terminal one
is very short and the proximal one longer than last joint of peduncle,
provided with setae distally. Second antennae with flagellum like
that of first ; third joint of peduncle cylindrical, about as broad as
long ; fourth joint twice as long as broad ; fifth about same length
as fourth but narrower.

Mandibles oblong with dentated cutting edges, 3 anterior teeth
large, posterior ones small ; molar tubercle and palp absent, spine

20

B. JV. KnuM,

row witli single spine. Lower lip without inner lobes but with
ver}' broad outer ones. First maxillae without palp or inner plate ;
outer plate armed on distal oblique margin with the usual forked,
toothlike spines. Second maxillae with outer and inner plates coa-
lesced except distall}' where a cleft separates the two ; apical margin
with a few short setae. Maxillipeds with plates well developed and
4-jointed palp ; inner ]:)lates narrow, subrectangular, reaching scarcel}'
as far as apex of first joint of palp, truncated, armed apically with
3 short spine teeth ; outer plates broad, reaching as far as middle
of second joint of palp, inner margin straight, outer margin strongly

Fig. 6. Fariphhiotxs ti'ckeri sp. nov.

convex, armed only with single seta on inner apex ; palps with first
joint twice as long as wide, second joint slightly longer than first
with setae on inner margin, third joint cylindrical, as long as second,
with a few setae on inner margin toward distal end, terminal joint
slender, unguiform.

In male, first gnathopods with large epimeron, produced slightly
anteriorly ; second joint moderatel}'^ stout ; third slightl}^ longer than
broad ; fourth slender, somewhat cup-shaped with posterior convex
margin provided with several setae ; wrist triangular, about as broad
as long with short posterior margin bearing a fascicle of setae ;
hand simple, as long as fourth and fifth joints together, tapering
slightly, distal posterior angle provided with stout spine and several
setae ; finger stout and curved.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 21

Second gnathopods with subrectangular epimeron higher than
long, having rounded angles ; second joint short and stout becoming
uniformly broader distally ; third joint slender, twice as long as broad ;
fourth joint narrower and shorter than third with posterior margin
convex and longer than anterior ; wrist, hand and finger as in first
gnathopod.

Epimera diminishing in height posteriorly, that of first pereiopod
being slighth' lower than that of second gnathopod ; fourth joints
rather broad, due to formation of lobe on anterior margin in an-
terior group of appendages and on posterior margin in posterior
group ; third, fourth, and fifth pereiopods with second and fourth
joints broad ; sixth joints of all pereiopods provided with stout spine
at apex.

Second and third pleopods with both rami well developed and
with peduncle bearing a stout prolongation medially which is pro-
vided with 3 coupling hooks at apex.

Uropods, 2 pairs, biramous; peduncle of both pairs cylindrical
and extending to same distance posteriorly ; rami styliform with
somewhat rounded apices, outer one much longer and broader than
inner one ; outer margin of outer ramus of first with sparse setae,
apex with single spine ; second uropods with rami slightly longer
than those of first, both rami with outer margin very finely serrated
and provided with apical spine.

Telson semicircular, not extending as far as peduncles of uropods ;
margin entire.

Back provided with a rather conspicuous ridge ; abdomen rather
small.

No sexual dimorphism.

Length 5 mm.

The species was represented by a male and a female collected
by Dr. W. G. VanName in 1901.

Colomastix pusilla Grube, 1861.

1861. Grube, Ein Ausflug nach Triest und dem Quarnero,
Berlin, 1861.

Eyes small, round.

First antennae short and stout, slightly longer than second ; ped-
uncle, stout and nearly twice as long as head ; flagellum rudi-
mentary, consisting of 3 ver\' short segments which are provided
with rather long setae; first joint of peduncle slightly longer than
either second or third, which are subequal in length, cylindrical

22

B. JV. Kiwkcl,

and diminishing in thickness from first to third. Second antennae
also with rudimentary flageUum ; third joint of peduncle rather stout
and tapering very slightly ; fourth joint longer than third and more
slender, slightly wider distally than proximally ; fifth joint C3lindrical
and longer than fourth, with row of setae on lower margin.

Epistome elongated in front, in form of slender cone. Upper lip
large and strong with distal margin bilobed. Mandibles with elon-
gated body, principal cutting edge divided into 5 long slender teeth
which are serrated distally ; molar tubercle large, cyhndrical ; palp
wanting. Lower lip apically broad, center prominent. First maxillae
strikingly broad, inner plate wanting ; outer plater short with distal

Fig. 7. Coloniastix pusilla Grube.

margin provided with 3 odontoid spines ; palp 1 -jointed, curved to
apex and terminating acutely so that inner margin of palp strikes
against distal margin of outer plate, thus forming a true chela.
Second maxillae formed of single plate, the distal margin of which
is divided into 2 lobes, a small rounded one externally and a broader
one medially, both of which are provided with setae. Maxillipeds
very strongly developed ; inner plates fused on middle line to form
slender triangular plate ; outer plates moderately broad but not very
long, extending just beyond distal end of first joint of palp, inner
margin smooth and unarmed ; palp 4-jointed, slender, with first two
joints cylindrical and second joint slightly longer than first, third
joint a little longer than preceding, rather fusiform with a few setae
on inner margin, fourth joint clawlike and about as long as second
joint.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 23

In male, first gnathopods strongly atrophied, rudimentary ; epimeron
triangular; second joint rather broader distally than proximally ;
third joint rather longer than usual ; fourth, fifth, and sixth joints
scarcely distinguishable, last joint forming very weak claw.

Second gnathopods with strongl}^ developed hand ; epimeron more
or less oval, not large ; second joint very slender at base but broaden-
ing regularl}- to distal end where anterior margin is produced to
form a rather large rounded lobe ; third joint small ; fourth much
narrower than third with a distal triangular process ; wrist triangular,
cuplike, not as long as broad, with short posterior margin provided
with a number of setae ; hand suboval, about twice as long as
broad, anterior margin convex, posterior margin about half as long
as anterior, palm oblique and very irregular, bearing 3 deep rounded
indentations and numerous setae of different lengths, anterior sub-
margin and apex with several fascicles of setae ; finger rather stout
and curved, of usual form.

Pereiopods rather long and slender and subequal with epimera
which are longer than high ; second joint long and slender ; third
joint small ; succeeding joints elongated and subequal ; claws small.
Pereiopods of posterior group with second joints slender in proximal
half, strongly dilated in distal half; succeeding joints very similar
to those of anterior pereiopods.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, all extending to about same distance
posteriorly ; rami broad, styliform, slightly serrated on margins ; rami
in all uropods subequal.

Telson entire, suboval, rather longer than broad with apical margin
very slightly indented.

The species was represented by a single male specimen 4 mm.
long. It has been reported from the Mediterranean and the British
and French coasts.

Panoploeopsis gen. nov.

Posterior margins of posterior thoracic and anterior abdominal
segments produced to form median dorsal teeth. Rostrum acute ;
epimera 1—3 more or less acutel}^ tapering, fourth with posterior
margin produced to form pointed process.

Mandibles narrowl}' tapering to cutting edge, accessory plate
narrow, no spine row, molar tubercle rudimentary, palp 3-jointed.
Lower lip rather elongate, without inner plate and with anterior
margins of outer plates entire. First maxillae with inner plate bearing
setae on inner margin and apex, outer plate rather long and nar-

24 B. IV. Kunke/,

row, palp 2-jointed, not reaching apex of outer plate. Maxillipeds
with inner and outer plates long and narrow, outer fringed on distal
part of outer margin, palp 3-jointed, first joint not as long as second
and third together.

First and second gnathopods very slender, hands simple. Pereio-
pods 3—5 with second joint well expanded.

Third uropods with narrowly lanceolate rami, not extending as
far as others. Telson broadly incised at apex.

The genus differs from Panoploea (G. M. Thomson) notably in
the fact that the outer plates of the lower lip are not incised, in
the shape of the second joint of the palp of the maxilliped and in
the simple gnathopods.

Panoploeopsis porta sp. nov.

Eyes circular, compound, rather small, ocelli closely crowded
together.

Rostrum well developed, extending beyond first joint of peduncle
of first antennae ; interantennal lobes prominent, triangular.

First antennae shorter than second, with peduncle rather more
than half as long as flagellum ; first joint cylindrical and longer than
second which in turn is longer than third joint; flagellum slender,
made up of about a dozen segments which are provided with nu-
merous threadlike setules. Second antennae much stouter than first,
second joint with long slender conical process on dorsal side extend-
ing nearly as far as distal end of third joint which is slightly longer
than broad ; fourth and fifth joints subequal, cylindrical ; flagellum
about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle together.

Upper lip very long and slender. Mandibles elongated and slender
toward apex, cutting edge very long, divided into 6 very short
teeth, the apical one being the longest ; secondary cutting plate
very slender ; molar tubercle rudimentary ; palp 3-jointed, first joint
slightly longer than broad and with rounded process apicalh', second
joint long and slender, of uniform breadth throughout, third joint
stouter and shorter than second, with a few short setae on inner
margin and with outer margin slightly convex. Lower lip ver}-
much elongated and very narrow, with no inner plates and with
mandibular processes rather short and with inner margin of outer
plate entire. First maxillae with very slender 2-jointed palp not
extending as far as apex of outer plate which is rather narrow and
triangular with distal margin very oblique, provided with the usual
toothed spines; inner plate small, triangular, with setae on inner
margin. Second maxillae very long and slender, outer plates longer

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

25

than inner and with outer and inner margins parallel; inner plate
triangular. Maxillipeds with 3-jointed palp of which the first is
slightly longer than the second and as long as the third which
terminates subacutely ; outer plates moderately long with inner margin
straight, outer margin convex and apex rather slender ; inner plates
moderate, terminal margin transverse and armed with plumose spines.

Fig. 8. Panoploeopsis pi>rta sp. nov. {Ep 4 is upmle down.)

In female, first gnathopods with rather high epimeron, twice as
high as long, triangular, with slight notch on anterior margin ; second
joint moderately stout with long setae on anterior and on distal
third of posterior margin; third joint slightly longer than broad;
fourth joint about as long as third and slightly stouter; wrist slender,
tapering toward distal end, about 3 times as long as broad ; hand
more slender than wrist and longer, anterior and posterior margins
nearly parallel, simple; finger short, curved, with concave margin
divided into about 6 hooked teeth and with numerous setae.

26 B. IV. Kimkel,

Second gnathopods with epimeron rather higher than that of first
and more than twice as high as long, terminating acutely ven-
trally : second joint moderately stout ; third joint about as broad as
long; fourth joint about twice as long as broad with apex acutely
pointed and with long slender setae on distal portion of posterior
margin; wrist longer than hand and triangular with distal margin
transverse and with anterior margin produced slightl}- distally ; hand
simple, about as long as fourth joint, tapering slightly to distal end,
provided with row of short setae on posterior margin ; finger short
and stout with serrations and setae on concave margin.

Epimeron of third pereiopod similar to that of second gnathopod ;
that of fourth much higher and longer, terminating ventrall}- in
acute angle and with posterior margin concave proximally to ac-
commodate succeeding epimeron, and with acute process ventral to
recess ; fifth epimeron longer than high with ventral margin bilobed ;
seventh epimeron smaller than sixth, both suboval in form.

Sixth and seventh thoracic segments and first 3 abdominal seg-
ments more or less keeled and with posterior margin produced to
a sharp process in mid-dorsal line. First and second abdominal seg-
ments with lateral margins produced to form triangular lobes ; third
abdominal segment with posterior margins of lateral portions pro-
duced to form 2 stout, rather blunt projections.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, with rami styliform ; first pair extend-
ing slightly be3^ond second and third pairs which extend to same
distance ; peduncle of first pair longer than that of second and
provided with row of sharp spines on dorsal margin, rami equal
and as long as peduncle, each with terminal spine ; second pair
similar to first but without spines on peduncle ; third pair with outer
ramus shorter than inner, peduncle somewhat more than half as
long as inner ramus.

Telson about twice as long as broad, with apex divided into 2
triangular lobes whose apices are rather widely separated from
each other.

Length 7 mm.

The species was represented by a single female collected b}-
J. M. Jones.

Eusiroides crassi Stebbing, 1888.

1888. Stebbing, Rep. Challenger, vol. 39, p. 977, pi. 90.

Eyes moderately large, compound, reniform, pigmented.

Antennae with calceoli on flagella ; first antennae moderatel}"
slender, peduncle very short with first joint slightly longer than broad

The Aniphipoda of Bermuda.

27

second joint slightly shorter and narrower, third joint shorter and
narrower than second ; flagellum made up of about 15 segments,
each of which is provided with setae on distal margin; accessory
flagellum made up of 1 joint which is not as long as first joint of
principal flagellum. Second antennae somewhat shorter than first;
peduncle short, last 2 joints longest and subequal, about twice as long
as wide ; flagellum scarcely as long as peduncle, composed of about
9 segments which are provided at distal ends with a few spines.
Mandibles with 3-jointed palp and with principal cutting edge
not denticulate ; secondary cutting edge divided into 4 slight, rounded
teeth ; 3 spine teeth on spine row ; molar tubercle well developed ;
third joint of palp longest, second joint rather broad. First maxillae
with 2-jointed palp. Maxillipeds with plates normally developed ;

Fig. 9, Eusiroides crassi Stebbiiig.

inner plate rectangular, not as long as first joint of palp, inner margin
with spine row with 4 or 5 spines ; molar tubercle prominent but
not very robust. Lower lip with lobes widel}- separated ; inner
plates very small ; mandibular processes short and rounded. First
maxillae with elongated palp 2-jointed, second joint nearly twice as
long as first with 4 or 5 spines on apex and 1 on outer margin at
middle ; outer plate broad with 10 branched teeth on oblique distal
end; inner plate small. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp of which
the first joint is triangular, second joint articulating b}' inner margin
and bearing 4 setae apically, second joint large, broader at distal
end and with row of setae about distal margin and with inner
margin denseh' covered with setae, third joint subrectangular, slightly

28 B. W. Kuukel,

longer than broad and bearing 2 diagonal rows of setae on surface
and with distal margin thickly set with long setae, not more than
half as long as second joint, fourth joint unguiform, bearing 2 short
setae on concave margin and nearly as long as third joint.

In male, first gnathopods with epimeron moderate, ventral margin
smooth, posterior margin provided with a spiniform tooth ventral
to which are 2 submarginal spines ; second joint rather long and
stout bearing a few long setae at distal end of anterior margin
which is slightly concave ; third joint about half as long as wide
with fascicle of setae on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint not as
wide as third, about twice as long as wide, more or less rectan-
gular with wrist articulating by anterior margin, the distal part of
which bears 4 large spines, and posterior margin elongated to form
a distal triangular lobe which bears 4 fascicles of setae ; wrist broader
than long, with posterior margin strongly convex so that segment
is broader than hand, posterior margin much shorter than anterior
and bearing several fascicles of setae ; hand oval, smaller than that
of second gnathopod, about twice as long as wide, with posterior
margin continuous with palm and bearing about 9 fascicles of long
flexible setae, palm oblique, and bearing 6 triangular processes which
are accompanied by submarginal teeth and fascicles of setae, pos-
terior margin very short ; finger long and stout, of usual form.

Second gnathopods with epimeron higher than long with anterior
and -posterior margins parallel and with ventral margin slightly
convex and bearing a few short setae ; second joint longer than
that of first gnathopod ; third, fourth, and fifth joints as in first
gnathopod ; hand and finger more slender, but otherwise similar to
first gnathopod.

Pereiopods slender, provided with dactyls; last pereiopods as
long as preceding ; epimera moderate, regularly convex ventrally.

Postero-lateral margins of third abdominal segment not serrated.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with long slender peduncle
provided with 5 or 6 spines on inner margin and one on apex, rami
also slender and styliform with inner one slightly longer than outer
one, extending as far as extremities of terminal uropods, rami
nearly as long as peduncle ; second uropods similar to first but with
peduncle much shorter and with rami more tapering than in first,
inner ramus rather stouter than outer and somewhat longer ; terminal
uropods extending well beyond telson, with rami subequal, laminar,
P/2 times as long as peduncle, both rami furnished with short setae
and plumose spines on inner margin and 1 or 2 on outer margin.

Telson laminar, triangular, slender, cleft -/a to base. In one of

Tlie Ampliipoda of Bermuda.

29

the specimens at hand the right lobe was shorter than left and
more rounded at apex. This may have been the result of injur}-.
Each lobe with single spine near apex on outer margin.

Length 8 mm.

The species has been reported from the South Atlantic at a depth
of about 500 fathoms.

Pontogeneia verrilli sp. nov.

Eyes compound, reniform, closely approximated dorsall}'.

Antennae very elongate ; first slightl}' longer than second ; and
about half as long as body, much more slender than second pair,

Fig. 10. Pontogeneia verrilli sp. nov.

peduncle rather short with joints increasing in length distally ; fla-
gellum made up of many joints which are very short toward the
base but become longer distally, provided with calceoli. Second
antennae with peduncle slightly shorter than flagellum and with
second and third joints very short, fourth and fifth joints subequal
in length, at least three times as long as second and third together ;
flagellum with joints very short.

30 B. W. KnnkeU

Mandibles with 3-jointed palji of which the first is very short and
broadens distally, second and third joints subequal but second much
stouter, third joint tapering sHghtly and terminated by several slender
spines ; cutting edges denticulated ; molar tubercle prominent ; several
spines on spine row. Lower lip with outer plates large and widely
separated, inner plates large and oval ; mandibular processes not
large. First maxillae with inner plate oval and large, provided with
single spine apically ; outer plate moderately slender with distal
margin very oblique and armed in usual fashion ; palp long, 2-jointed,
with second joint slender and tapering, with few spines on outer
and inner margins and apex. Second maxillae with outer plate
bearing single plumose spine apically and several simple ones on
inner margin, rather slender and shorter than inner plate which is
very broad and of oval form, with a few setae on inner margin.
Maxillipeds with inner plates small and bearing 3 odontoid spines
on transverse distal margin ; outer plates rather large with outer
and inner margins parallel and with apical margin rounded, bearing
long setae on inner margin; palp 4-jointed and provided with un-
guiform spine apically ; third joint with many setae apically where
it is broader than at base ; fourth joint with short setae on inner
margin ; second joint provided with flat laminar process along entire
inner margin which bears long slender setae.

First gnathopods with subtriangular epimeron considerably higher
than long; second joint moderately long and of uniform thickness,
provided with group of spines at antero-distal angle : third joint short ;
fourth joint subtriangular with setae along posterior margin ; wrist
triangular, broader than long with setae on posterior margin ; hand
moderate in size, longer than wrist, oval, palm long and slightly
convex, passing into short posterior margin by even curve, provided
with about 6 large conical teeth and long setae alternating with
them, apex of hand with fascicle of setae ; finger long and slender.

Second gnathopods very similar in shape and size to first; hand
slightly more slender and palm provided with greater number of
teeth.

Epimera moderate ; pereiopods without spinning glands, with
dactyls.

Three anterior abdominal segments with postero-lateral margins
serrate.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first and second with rami styliform
and inner longer than outer and with both rami provided with
spines, first extending slightl}' beyond second and third, peduncle
of first rather longer than rami, that of second considerably shorter ;

The Amphipoda of Bcmmda. 31

third pair with rami rather broader and lamellar, tapering to acute
point, inner ramus larger than outer, provided with slender setae.

Telson long and slender, twice as long as broad, cleft for ^/g of
its length, each lobe provided apically with single spine, extending
beyond peduncle of terminal uropod.

Length 7 mm. This species was represented in the collection at
hand by several specimens some of which were found in dead coral
from Castle Harbor.

Melita fresnelii (Audouin, 1876).

1876. Gaimnants fresnelii. Audouin, Descr. Egypte, vol. I, iv,

p. 93, Crust, pi. 11, fig. 3.

1875. Melita fresnelii, Miers, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 16,

p. 75.

Eyes compound, circular, deeply pigmented in alcoholic specimens.

First antennae almost as long as body, longer than second an-
tennae ; peduncle more than half as long as flagellum, with first
joint cylindrical, second joint longer and more slender than first ;
third joint very short; flagellum slender and made up of about 40
elongated segments ; accessory flagellum made up of 5 segments.
Second antennae extending to about middle of first antennae with
peduncle somewhat longer than that of first; gland cone long and
slender, reaching nearly as far as end of third joint which is longer
than broad ; fourth joint very long and slender ; fifth subequal to
fourth in length ; flagellum rather long, made up of more than 14
segments.

Mandibles strong with all parts well developed ; principal cutting
edge denticulated ; numerous spines on spine row ; molar tubercle
large and prominent; palp made up of 3 joints of which the first
joint is short, second one moderately long, but shorter than the
third and with setae along outer margin, third joint very slender,
provided with many long setae on inner margin and apex. Lower
lip with outer plates broad, rounded, and with anterior margin
entire, inner plates moderate, mandibular processes short. First
maxillae with inner plates slender and tapering, moderate, with 2
plumose spines on apex ; outer plates large and curved with usual
branched spines on oblique distal margin ; palp 2-jointed with second
joint broader apicall}^ and armed with spinelike teeth, apex of first
joint provided with fascicle of setae. Second maxillae with oval
plates, moderately broad ; outer plates with slender setae on rounded
apex ; inner plates with slender setae on apex and inner margin
and with an oblique row on outer surface. Maxillipeds with inner

32

B. W. KmikeL

plates rectangular, extending beyond first joint of palp and provided
with plumose spines on inner and distal margins and also on distal
margin with 3 odontoid spines, and submarginally at inner distal
angle with 2 conical toothlike spines; outer plates moderate in size,
not extending as far as second joint of palp, inner margin straight,
outer margin convex, passing over to distal margin by even curve,
inner margin provided with toothlike spines which increase in length
toward the apex and gradually become long and slender spines on

Fig. 11. Melita fresnelii Audouin.

distal margin ; palp 4-jointed, first joint sHghtly longer than broad,
second joint slender, broadest proximal to middle, 3 times as long
as broad, provided with numerous fascicles of slender setae, third
joint short and curved, larger at distal end than at proximal, fourth
joint curved and tapering, with apical spine and a few large setae
on inner margin.

In male, first gnathopods with small, rhomboidal epimeron ; second
joint long and slender, provided with long setae on anterior and
posterior margins ; third joint slender, slightl}^ longer than broad ;
fourth joint small, broader distally and rounded, with fine cilia
on posterior margin and with setae apically ; wrist long, triangular,
2^ 1 2 times as long as broad with 5 or 6 fascicles of setae on pos-
terior and distal margins ; hand subtriangular, somewhat longer than

The Aniphipoda of Bermuda. 33

broad and broader distally than wrist, palm nearly transverse, provided
with setae on posterior and distal portion of anterior margins and
palm ; finger stout and curved.

Second gnathopods with small rhomboidal epimeron which is
higher than long ; second joint rather long, extending well beyond
epimeron ; third joint short ; fourth joint rather long with posterior
margin convex and distal margin much longer than proximal ; wrist
rather short with posterior margin prolonged to form cuplike pro-
cess in which the posterior margin of the hand fits proximally ;
hand very large and strong, broader distally, posterior margin pro-
longed apically to form strong fingerlike process which tends to
make the hand chelate, palm transverse and bearing 3 strong rounded
processes near articulation with finger which is strong and not
greatl}' ciu^ved, except at apex where it closes past the fingerlike
process of the hand, and which is broadest at middle.

In female, first gnathopods with quadrilateral epimeron having
posterior margin forming a small triangular process and with ventral
margin provided with setae and cilia ; second joint long and slender
with 5 fascicles of setae on posterior margin and numerous longer
setae on distal ^/s of anterior margin ; third joint slightly longer
than broad ; fourth somewhat longer than third with anterior margin
\:ery short and posterior margin long and provided near distal end
w-ith many very fine cilia and several stoiit setae ; wrist longer
than hand and as broad as hand, provided on posterior margin
with numerous short setae which form a close set mass, and also
with a few longer pectinate spines on posterior margin and nu-
merous fascicles of setae near margin ; hand subrectangular, less
than twice as long as broad with posterior margin provided with
many setae of different lengths, some of which are finely pectinate,
palm finely serrate and armed with short submarginal spines, an-
terior margin with 4 fascicles of setae ; finger of usual form having
2 curved spines on outer convex margin and with several short
slender ones on concave margin.

Second gnathopods slightly stouter than first, with epimeron very
similar to that of first but slightly higher; fourth segment with
posterior margin prolonged to form a triangular process and provided
with a few long setae ; wrist quite similar to that of first gnatho-
pod but larger, posterior margin furnished with fascicles of slender
setae among which are a few finely pectinate ones ; wrist as long-
as hand which is subrectangular, palm oblique with rounded prom-
inence near articulation with finger, finely serrate, furnished also
with numerous submarginal setae and with 3 prehensile spines,
Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 3 May, 1910.

34 B. IV. Kimkel,

anterior and posterior margins each with 6 fascicles of setae ; finger
strongly serrate and provided with 2 fascicles of setae near middle
of outer convex margin.

Pereiopods with moderate epimera and with normal dactyls and
no spinning glands.

Abdominal segments with ventral margins of anterior 3 prolonged
posteriorly, first 2 to form simple triangular processes, third with ventral
margin very much longer to form a slender process posteriorly;
dorsal portion of posterior margins of abdominal segments deeply
serrated to form 5 to 7 acutely pointed teeth.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair extending slightly beyond
second, rami styliform, inner one longer than outer, peduncle slender,
cylindrical, about as long as inner ramus, rami provided with spines
on inner margin and apex ; second pair similar in form to first but
shorter ; terminal uropods extending considerably beyond others,
inner ramus rudimentary, outer ramus long and slender, more or
less flat, about twice as long as peduncle, provided with fascicles
of setae on outer and inner margins and apically.

Telson triangular, slender, lamellar, cleft -'/i to base with lobes
rather dehiscent, provided with several sharp spines on outer margin
and at apex, somewhat longer than broad.

Length 6 mm. Numerous specimens were at hand which were
found at Flatts Village, in sand from low water to 12 feet; in
Castle Harbor, among dead corals ; and in Harrington Sound.

The species has been found on the coast of Brazil, Rio Janeiro,
at Singapore at a depth of 9 feet, and according to Haswell it is
very common at Port Jackson, New South Wales.

Melita planaterga sp. nov.

Eyes round, small, compound, deeply pigmented, situated well
ventrally between first and second antennae.

First antennae long and slender, about -^/j as long as body ; ped-
uncle as long as flagellum ; first joint of peduncle stout, more or
less fusiform, second joint cylindrical and somewhat longer and more
slender than first; third joint short, not more than ^3 as long as
second; principal flagellum made up of about 18 slender segments;
accessory flagellum short, 2-jointed. Second antennae somewhat
shorter than first, but peduncle longer than that of first, wich fla-
gellum made up of al^out 7 segments and about as long as last
2 joints of peduncle, third joint of peduncle about as long as broad,
fourth and fifth .sub-(|u:il in length, gland cone rather long and
slender.

The Auiphipoda of Bermuda.

35

Upper lip with small median emargination. Mandibles with dentate
cutting edges, prominent molar tubercle and slender 3-jointed palp,
the second joint of which is the longest and the terminal joint of
which tapers slightly and is a little shorter than second. Lower
lip with inner plates distinct. First maxillae with numerous setae
on inner plate and with outer plate armed in the usual way ; palp
2-iointed with terminal joint broadened and rounded distally and
armed with toothlike projections and setae. Maxillipeds with plates
well developed and with 4-jointed palp ; inner plates subrectangular,

Fig. 12. Melita pla?iaterga sp. nov.

long, extending nearly to middle of second joint of palp, distal margin
transverse and provided with numerous setae ; outer plates large,
with outer and distal margins convex, inner margin straight and
provided with spine teeth which become long and slender apically ;
second joint of palp 3 times as long as wide, cylindrical, third joint
about ■% as long as second, broader distally than proximally and
bearing a rounded triangular process at middle of inner margin,
rounded apex ciliated, fourth joint long and slender, unguiform.

In female, first gnathopods with oval epimeron, higher than long
with ventral margin somewhat convex and provided with fine setae ;
second joint very long and slender with setae on both anterior and
posterior margins; fourth joint short, posterior margin strongly convex

3(5 B. ir. KnukcL

and provided with tine cilia and a few long setae ; wrist triangular,
twice as long as wide and longer than hand, anterior margin and
distal portion of posterior margin parallel and with a few setae ;
hand subchelate, subrectangular, with palm transverse, about twice
as long as broad ; finger short and strongly curved. Second gnatho-
pods with epimeron rather higher than first ; second joint long and
slender with numerous long setae on posterior margin and smaller
number on anterior ; fourth joint longer than third with postero-
distal angle slightly produced ; wrist triangular, nearly as broad as
long, with dense setae on posterior margin and very long ones on
anterior; hand oval.

In male, first gnathopods like female exce])t that the wrist is much
longer and the hand is broader at distal than at proximal end because
of rounded lobelike process on posterior margin ; palm very con-
vex, bearing a rather marked rounded incision near hinge ; finger
short, thick, and somewhat curved. Second gnathopods with
rounded epimeron which is higher than long ; second joint moder-
atel}^ stout and with a few long setae on posterior margin ; fourth
joint about twice as long as bi'oad with posterior margin somewhat
produced to acute point ; wrist triangular with posterior margin
somewhat rounded and produced distally and provided with a series
of transverse rows of setae ; anterior submargin also with rows of
setae ; hand oval, nearly twice as long as broad with anterior and
jDOsterior margins of nearly equal con vexity and provided with
numerous fascicles of setae, palm provided with many long slender
setae, rather convex and passing into posterior margin by even
curve ; finger rather long and stout and not greatly curved, capable
of closing past palm.

Epimera of moderate size, fourth one largest, emarginate pos-
teriorly ; pereiopods slender and increasing in length posteriori}',
the last 2 being subequal ; second joints of third to fifth pereio]->ods
well expanded with posterior margins finely serrate. Abdominal
segments with posterior margin smooth, third segment with postero-
lat3ral margins entire.

Uropods 3 pairs, biramous ; hrst and second pairs with lanceolate
rami provided with a few stout setae on outer margin and fascicle
of setae at apex ; third uropods with inner ramus small, outer ramus
greatly elongated and rather foliaceous, with margins slightly convex
and apex blunt, provided with stout setae on both margins and apex.

Telson as broad as long, cleft to Ijase, each lobe l^earing triangu-
lar process distally and several setae,

Leniith 9 mm.

The Auiphipoda of Bermuda. 37

The preserved specimens were marked with irregular chocolate
brown bands on posterior margin of body segments, the bands on
the tirst 3 abdominal segments being especially 1)road ; the telson,
]:)eduncles of uropods, and of antennae were marked with very
minute brown spots and the proximal joints of pereiopods bore
irregular longitudinal brownish lines.

The specimens were collectf^d in a brackish pond near Flatts
\'illage.

Ceradocus orchestiipes A. Costa, 1853.

1853. A. Costa, Rendic. della Soc. Reale Borbon., Ace. delle

Sci., NapoH, n. sen, vol. 2, p. 177.

Eyes compound, large, round.

First antennae about •''/4 as long as body ; peduncle rather long
but shorter than flagellum, tirst joint moderately stout, cylindrical,
second joint slightly longer than hrst, third joint rather short and
slender; flagellum made up of 22 or more segments, the first of
which is scarcely to be distinguished from terminal joint of ])ed-
uncle ; secondary flagellum made up of 5 segments. Second an-
tennae shorter than first, flagellum rather short ; gland cone
rather long and slender, extending beyond distal end of third
segment which is about twice as long as broad, fourth segment
slightly longer than fifth, rather long and slender ; flagellum made
up of about 9 joints, al^out equal in length to last joint of peduncle.

Mandibles with all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed, first joint
moderately long, broader 'at apex and bearing sharp spinelike pro-
cess at inner distal corner, second joint longest, tapering slightly
toward distal end and bearing 4 long setae on inner margin ; third
joint about ^/2 as long as second with slender rounded apex which
bears several long setae and is also provided with 2 setae on inner
margin and 1 on outer ; principal cutting edge divided into 2 rounded
teeth ; secondary cutting edge broad, made up of 4 equal teeth ;
7 plumose spines on spine row ; molar tubercle moderate. First
maxillae with 2-jointed palp, second joint longer than proximal joint
and broader at apex which is provided with numerous spines ; outer
plate large, with 6 or 7 branched and pectinate spines on oblique
distal margin ; inner plate broad, triangular, with inner margin provid-
ed with row of long plumose spines. Second maxillae of usual form,
plates oval, subequal ; outer plate with apex provided with setae ; inner
plate with setae on inner margin as well as apex. Maxillipeds
with plates well developed ; inner plate with apex truncate and
outer and inner angles prolonged to form toothlike processes, apical

38

B. IV. KunkcL

margin with man\' plumose spines; outer plate extending almost
as far as second joint of palp with inner margin provided with
toothlike spines which become longer toward rounded apex; palp
with first joint slightly longer than broad, second joint very long
and moderately slender having slender setae on inner margin, third
joint short, with distal end larger than proximal ; fourth joint with
slender terminal spine as long as joint itself.

\\\ male, first gnathopods with epimeron triangular, small : second
joint moderately stout with short setae on anterior margin and sev-
eral very long ones on posterior margin; third joint short with
group of moderately long setae near distal end of posterior margin ;

Fig. 13. Ceradocus orchestiipes A. Costa,

fourth joint more or less rectangular with 4 fascicles of setae on
posterior margin and group of setae on distal margin, both anterior
and posterior margins produced distally to form small triangular
processes ; wrist very large, triangular, longer and broader than hand,
posterior margin very convex and provided with many long setae
which also are present on distal margin, anterior margin with 4 quite
long setae; hand more or less oval with palm oblique and about
as long as posterior margin which bears many setae, palm provided
with numerous setae ; finger of usual form moderately stout.

Second gnathopods with rectangular epimeron slightly higher than
long; second joint short and stout with 2 long setae near proximal
end of posterior margin and 1 at distal end and 1 near distal end

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 39

of anterior margin ; third joint short ; fourth about twice as long as
broad, subrectangular ; wrist small, triangular, broader than long
with many long setae on convex posterior margin ; hand very large,
subrectangular, twice as long as broad, with palm oblique and hav-
ing moderately deep notch near middle, prehensile angle with stout
spine, palm provided with numerous submarginal setae, posterior
margin with 6 fascicles of setae and apex with 5 or G long setae ;
finger curved, stout and of usual form.

Pereiopods with epimera of moderate size, of usual form and
provided with dactyls but no spinning glands.

Uropods .3 pairs, biramous ; first extending slightly be3'ond second,
rami cylindrical, inner one slightly longer than outer, peduncle ^/s
longer than rami, provided with sharp spines on inner margin ;
second uropods of essentially same form as first but with peduncle
much shorter so that rami are slightly longer than peduncle ; terminal
uropods reaching much beyond the others, rami very long, equal,
laminar, finger with spinules, apices narrowly truncate.

Telson flat, slightly longer than broad, with lobes widely separated,
cleft ^/a to base ; each lobe terminating in long acute process and
bearing 2 long stout spines side by side on inner margin near apex.

Length 6 mm.

The species was represented by a number of specimens some of
which were found in sand at Flatts Village from low water to
2 fathoms.

The species has been reported previously only from the Medi-
terranean.

Ceradocus parkeri sp. nov.

Eyes, small round, compound.

First antennae long and slender, about 1/3 as long as bodj-, with
rather long ]ieduncle, about 1^2 times as long as flagellum which
is made up of about 20 segments which are provided with long
setae; accessory flagellum half as long as principal flagellum, made
up of 6 or 7 segments ; peduncle with first 2 segments cylindrical
and equal in length, third joint less than 1/5 as long as second and
narrower. Second antennae about ■'/s as long as first, with short
flagellum made up of about 8 short segments, slightly shorter than
last joint of peduncle, which in turn is about '^/a shorter than the
fourth and is provided with setae on the lower margin, fourth joint
cylindrical, with setae on lower margin, third joint about 3 times
as long as broad, gland cone small and applied closely along lower
margin of third joint.

40

B. W. KunkeL

Mandibles with principal and secondary cutting edges dentated
and with numerous spines on spine row, molar tubercle robust ; palp
3-jointed, with first joint rather short, second joint long and slender
with row of long stiff setae on inner margin, third joint shorter
and more slender than second with several very long setae on inner
margin toward apex which is rather acute. Lower lip with inner
plates broad and rounded, outer plates broad with entire margins,
mandibular processes short and stout. First maxillae with 2-jointed
palp, inner plate triangular with many setae on iimer margin. Second
maxillae with plates having apices rounded, outer plate larger than
inner, both provided with setae on distal end. Maxillipeds with 4-
jointed palp, the first joint of which is about as long as broad, the
second is long and slender, cylindrical with setae on inner margin,

Fig. 14. Ceradocus fcirkeri sp. nov.

the third is less than 1/2 as long as the second with the distal end
rather broader than proximal and provided with setae on rounded
apex, and the fourth joint is conical with a stovit spine apicall}' ;
outer plate rather well developed, extending nearly as far as apex
of second joint of palp with outer margin rounded and inner margin
provided with broad toothlike spines which become longer toward
apex ; inner plate moderate, rectangular, with distal margin trans-
verse and provided with a few plumose spines and bearing trian-
gular process on outer distal angle.

In male, first gnathopods with moderate epimeron, having antero-
ventral angle prolonged slightly and provided with several spinules ;
second joint rather long, slightly broader distally than proximally
and with a few setae on posterior margin ; third joint short ; fourth
joint rather longer than broad, subrectangular, with rounded apex

The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 41

bearing- fascicle of setae ; wrist rather large and subtriangular, twice
as long as wide, with many fascicles of setae on posterior margin and
on lateral surface, and stout spines on apex ; hand shorter than wrist
but about as wide, subrectangular with distal end wider than proxi-
mal and with palm slightly oblique, finely serrate and provided with
short setae, posterior margin provided with 4 or 5 fascicles of long
stout setae, prehensile spine present, anterior margin slightly convex
and provided with 4 or 5 fascicles of setae ; finger moderately stout
and curved with few fine setules on concave margin.

Second gnathopods wdth subrectangular epimeron about as broad
as long, with ventral margin provided with a few setae ; second joint
very stout with 2 long spines on j^roximal third of posterior margin
and numerous fine setae on anterior margin and 2 short stout setae
on anterior distal apex ; third joint broader than long ; fourth, sub-
rectangular, twice as long as broad with single seta on postero-distal
apex ; wrist triangular, about as broad as long ; hand stout, subrect-
angular, slightly broader distally than proximally, palm slightly
oblique, provided with setae, prehensile angle produced to form
curved toothlike process and provided with prehensile spine, posterior
margin with about 8 fascicles of setae, anterior submargin with about
4 fascicles ; finger of usual form, stout.

Epimera of moderate size ; pereiopods of moderate size and pro-
vided with clawlike fingers.

First 3 abdominal segments with posterior and lateral margins
entire and rounded.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami of first 2 pairs styliform and
subequal, with large .spines apically ; third uropods with rami much
longer than peduncle and somewhat flattened, outer ramus longer
than inner, with rather long spines on outer margin and apex, inner
ramus with long spines apicall}'. Telson subrectangular, about as
broad as long, divided to base, each lobe with several long stout
spines on inner apex.

Length, 6 mm.

The species is represented by a single male specimen.

Ceradocus colei sp. nov.

First antennae slender, longer than second, about half as long as
body ; peduncle about -/s as long as flagellum which is made up
of nearly 20 segments ; first joint of peduncle swelling somewhat
in thickness at middle, about 3 times as long as broad, provided
with a few setae, second joint longer and more slender than first
and provided with setae, third joint small, scarcely to be distinguished

42

B. W. Kunkel,

from proximal joints of principal flagellum ; accessory flagellum short,
2-jointed. Second antennae with flagellum about as long as last
2 joints of peduncle, made up of 8 or 9 elongated segments ; gland
cone rather stout and prominent, third joint slightly longer than
broad, fourth joint cylindrical and about as long as first joint of
peduncle of first antennae, fifth joint longer and more slender than
fourth, both fourth and fifth joints with slender setae.

Mandibles as in C. parkeri. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, of
which the first is short and the second more or less clubshaped
with short spines on rounded apex ; outer plate slightly tapering
in form, with usual spine teeth on distal margin ; inner plate some-
what rounded with numerous setae on inner margin. Maxillipeds

Fig. 15. Ceradocus colei sp. nov.

with 4-jointed palp and outer and inner plates well developed ; first
joint of palp short, cylindrical, second joint cyhndrical and about
2^2 times as long as broad, third joint slightly thicker distally than
proximalty, about twice as long as wide and of about the same
thickness at widest part as second, provided with spines and cilia
at apex, fourth joint clawlike, curved, with short setae on inner
margin ; outer plate extending as far as apex of second joint of palp
with inner margin straight and provided with abundant setae, outer
margin and apex convex ; inner plates extending scarcely to middle
of second joint of palp, apex truncated and provided with short
setae which become more slender and extend along distal half of
inner margin.

In female, first gnathopods with moderate rhomboidal epimeron

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 43

having anterior ventral angle somewhat produced anteriorly ; second
joint rather long and slender with margins parallel and with anterior
margin having several long setae near proximal end and group of
shorter ones at distal end, posterior margin with group of setae at
distal end ; third joint small, with few setae on posterior margin
near distal end ; fourth joint broader distally than proximally, with
posterior margin especially strongly convex toward distal end and
provided with a fascicle of rather long setae apically and ciliated for
'^\x of its length ; wrist Vs longer than hand, somewhat over Vs as
broad as long, of uniform wadth throughout except at proximal end
where articulation with fourth joint is oblique, anterior margin with
fascicle of pectinate spines at anterior apex, posterior margin with
6 or 7 fascicles of setae, some of which are pectinate, surface of
wrist with several groups of setae ; hand subrectangular, slightl}^
narrower at proximal end than at distal end and narrower than
wrist, anterior margin slightly convex and provided with several
fascicles of setae, posterior margin with several groups of setae,
palm transverse, slightly convex with submarginal setae toward
posterior margin ; finger of usual form, extending as far as prehensile
angle of hand.

Second gnathopods with epimeron twice as high as long with
ventral margin evenly rounded ; second joint moderate with long
setae on posterior margin and a few near distal end of anterior ;
fourth joint with posterior margin elongated to form triangular pro-
jection ; wrist triangular, about 1^3 times as long as broad, with an-
terior and posterior margins provided with numerous fascicles of
setae ; hand suboval, somewhat longer than wrist and of same width,
anterior margin twice as long as posterior, with numerous fascicles
of setae, posterior margin with long setae, passing into oblique
convex palm liy even curve, prehensile angle with several stout
setae, palm provided with setae of various lengths ; finger moderatel}'
long and curved with setae on middle of convex margin.

Pereiopods and epimera as in C. parkeri. Third abdominal seg-
ment with postero-lateral angle prolonged somewhat posteriorly,
posterior margin entire.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami of first and second styliform,
those of first pair extending beyond second ; third pair long and
rather flattened.

Telson subrectangular, about as long as broad, divided to base,
each lobe somewhat acutely pointed and provided with group of
several setae of different lengths.

Length 5 mm. There was a single female specimen in the collection.

44

B. IV. Knukcl,

Maera inaequipes (A. Costa, 185 Ij, Stebbing, 1906.

1851. Amphithoe inaeguipes, A. Costa, Cat. Crost. Ital., p. 45.
1906. Maera inaequipes, Stebbing, Das Tierreich, Lief. 21, p. 435.

Eyes small, rounded, compound, deeply pigmented in alcoholic
specimens. Interantennal lobes rather prominent and rounded.

First antennae about ^,'2 as long as body, slender, peduncle longer
than flagellum, second joint rather longer than first which tapers
slightly; third joint very short; flagellum made up of about 18 seg-
ments gradually increasing in length distally; accessory flagellum
long, made up of 7 segments, more than half as long as principal
flagellum. Second antennae extending to about middle of flagellum

Fig. 16. Maera inaequipes (A. Costa).

of first ; peduncle about as long as that of first antennae ; gland
cone rather long and acutely pointed, extending to middle of next
segment; third joint more than ^2 as long as fourth which is the
longest and is very slender ; fifth joint about •^/4 as long as fourth ;
flagellum about as long as fourth joint of peduncle, consisting of
about 10 segments.

Mandibles triangular, with all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed,
third joint longest, tapering somewhat in form ; second joint slightly
shorter than third, about 3 times as long as broad, cylindrical ;
first joint longer than broad ; principal and secondary cutting edges
both denticulated, secondary plate rather broad ; molar tubercle very
large, 5 or 6 spines in spine row. Lower lip broad, having anterior
margin of outer ])lates incised ; inner plates large ; mandibular

The Auipliipoda of Bermuda. 45

processes elongate. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp having proximal
joint broader apically, distal joint about 3 times as long as broad,
rounded apically and bearing a number of setae at apex ; outer
plate not reaching to middle of second joint of palp, with truncated
apical margin which bears about 8 branched and furcate spines ;
inner plate small, triangular, bearing about 4 plumose spines apically.
Second maxillae with oval plates having apices rounded ; outer plate
slightly longer and broader than inner one. Maxilli])eds with 4-jointed
palp and well developed plates ; second joint of palp rather, long
about 3 times as long as broad, third joint about twice as broad
as long with rounded apex, fourth joint conical, armed with terminal
claw nearly as long as segment itself; outer plate oval, extendmg
about -/a to distal end of second joint, provided with odontoid spines
along inner margin which become longer toward apex and on the
broad distal margin ; inner plate rectangular having plumose spines
on distal margin which bears a small triangular process at outer
corner and a single toothlike spine apically and externally.

In female, first gnathopods with small epimeron produced to form
acute angle anteriorly, ventral margin slightly notched and provided
with fine setae ; second joint of moderate proportions with long
setae on posterior margin ; third joint longer than broad, bearing
group of setae on posterior margin ; fourth joint rectangular, bear-
ing rounded process on postero-distal angle, distal end provided
with row of short setae and a number of longer ones ; wrist very
long, as long as hand, triangular, articulating with anterior margin
of fourth joint, anterior margin indented slightly near distal end,
posterior margin provided with 8 or 9 fascicles of setae and bear-
ing, proximal to articulation of hand, a row of pinnate spines ; hand
rather small, regularly oval, posterior margin more convex than
anterior, palm oblique passing by even curve into posterior margin,
with short submarginal setae and several fascicles of longer setae
and 3 prehensile spines ; finger rather long and curved.

Second gnathopods with small rhomboidal epimeron having setae
on antero-ventral margin ; second joint of same form as that of first
with long slender setae on anterior margin at proximal and distal
ends; third joint short; fourth rectangular, as in first; wrist very
small, triangular, with lobe on free posterior margin which is rounded
and provided with numerous fine setae ; hand very large and oval,
twice as long as broad and broader than wrist, palm variable in
character but moderately long, often with 3 rounded processes near
articulation with finger and provided with numerous submarginal
setae of various lengths, and with posterior margin produced to

46 B. IV. Kiuikel,

form triangular process behind \\hich the extremit}' of finger fits ;
finger very long and strong. (Palm usually transverse and with
rounded notch in the middle; in one specimen the hands on the
2 sides were quite different.)

Gnathopods of male quite similar to those of female.

Pereiopods of moderate length, those of posterior group being
rather stout and fourth and fifth being subequal, all furnished with
tricuspidate dactyls ; epimera of moderate size, subrectangular ; third
to fifth pereiopods with second joints moderately expanded, posterior
margin produced slightly distally.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with moderately long ped-
uncle, bearing stout spines on outer margin, inner ramus slightly
longer than outer; second uropods shorter than first, extending
posteriorly about as far as first pair ; third pair of flattened form,
extending scarcely beyond others, peduncle short, rami with truncated
apices, provided with fascicles of setae on outer margin and apex
of outer ramus which is rather broader and longer than inner.

Telson longer than broad divided nearly to base, lobes widely
dehiscent ; each lobe terminating in triangular point bearing small
toothlike process at base of outer margin, and accompanied by
toothlike spine.

Third abdominal segment with postero-lateral corners not serrate.

Length 7 to 8 mm.

The species was represented by numerous specimens which were
rather variable. Specimens were collected at Flatts Village in sand
from low water to 2 fathoms, in dead coral in Castle Harbor, in
corallines from Bailey Bay, and in Harrington Sound. It has been
previously recorded from the Mediterranean and the Azores.

Maera rathbunae Pearse, 1908.

1908. A. S. Pearse, Proc. U. S. National Mus., vol. 34, p. 29.

Eyes round, small, compound, deeply pigmented.

First antennae longer than second, with peduncle longer than
flagellum, first joint rather stout, slightly tapering in form, second
joint very slender, longer than first; third joint short, hardly to be
tlistinguished from first joint of principal flagellum, which is made
up of about a dozen segments ; accessory flagellum as long as first
7 segments of principal flagellum, composed of many joints. Second
antennae with rather short flagellum, about as long as fourth joint
of peduncle, made up of 8 segments; gland cone prominent, ex-
tending nearly to end of third joint of peduncle ; fourth joint slightly
longer than fifth, and like the fifth provided with long setae.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

47

Mandibles with all parts well developed, palp 3-jointed, the ter-
minal joint of which is bluntly styliform, shorter than second and
provided with long setae on inner margin. First maxillae with 2-
jointed palp of uniform thickness throughout and with apex rounded
and provided with short setae ; outer plate of usual form with forked
and branching toothlike spines on oblique distal margin ; inner plate

Pig. 17. Maura rathbunae Pearse.

triangular, of moderate size, with 4 setae on apex. Second maxillae
with subequal, oval plates having setae on distal margins. Maxillipeds
with 4-jointed palp and well developed plates ; inner plate subrectan-
gular, extending somewhat beyond lirst joint of palp with outer
margin slightly convex and with distal margin armed with plumose
.spines ; outer plate rather large, armed with setae on inner and
distal margins, oval, extending nearly as far as second joint of palp
which is the longest und cylindrical ; third joint about ^/a as long

48 B. W. Kunkel,

as second and slightly long-er than first ; fourth joint clawlike, about
as long as third.

In male, tirst gnathopods with suboval epimeron and moderately
slender second joint which bears several long setae on posterior
margin ; third joint short ; fourth joint slightl}- longer than broad
with numerous setae on rounded apical margin ; wrist rather large
and triangular, more than twice as long as broad, with posterior
margin well rounded and with distal margin provided with numerous
setae, anterior margin produced to form a triangular process ; hand
about as wide as w^ist but not so long, suboval in form, posterior
margin more convex than anterior margin and passing into oblique
palm by an even curve, palm slightly irregular in contour and
provided with setae of various lengths ; finger moderately long and
slender.

Second gnathopods with small, subrectangular epimeron; second
joint fairly short and third joint a little longer than broad; fourth
smaller than third with anterior margin much longer than posterior ;
hand very large, subtriangular in form with base of triangle form-
ing palm, posterior margin produced to form a triangular process,
palm very irregular in contour, more or less incised in posterior half
and with rounded prominence near articulation with finger provided
wath stout spine ; finger very large and strong, of curved form with
concave margin bearing a slight eminence toward middle.

Epimera low, suboval in form, third slightl}- bilobed ventrally,
second epimeron highest.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with peduncle longer than
the styliform rami ; second pair rather stouter than first, rami pro-
vided with numerous stout setae ; third pair with short peduncle
and rather broad, subrectangular lamelliform rami of which the
inner one is shorter than the outer one and provided only at apex
with setae, outer ramus also wdth setae on outer margin, third uropods
extending slightly beyond first and second.

Telson rectangular, slightly broader than long, incised for -/s of
its length with the lobes widely dehiscent, lobes truncate and distal
angles provided with several setae.

Length of single male specimen which was in the collection.
5 mm.

The species has been reported by Pearse from the Gulf Stream,
off Key West, Florida, in 98 fathoms. Station 7279, U. S. Bureau
of Fisheries, steamer Fish Hawk; and 122 fathoms, Station 7296.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

49

Maera tinkerensis sp. nov.

Eyes rather large, circular, with ocelli very widely separated,
hiterantennal lobes of head not prominent. Back sparsely setose.

First antennae with long peduncle, somewhat longer than fiagellum,
more than ^/2 as long as body ; first joint of peduncle tapering
slightly, rather longer than head, bearing on proximal half of lower
margin 3 setae equidistant from each other and on upper margin,
numerous very fine setae, apically a single seta and fascicle of
setae; second joint more slender than first and slightly longer,
]:)rovided with fascicles of setae on upper margin and short setae
on lower; third joint less than ^/s as long as second; principal
fiagellum composed of many segments, provided apically with short

Fig. 18. Maera tinkerensis sp. nov.

setae ; accessory fiagellum long, made up of 5 segments. Second
antennae only slightly longer than peduncle of first, with gland cone
long and slender ; third joint about 3 times as long as broad ; fourth
and fifth joints slender, fourth being slightly longer than fifth ; fia-
gellum scarcely longer than last joint of pedimcle, made up of
about 6 segments.

Mandibles with denticulated cutting edge and all parts moderately
developed ; palp 3-jointed, with second joint longest ; third joint of
tapering form and provided with long setae on inner margin. Lower
lip of ordinary form, rather broad and furnished with strong mandib-
ular processes. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp of uniform width
and with square apex and furnished with 7 or 8 plumose spines,
proximal joint of palp with numerous very fine setae on outer margin ;
outer plate extending beyond middle of second joint of palp, some-

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 4 May, 1910.

50 B. W. Kunkel,

what tapering with apex truncate and provided with about 8 branched
(antler-Hke) spines ; inner plate small, triangular, with 3 spines api-
cally. Second maxillae of usual form with oval plates, outer plate
broader distally, inner one broader proximally. Maxillipeds with
4-jointed palp, second joint long and slender, more than 4 times as
long as broad, third joint as long as fourth including terminal spine ;
outer plate rather narrow and slender, reaching nearly to end of
second joint of palp, provided on inner margin with row of closely
set toothlike spines which become longer toward distal end of plate
where they become plumose ; inner plate rectangular, with plumose,
spines on apical margin and distal portion of inner margin, which
bears at distal end a submarginal toothlike spine and external to
this a fascicle of simple setae.

In male, first gnathopods with epimeron which is higher than
long and which projects strongly anteriorly, with a short seta just
behind anterior ventral corner; second joint moderately long with
several setae near middle of posterior margin ; third joint slightly
longer than broad with fascicle of setae near distal end of posterior
margin ; fourth joint short with posterior margin very convex so
that joint is ^/s as broad as long, posterior margin with numerous
setae on distal portion ; wrist subrectangular, widening somewhat
toward distal end, as broad as hand and slightly longer, posterior
margin with 8 or 9 fascicles of slender setae which increase in
length distally, surface of wrist provided with many fascicles of
short simple setae and longer pectinate spines ; hand oval, with
more or less convex palm passing by even curve into posterior
margin, provided with 2 prehensile spines, posterior margin with
3 fascicles of setae, palm finely serrated and provided with numerous
submarginal setae, surface of hand and anterior margin further
furnished with fascicles of setae ; finger of usual form with single
seta on outer margin near base and 5 or 6 blunt spines on inner
margin.

Second gnathopods with epimeron about as broad as long, with
ventral margin slightly convex and furnished with 4 or 5 setae;
second joint long, with posterior margin convex and furnished with
4- or 5 setae placed at equal distances from each other ; third joint
somewhat longer than broad ; fourth joint twice as long as broad,
broadening somewhat distall}', with posterior margin elongated to
form a sharp projection having 2 setae at base ; wrist triangular,
not as wide as hand, with posterior margin rounded to fit internal
to projection on fourth joint, rounded portion covered with setae
of various lengths, the longest being on the margin ; hand large.

The Aniplilpoda of Bermuda. 51

oval, nearl}' twice as long as wide, with anterior margin having a
number of fascicles of setae, palm oblique, more than ^/2 as long
as hand, posterior margin furnished with 5 or 6 fascicles of setae,
prolonged to form a notch behind which the end of the dactyl fits,
notch provided with fascicle of long setae and with 2 spines bearing
cilia-like appendages, palm serrated and provided with submarginal
setae of various lengths; linger of usual form with 3 slender setae
on convex margin and 9 submarginal filiform spines on internal
margin.

Pereiopods moderately slender, seventh slightly longer than sixth ;
epimera of moderate size with ventral margin convex and furnished
with a few setae.

None of the segments dentate dorsally.

Postero-inferior margin of third abdominal segment entire.

Uropods, 3 pairs which are biramous, first extending as far as
second and having rami subequal and longer than peduncle, the
inner margin of which is furnished with 6 spines and apex with
several rather long spines, rami with 4 spines on inner margin and
group of longer ones at apex ; second uropods with peduncle shorter
than that of first and also relatively much shorter than rami which
are subequal and stouter than those of the first ; terminal uropods
extending far beyond others, with peduncle short and provided with
setae on distal margin, outer ramus somewhat longer than inner, of
uniform width, furnished externally with 4 notches in which are
fascicles of setae, inner margin with 4 short spines and fascicle of
long spines apically, inner ramus of slightly tapering form with outer
margin furnished with 3 spines and inner with 4 and apex with a
fascicle of setae.

Telson longer than broad, deepl}' cleft, each lobe being incised
to form a triangular notch in apex and armed with one spine and
fine seta.

Length 4 mm.

The species was represented in the collection by several males
from Harrington sound.

Elasmopus rapax A. Costa, 1858.

1853. A. Costa, Rendic. della Soc. Reale Borbon., Ace. delle
Sci., Napoli, n. ser.. vol. 2, p. 175.

Body moderately compressed and stout, back without carinae or
spines but with sparse, very fine setules. Postero-lateral angle of
first 2 abdominal segments about 90 ", third segment rather rounded

52

B. If\ Kuiikci

and slightly acute ; ventral mar<j;ins of abdominal segments provided
with rather stout spine about in the middle.

Eyes compound, reniform, composed of many ocelli, deeply pig-
mented in alcoholic specimens.

First antennae longer than second, with flagellum rather shorter
than peduncle, second segment of ]:)eduncle slightly longer than
first and more slender ; third segment about ^'2 as long as second ;
flagellum made up of man}^ segments ; accessory flagellum 2-jointed,

Fig. 11*. Elasuiopus rapax A. Costa.

shorter than first 2 joints of principal flagellum. Second antennae
with gland cone long and slender ; third joint as broad as long ;
fourth and fifth joints subequal ; flagellum rather short, made up of
about a dozen segments.

Upper lip rounded sharply with fine cilia on anterior margin
and ventral surface. Mandibles with 3-jointed palp, principal cutting
edge denticulated, and large molar tubercle ; first joint of palp short,
second rather strong with several setae on inner margin, third
segment blade-like, slender proximally, broadening abruptly, outer
margin convex, inner edge straight and furnished with setae apically ;
secondary cutting edge also denticulated ; spine row with 7 spines.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 53

Lower lip with outer plates rather widely separated, mandibular
processes moderately long ; inner plates moderate. First maxillae
with inner plate triangular with 2 plumose spines apically ; outer
plate large, provided with pectinate and branched toothlike spines,
terminal margin straight and oblique ; palp 2-jointed, terminal joint
twice as long as first and moderately stout, apex rounded and
provided with number of finely serrated spines. Second maxillae
with inner plate nearly as long as outer and with margins parallel
and apex rounded ; outer plate broader than inner, slightly broader
distally and with inner margin longer than outer. Maxillipeds with
inner plates narrow, twice as long as wide, apex straight and in-
clined slightly toward middle and provided with 14 or 15 plumose
spines ; outer plate much larger than inner with median margin
provided with numerous toothlike spines and setae and distal margin
with about 6 plumose spines ; palp 4-jointed with last joint claw-
like ; second joint twice as long as first and broader at distal end
than at ])roximal, rather broad, provided with setae on distal half;
third joint a little longer than first with apex provided with ciliated
knob and abundant long setae on distal half.

In male, first gnathopods smaller than second ; second joint rather
slender with margins parallel and provided with few short setae ;
third joint about as long as wide provided with a fascicle of setae
on distal margin ; fourth joint rather more slender than third, with
anterior and posterior margins parallel, posterior margin prolonged
to form triangular process which is twice as long as broad ; wrist
triangular, cup-shaped, rather broader than hand, posterior margin
thickly beset with setae ; hand oval, with palm slightly convex,
finely serrated toward apex, provided with numerous setae ; dactyl
about ^/2 as long as hand, of usual form with fine cilia on concave
margin and a single seta near base of outer margin.

Second gnathopods with moderately developed second joint, pro-
vided with short setae on posterior margin and longer ones on
straight anterior margin ; third joint slightly longer than wide with
small convex process at anterior end and furnished wdth fascicle of
setae apically ; fourth joint with posterior margin twice as long as
arterior and provided with fascicle of setae distally ; wrist very
short and broad, about as broad as long and about as broad as
hand, posterior margin very convex and provided with very many
setae of moderate length, articulating with short anterior margin of
fourth joint ; hand slightly more than twice as long as broad, oval ;
palm rather oblique, bearing rather broad, flat process near articu-
lation with finger and having several teeth, anterior and posterior

54 B. W. Kuiikcl,

margins with numerous fascicles of setae ; linger of usual form,
curved and pointed, about '/2 as long as hand and provided with
number of short cilia on inner concave margin.

First gnathopods of female similar to those of male ; second with
second joint more slender, furnished with many short setae on an-
terior margin and several long ones on posterior margin ; third joint
longer than broad ; fourth twice as long as broad, subrectangular
with several fascicles of setae on posterior margin ; wrist cup-shaped,
nearly as broad as long with free portion of posterior margin closely
beset with many long setae ; hand long, oval, as wide as wrist,
with fascicles of setae on anterior and posterior margins, palm ob-
lique, passing by regular curve into posterior margin, provided with
setae and with prehensile spine; finger of usual form, long.

Pereiopods with moderate epimera, provided ventrally with a few
setae, no spinning glands, appendages gradually increasing in length
posteriorly ; pereiopods 3 to 5, very robust.

Uropods, .3, biramous ; first uropods with inner ramus longer than
outer, extending as far as second uropods ; terminal uropods having
rami lamellar and projecting beyond anterior ones.

Telson deeply cleft but lobes not widely dehiscent, longer than
broad, bearing at outer posterior corner a short process and stout
spine ; inner corners of lobes rounded.

The species was represented by numerous specimens, some of
which bore the locality labels of Bailey Bay where they were found
in corallines, the " Ship Channel," Flatts Village, in sand, low water
to 2 fathoms. Castle Harbor in dead coral, and Harrington Sound.
The species has been recorded previously from the British Isles,
Christianiafjord, the Atlantic coast of France, the Azores, and the
Mediterranean.

Elasmopus magnispinatus sj), nov.

First antennae somewhat more than ^/o as long as body, fairly
stout, with fiagellum having abundant setae, peduncle slightly longer
than fiagellum, with first joint rather stout and broadest in middle ;
second joint slightly shorter than first and much more slender,
provided with setae ; third joint more than ^2 as long as first ; prin-
cipal fiagellum stout, made up of about 10 rather short segments ;
accessory fiagellum 1 -jointed, rudimentary. Second antennae ver}^
short, about as long as fiagellum of first; gland cone fairly prominent,
third joint of peduncle as long as Inroad ; fourth and fifth joints
subequal in length, fifth narrower than fourth and tapering slightl}' ;

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

55

flagellum about as long as last joint of peduncle, made up of 4 or
5 segments.

Mouth parts as in E. pocillimamis.

In male, first gnathopods much smaller than second, with mod-
erately large rhomboidal epimeron ; second joint rather stout with
proximal end slender ; third and fourth joints short, fourth about
twice as long as broad with posterior margin convex apically where
it is provided with short setae ; wrist large, triangular, rather wider
than hand and with a number of long setae, some of which are
pectinate ; hand suboval in form, somewhat more than twice as
long as broad, palm rather oblique, passing into posterior margin
by even curve, prehensile angle with prehensile spine, posterior

Fig. 20. Elasmopus magnispinatus sp. nov.

margin and palm provided with rather long, slender setae ; finger
curved and of moderate proportions.

Second gnathopods with suboval epimeron, rather higher than
long and having ventral margin rounded ; second joint strong, bear-
ing single stout spine at anterior apex ; third joint short ; fourth
joint subrectangular with distal margin bearing a small, triangular
process ; wrist triangular, about as broad as long and broader than
hand, with posterior margin provided with long setae ; hand and
finger similar to those of first gnathopod but larger.

Epimera moderate ; pereiopods 3 to 5, very stout ; third abdominal
segment with posterior lateral angle produced slightly to form tri-
angular process. Dorsal region of body segments provided with
sparse hairs.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first and second with styliform rami,

56 B. IV. Kimkcl,

first extending slightly beyond second and as far as third ; rami of
first subequal, and not as long as peduncle, provided on dorsal
margin and apex with stout spines ; second uropods with rami similar
to those of first but not longer than j^eduncle ; third uropods with
lamelliform rami, outer one larger than inner and provided with
fascicles of spines on outer margin and truncated apex.

Telson about as broad as long, rectangular, deeply incised, each
lobe bearing a process at inner angle and with group of 3 or 4
stout spines on distal margin.

Many individuals occurred in the collection, the largest of which
were about 4 mm. in length.

Sexual dimorphism not marked.

Elasmopus pocillimanus (Bate, 1862), Delia Valle, 1893.

1862. Maera pocillimanus. Bate, Cat. Brit. Mus., p. 191, pi. 34,

fig. 7.

1893. Elasmopus pocillimanus. Delia Valle, Fauna und Flora des

Golfes von Neapel, vol. 20, p. 733; \)\. 1, fig. 4 ; pi. 22, fig. 23-25.

Eyes compound and placed well toward anterior surface of face ;
interantennal lobes not prominent.

First antennae longer than second, not more than ^/3 the length
of body ; peduncle moderately long, first 2 segments subequal, third
about ^/2 length of second ; flagellum about as long as peduncle,
made up of about 21 segments ; accessory flagellum 2-jointed. Second
antennae only slightly longer than peduncle of first ; gland cone
slender and pointed, extending beyond apex of third segment which
is not as broad as long ; last 2 segments of peduncle subequal, long
and slender ; flagellum short, not as long as last 2 joints of peduncle,
made up of 10 joints.

Mandibles with 3-jointed palp, first joint of which is short, second
of moderate length and only slightly shorter than third which be-
comes broader near the middle and tapers toward the apex like a
knife blade, inner margin of tapering portion armed with closely set
row of short setae of equal size and 2 or 3 longer ones apically ;
cutting edge dentate, molar tubercle prominent. First maxillae with
2-jointed palp, the terminal joint of which is longer and thinner than
first and armed with a number of moderately stout spines at the
rounded apex ; outer plate of moderate size, with 6 branching and
pectinate spines on apical margin ; inner plate small, triangular, with
2 plumose spines on apex. Second maxillae of usual form. Maxilli-
peds with plates well developed ; inner plate rectangular with
plumose spines and spine teeth on apical margin ; outer plate not

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

57

extending to distal end of second joint of palp, margin armed with
setae which are short and stout on proximal part of inner margin,
becoming elongated and toothlike toward the apex and long and
slender on apical portion of outer margin ; palp 4-jointed, third joint
provided with ciliated knoblike process at apex, fourth joint curved
and clawlike and armed with a terminal seta.

First gnathopods of male very small ; epimeron rather small,
rhomboidal, inferior anterior angle projecting forward considerably,

Fig. 21. Elasniopus pocillimanus (Bate).

ventral margin armed with many short setae and 2 long setae ;
second joint moderately stout, projecting considerably beyond epim-
eron, provided on convex hind margin with about 9 rather long,
slender setae and at distal end of posterior margin with several
shorter ones, some of which are pectinate ; third and fourth joints
small, each provided apically with many long setae, front margin
of fourth joint straight, forming articulation with wrist which is
nearly as long as hand and slightly broader ; wrist provided with
many long setae on posterior and apical margins and on lateral

58 B. JV. Kunkel,

surface, posterior margin rather strongly convex, distal margin straight
and at right angles to anterior margin ; hand subrectangular with
5 or 6 fascicles of setae on posterior margin and 3 or 4 on anterior
which is more convex than posterior ; palm short, oblique, armed
at prehensile angle with 3 or 4 spine teeth, finely serrate and armed
with many submarginal setae ; finger of usual form with a few
setules on inner concave margin.

Second gnathopods very large in the male, with small epimeron
which is ^/s as long as high, lower margin convex and armed with
man)' short submarginal setae and slender spines ; second and third
joints very similar to the respective joints of the first gnathopod
but larger and stouter; fourth joint relatively short with posterior
margin twice as long as anterior ; wrist triangular, not as long as
broad, with a considerable process on posterior margin which fits
into the concave apical margin of preceding joint and is armed with
many long, slender setae ; hand very large, rectangular, about twice
as long as wide ; posterior margin, which continues by a regular
curve into the palm, armed with many long setae ; anterior margin
with many fascicles of setae including one at apex ; palm oblique
and hollowed to form concavity like shallow bowl which is bordered
with many slender setae, and into which fits the finger which is
strongly curved and stout.

In female, first gnathopods very similar in form and size to those
of male, but somewhat more slender ; fourth joint shorter than in
male and wrist relatively shorter and broader with posterior margin
armed with many long pectinate setae, hand and finger similar to
male.

Second gnathopods quite similar to first but larger; wrist armed
with many setae on posterior margin which is more angular than
in the first gnathopod ; hand oval, twice as long as broad, armed
with numerous long setae and short spine teeth; 3 or 4 longer spine
teeth at angle between palm and posterior margin; finger moder-
ately long and slender with a single seta on convex margin.

Pereiopods of usual form, terminating in curved dactyls ; epimera
of moderate size increasing to fourth ; second joints of last 3 perei-
opods normally dilated ; posterior limbs stout and seventh as long
as sixth.

Uropods biramous ; third extending be3-ond others and rami ex-
panded into subequal plates armed with many setae on apex, outer
plate with outer margin also provided with setae.

Telson rectangular, not longer than broad, cleft nearly to base,
the 2 halves widely dehiscent, each armed with 2 setae at apex

The Aniphipoda of Ber^mda. 59

which is rather deepl}' concave with a median process rather more
prominent than the outer.

Length : 12 mm. in one specimen, average about 8 mm.

E. pocillimamis is apparentl}' very common ; it was represented
in the collection by upwards of 30 specimens, some of which were
found in dead coral from Castle Harbor, in corallines from Bailey
Bay at low water, and from Harrington Sound. The species has
been previously recorded from the Mediterranean, and the coast ol
New Jerse3% Long Island Sound, and Vine3'ard Sound.

Gammarus breweri sp. nov.

Eyes large, compound, subtriangular, situated well forward on
interantennal lobes.

First antennae more than half as long as body with peduncle
about as long as flagellum ; second joint of peduncle slightl}' longer
than first but more slender ; third joint ver}' short and scarcely to
be distinguished from first segments of flagellum, which is composed
of about 17 segments gradually diminishing in length toward apex;
accessory flagellum of moderate size made up of 6 joints. Second
antennae shorter than first, gland cone ver}- slender and long,
reaching nearly to apex of third segment, which is stout, about
twice as long as broad ; fourth and fifth segments long and slender,
fifth slightly longer than fourth ; whole peduncle longer than that of
first antennae; flagellum not as long as last 2 joints of peduncle,
made up of about 8 gradually diminishing segments.

Mandibles with all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed with first
of moderate size, broader apically and produced on inner margin
to form triangular process distally, third joint about ^j^ as long as
second, provided apically with several very long setae; principal
cutting edge denticulated, secondary cutting edge made up of about
6 slender teeth ; 6 spines in spine row ; molar tubercle rather large.

First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, of which the proximal one is
slightly longer than broad and the distal one is more than twice
as long as broad with a blunt apex bearing numerous setae ; outer
plate rather long and slender and somewhat curved with numerous
branched and forked spines on distal margin ; inner plate triangular
with fine pinnate spines on inner margin and apex. Second maxillae
wdth plates of nearly equal size, inner one slightly broader than
outer which is the longer of the 2, plates rounded apically and
provided with setae. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, first joint short,
second moderately long, extending l^eyond apex of outer plate, with
setae on inner margin ; third joint al^out twice as long as wide and

60

B. IV. Kunkel,

broader distally than at base, inner margin and apex with many
long setae, fonrth joint conical, armed apically with single sharp
unguiform spine ; outer plate moderately broad, rounded at apex
and on outer margin, inner margin provided with broad toothlike
spines which become longer toward distal end of plate where they
gradually become long setae ; inner plate extending hardly to middle
of second joint of palp, with distal margin transverse and provided
with row of pinnate spines.

In female, first gnathopods with epimeron slightly higher than
long, produced anteriorly and ventrally to rather acute angle ; second

Fig. 22. Gamnmrus breweri sp. nov.

joint moderately long and stout, provided on posterior margin with
numerous setae ; third and fourth joints of usual form and size ; wrist
large, with anterior and posterior margins slightly convex and about
twice as long as broad, with several long setae on anterior margin
and numerous fascicles of setae on posterior margin which forms
an even curve with distal margin; hand oval, smaller than wrist,
palm rather oblique and provided with short setae and several fas-
cicles of long ones, posterior margin and apex with fascicles of setae ;
finger rather large, of usual form with several cilia on concave margin.
Second gnathopods much larger and stronger than first ; epimeron
rhomboidal, about as long as high ; second joint fairly stout with
long slender setae on posterior margin and short ones on anterior;

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 61

third joint broader than long; fourth rectangular, about twice as
long as broad with posterior margin prolonged to form slender tri-
angular process ; wrist triangular, about as broad as long with several
fascicles of setae on posterior margin and several very long setae
on distal margin, scarcely as broad as hand which is oval and
broader distally than proximally and about twice as long as greatest
breadth, palm coarsely dentate, rather oblique and about as long as
posterior margin into which it passes by a small triangular process
and in which region it is furnished with 5 prehensile spines, rest
of palm provided with stout odontoid spines and a few slender setae,
posterior margin provided with 7 fascicles of setae, anterior sub-
margin with several more fascicles, apex with fascicle of rather long
setae ; finger of usual form, rather large.

Pereiopods with epimera of moderate size and with dactyls of
usual type, last 3 pairs stouter than first 2, fourth and fifth of nearly
equal size.

Posterior margins of first 3 abdominal segments serrated and pro-
vided with short setae, posterior margin of third segment with a rounded
notch close to postero-lateral angle which thus is rendered very acute.

Third uropods and telson were missing in the single specimen at
hand ; first and second uropods biramous, with rami subequal, ped-
uncle of first extending as far posteriorly as peduncle of second but
rami slightly farther than those of second, peduncle of first slightly
longer than rami.

Length of single female exclusive of last abdominal segment and
telson 8 mm.

Insula gen. nov.

Body compressed, epimera moderate.

Antennae short, with few segments in flagella, first antennae
nearly as long as second and with no accessory flagellum.

Mandibles with denticulate cutting edge and very large molar
tul)ercle, no palp. First maxillae with inner plate provided with 2
terminal setae and with small, one-jointed palp. Second maxillae
normal. Maxillipeds with inner plates armed apically with 3 acute
processes, outer plate small, palp 3-jointed, stout.

Gnathopods subchelate and equal. Pereiopods normal, no spinn-
ing glands; last pair not differing markedly from preceding.

Uropods 3 pairs, terminal pair small and uniramous. Telson small,
thick, entire.

This genus resembles Orcliestia but is markedly difterent in the
greater relative lenofth of the first antennae.

62

B. IV. Kunkel,

Insula antennulella sp. nov.

Eyes compound, situated close to anterior margin of head, deeply
pigmented ; lateral lobes of head not developed.

First antennae about ^/^ as long as body ; peduncle short and
scarcely to be differentiated from flagellum, first joint broader than
long, second about as long as broad and narrower than first, third
joint as long as second, about ^/a as broad as second and scarcely
differing from joints of flagellum which number 4. Second antennae
longer than first and stouter, peduncle longer than flagellum, third
joint stout and slightly longer than wide, fourth joint more slender

Fig. 22. Insuld aniennnlella sp. nov.

than third, fifth joint small, slightly shorter than preceding and very
similar to first joint of flagellum which is made up of 5 joints.

Mandibles moderately stout, with principal cutting edge divided
into 5 teeth and with secondary cutting edge short, deeply incised,
molar tubercle very large and cyhndrical, palp absent. Lower lip
without inner plates and with outer plates broad, mandibular pro-
cesses short and not prominent. First maxillae with inner plate
slender, triangular, with 2 setae apically, outer plate large, armed
with pectinate setae on oblique distal margin; palp weak, 1 -jointed,
not extending as far as outer plate. Second maxillae of usual form
with narrow plates provided with setae on apex. Maxilhpeds with
inner plates narrow and long, with distal margin produced to form
3 triangular teeth and provided with a few setae ; outer plate slightly
longer than inner and with rounded apex, provided with setae; palp

The Aniphipoda of Bermuda. 63

strong, 3-jointed, first joint cylindrical, twice as long as wide, with
a few setae on distal inner angle, second joint short, about as long
as broad, witli long setae on apical border, third joint conical, about
as long as preceding, provided apically with a single seta.

First gnathopods of male with epimeron rather short, produced
anteriorly to form rounded angle ; second joint stout, third joint
short ; fourth joint al)out twice as long as broad; wrist cup-shaped,
articulating with anterior margin of fourth joint, slightly longer than
broad, distally expanded to width greater than that of proximal end
of hand, posterior margin bearing a single, stout seta distally ; hand
subchelate, nearly twice as long as wide, subrectangular, slightly
broader distally, palm transverse, slightly irregular in form ; linger
of usual form and as long as palm. Second gnathopods very similar
in form to first but slightly larger ; wrist with more prominent pos-
terior lobe than that of first; palm convex.

Ejjimera moderate, with ventral margins rounded ; pereiopods of
normal form, furnished with clawlike fingers and with no spinning
glands.

Uropods, 3 pairs, of which the first pair is the longest, with 2
rami of lanceolate form, armed distally with several stout spines ;
second pair also biramous but much shorter than first; third pair
very short, uniramous, with ramus much shorter than peduncle.

Telson small, thick, entire, with few short setae at apex.

Length about 2 mm.

The genus was represented by a single male specimen taken from
the surface in the evening. May, 1898.

Orchestia platensis Kroyer, 1845.

1845. Kroyer, Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift ; ser. 2, vol. 1, p. 304,

pi. 2, fig. 2.

Eyes compound, made up of many small ocelh, moderate, circular.

First antennae very short, extending not quite as far as tip of
penultimate joint of peduncle of second antennae ; segments of ped-
uncle subequal in length ; flagellum very short, 2/3 as long as ped-
uncle, made up of several joints terminating in several short setae.
Second antennae of moderate length ; first and second fused with
head ; third joint shorter than broad ; fourth joint slightly more than
twice as long as broad ; fifth joint considerably longer than fourth
and more slender ; flagellum about as long as peduncle, each segment
provided with several setae at distal end.

Mandibles elongated, cutting edges divided into several teeth,
s])ines on spine row well developed ; molar tuljercle large ; palp

64

B. W. Kunkel,

wanting. First maxillae with inner plate moderately long and slender,
provided apically with 2 plumose spines ; outer plates somewhat
longer than inner, furnished with forked and branching spines api-
cally ; palp very small, being represented by small spine on outer
margin of outer plate. Maxillipeds with small inner plate which
reaches scarcely as far as distal end of first joint of palp and is pro-
vided with 3 toothlike spines alternating with plumose spines on
apical margin ; outer plate about as wide as inner but reaching

Fig. 24. Orchestia platensis Kroyer.

nearly to extremit}' of second joint of palp, rounded apically and
provided with numerous stout setae on inner margin and apex ;
palp 3-jointed, stout, first joint not as long as wide, becoming broader
distally, second joint also broader than long and furnished with a
lobe on inner margin which is provided with setae similar to those
of outer plate and extending beyond proximal margin of last joint
which is rounded apically and slightly longer than wide, bearing
apically several short setae.

In female, first gnathopods smaller than second ; with subtriangular
epimeron having ventral margin slightly indented by broad notch ;

The Amphipoda of Bermuda 66

second joint moderatel}- stout with a few setae on anterior and
posterior margins ; third joint shorter than broad ; fourth joint tri-
angular, twice as long as broad with articulation with wrist near
proximal end of anterior margin, posterior margin provided with a
few setae; wrist triangular, nearly three times as long as broad,
wider than hand, provided scantily with setae ; hand not as long
as wrist nor as broad, subrectangular, furnished with fascicles of
spines on anterior and posterior margins, palm very short and nearly
transverse ; finger of usual form and size w^ith circlet of short setae
about ^/s distance to apex.

Second gnathopods with rounded epimeron bearing subtriangular
process posteriorly ; second joint very stout with anterior margin
strongly convex and provided with setae ; third joint longer than
broad with anterior margin slightly concave and posterior margin
convex ; fourth joint shorter than third but scarcely as broad ; wrist
articulating with nearly entire anterior margin of fourth joint, tri-
angular, twice as long as broad, distal margin transverse; hand
somewhat elongate, oval, with rounded apex, anterior margin notched
near apex to receive short finger, posterior margin rounded, longer
than anterior margin so that hand is weakly chelate, palm short,
slightly concave, provided with setae ; finger rather small and curved,
not reaching as far distall}^ as hand.

In male, first gnathopods with trapezoidal epimeron in which the
ventral margin is nearly twice as long as dorsal, posteriorly elongated
to form a semicircular lobe of moderate size, anterior margin pro-
vided with many short sharp spines; second joint moderately long;
much broader at distal end than at proximal, provided with setae
on anterior and posterior margins ; third joint about as broad as
long; fourth joint similar to that of female, twice as long as
broad, having articulation with wrist by means of oblique portion
of anterior margin ; wrist very long, triangular, having rounded lobe
on distal part of posterior margin provided with numerous spines
of various sizes ; hand more or less rectangular with distal margin
considerably longer than proximal and at right angles to anterior
margin, posterior margin strongly convex toward distal end, palm
moderately long, passing by even curve into posterior margin, which
region is minutely spinulose, palm very finely serrate and provided
with numerous submarginal setae ; finger moderately long, not greatly
curved, provided with encircling row of setae near middle.

Second gnathopods with semicircular epimeron slightly longer
than high, with numerous short setae on ventral margin ; second
joint moderately stout, very slender at proximal end ; third joint

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 5 May, 1910.

66 B. W. Kunkcl,

longer than broad with trianj^ular process on anterior margin ; fourth
joint subrectangular, articulating with wrist by entire anterior margin ;
wrist scarcely ^2 ^^ long as wide, broader at distal end, articulat-
ing by anterior wall of V-shaped notch in posterior margin of hand
which is large and oval and nearly twice as long as broad, palm
strongly convex, nearly as long as posterior margin and separated
from latter by broad shallow notch, provided with numerous stout
submarginal spines ; finger very long, extending beyond palm, curved
and pointed.

Pereiopods with moderate epimera ; appendages devoid of spinning
glands and provided with dactyls of usual form ; second joint of
last pereiopods with posterior margin serrate.

Abdominal segments with postero-lateral margins of anterior 3
serrated.

Uropods, 3 pairs, of which the last pair are uniramous ; rami of
first pair subequal and not as long as peduncle, provided with sharp
spines ; second uropods not extending as far as first, rami subequal
and about as long as peduncle ; terminal uropods short, ramus rather
slender, not as long as peduncle which is slightly conical and
stout.

Telson emarginate, subtriangular, rather thick, not extending as
far as peduncle of last uropods, provided with 2 setae on dorsal
side of apex and near middle.

Length 11—12 mm.

This is one of the commonest known species of Amphipod, being
found on the sea shore of nearly all climates. It has been recorded
from the Rio de la Plata, the Atlantic coast of North America from
the Bay of Fundy to New Jersey, the Mediterranean, and the Sea of
Tiberias. The species occurs in abundance under decaying sea-
weeds at high water mark on all the shores of Bermuda. Prof.
Verrill obtained large numbers by attracting them to a pan of al-
cohol placed on the beach in the night by means of a lantern.

Hyale prevostii (Milne Edwards, 1830) Stebbing, 1888.

1830. Ainphitlwc prevostii. Milne-Edwards, Annales Sc. Nat. (J)
vol. 20, p. 378.

1888. Hyalc prevostii. Stebbing, Kept, of Challenger, vol. 29,,
p. 144.

Eyes comi)Ound, well separated from each other dorsally, oval in
form, deeply pigmented.

The Am[)]iipoda of Bcr>iiu(hi.

67

First antennae terminating about on level with first third of fla-
gellum of second antennae ; peduncle slightly less than ^j^ as long
as flagellum, first joint longest and stoutest, third slightly shorter
than second which in turn is about ^2 3-S long as first; flagellum
composed of about 12 elongated segments. Second antennae not
as long as body, with peduncle less than ^/a as long as flagellum ;
third joint scarcely as broad as long, fourth and fifth joints subequal
in length, fourth much thicker than fifth ; flagellum composed of
about 16 elongated segments.

Mandibles strong, oblong, principal and secondary cutting edges
divided into 3 or 4 teeth of difterent sizes, molar tubercle very

Fig. 25. Hyale jnero'-fu (^Miliie-Edwards).

large and cylindrical with flat grinding surface, palp absent. Lower
lip with no inner plates, outer plates stout, rather widely separated
from each other, anterior margins rather short and densely ciliated,
mandibular processes short but strong. First maxillae with 1-jointed
palp which does not extend beyond apex of outer plate, provided
with single apical seta ; outer plate large, having oblique apical
margin with numerous stout, forked and pectinate spine teeth ; inner
plate slender, triangular, with 2 plumose spines at apex. Second
maxillae with inner plate rather shorter than outer and about as
wide, both plates provided with setae apically. Maxillipeds with
4-jointed palp; inner plates rectangular extending nearly as far as
apex of first joint of palp and provided on distal margin, which is
transverse, with 3 triangular odontoid spines and numerous plumose
spines which also occur on the straight inner margin ; outer plate

68 B. IV. Kunkel,

extending slightly beyond apex of tirst joint of palp, outer margin
convex and apical margin rounded and provided with numerous
submarginal setae ; palps strong, first joint with outer margin about
3 times as long as inner, second joint nearly twice as long as first
and ver}^ broad on account of presence of broad lobe on inner side
which is produced distally and bears numerous long, stout setae at
apex and distal part of inner margin ; third joint about as long as
first, provided with broad, rounded lobe on inner side at distal end
so that joint is much broader distally than proximally, outer apex
also provided with small, rounded lobe, distal margin and lobes
armed with many long, stout setae ; fourth joint about as long as
third, clawlike, with concave margin provided with numerous setae.

In female, first gnathopods somewhat smaller than second ; epim-
eron rather deeper than long with anterior ventral angle rounded
and not greatly produced ; second joint moderately stout, with an-
terior margin slightly concave, posterior margin convex and prox-
imal end much thinner than distal, anterior distal angle produced
to 'form rounded lobe, posterior margin with 2 rather stout pectinate
spines near middle ; third joint short, with posterior distal angle
provided with long pectinate spine and several setae ; fourth joint
subrectangular, more than twice as long as broad, provided with
several pectinate spines on distal margin ; wrist ^/a as broad as long,
articulating with fourth joint by entire anterior margin of fourth,
posterior margin forming a semicircular lobe which is provided with
closel}' set row of pectinate spines ; hand subrectangular, slightly
broader at distal end than proximal, posterior margin provided with
row of pectinate spines occupying middle third of margin which at
this point is slightly convex, outer surface of hand provided with
diagonal row *of stout, plumose spines, palm slightly oblique and
convex, provided with several setae and 2 prehensile spines ; finger of
usual form, short and stout and provided with several setae on con-
cave margin.

Second gnatho])ods similar to first but having epimeron subrect-
angular with ventral margin rounded and palm of hand slightly
more oblique than that of first ; whole appendage stouter in all respects
than first.

In male, first gnatho])ods with e])imeron having anterior ventral
angle not greatly produced ; second joint stout, with anterior margin
straight and posterior margin convex with several sharply pointed
spines at nearl}- equal distances from each other; third joint about
as long as wide ; fourth subrectangular with anterior margin forming
articulation with wrist which is triancfular, much longfer than wide

The Aniphipoda of Bermnda. 69

and with posterior margin produced to form prominent semicircular
lobe which is provided with row of stout, pectinate spines ; hand
suboval, slightly longer than wrist, posterior margin with single
stout toothlike spine situated submarginally ; palm rather oblique and
slightly convex, provided with a regular row of submarginal setae
and a very large prehensile spine; finger of usual form, moderately
stout.

Second gnathopods with rounded epimeron, about as high as long ;
second joint rather short with anterior margin prolonged distally to
form triangular process ; third joint short ; fourth joint quadrilateral,
posterior margin much longer than anterior, distal margin rather
longer than proximal ; wrist articulating with anterior margin of
fourth and having form of equilateral triangle ; hand oval, with base
incised to form 2 equal lobes, the anterior one of which forms articu-
lation with wrist, about twice as long as wide, palm rather longer
than posterior margin which is separated from it by several pre-
hensile spines and distinct prehensile angle, provided with double
row of rather stout submarginal setae ; finger rather long and curved
in usual way.

Fourth epimeron much higher than fifth which is suboval. Fifth
and sixth pereiopods with sixth joint having spine and setae on
posterior margin.

Uropods essentially . as in H. pontica ; telson semicircular, broader
than long and divided by deep incision nearly to base.

Length 7—9 mm.

The species, which is apparently one of the commonest species
in Bermuda, occurs very abundantly among the fronds of Ulva in
the Mediterranean and is reported from the east coast of North
America, Rio Janeiro, and Valparaizo, Peru.

Some of the specimens were collected on Somerset Island by
W. M. Rankin in 1898, there were some also collected from dead
coral from Castle Harbor.

Hyale pontica Rathke, 1837.

1837. Rathke, Mem. Acad. Imper. des Sci. de St. Petersbourg,

vol. 3, p. 378, pi. 5, fig. 20-28.

Eyes large, compound, subtriangular, ocelli small and arranged
close together.

First antennae about '/s as long as body, extending as far as
middle of second antennae; peduncle short, more than '/s length
of entire appendage ; first joint fairly stout, abovit twice as long as
wide with a few setae around distal margin; second joint more

70

B. JV. Kimkel,

slender and not so long as first ; third more slender than second
and slightly shorter; flagellum with 13 segments. Second antennae
with flagellum much longer than peduncle, fourth segment about
^/s shorter than fifth ; first, second, and third joints short and jjro-
vided on distal ends with setae ; flagellum made up of about 20
segments j^rovided with setae on distal ends.

Mandibles strong, palp wanting ; Ijotli cutting edges divided into
5 or 6 teeth ; 5 plumose spines on spine row ; molar tubercle large ;

Fig. 26. Hyula punfict H. Katlike.

bearing plumose flagellum. Lower lip with no inner plate ; outer
plate broad, with anterior margin entire and mandibular processes
rather small. First maxillae with inner plate slender, triangular and
furnished with 2 plumose spines apically ; outer plate moderateh'
large with 9 stout pectinate spines in a double row on distal margin
which is transverse ; palp small and slender, one-jointed, furnished with
setae at apex. Second maxillae with inner plate somewhat smaller
than outer ; both oval in form : inner plate provided with pectinate
spines on apex and distal half of inner margin ; outer plate witii

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 71

numerous setae on apex, and several small setae on inner margin.
Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, the fourth joint of which is conical
and provided with a fascicle of fine setae on apex ; third joint very
broad, narrower at base than at apex, with many long setae near
distal margin; second joint about as long as third, with rounded
process on distal end of inner margin which is provided with setae ;
first joint short, with outer margin much longer than inner; outer
plate reaching nearly to distal end of second joint of palp, provided
with setae on rounded apex and inner margin; inner plate long
and narrow, with fine setae on outer and inner margins and several
toothlike spines on apex.

In male, first gnathopods smaller than second, with epimeron
elongated anteriorly and having ventral margin only slightly convex
and provided with many submarginal setae ; second joint projecting
half its length beyond epimeron, constricted proximally, provided
with 2 stout curved spines on posterior margin ; third joint as broad
as long ; fourth joint about twice as long as wide, articulating with
wrist by anterior margin ; wrist triangular, having rounded lobe on
posterior side which is provided with many setae ; hand subrect-
angular, not so broad as wrist and having palm slightly oblique,
provided with diagonal row of plumose spines across surface and
with group of setae -\-i distance to distal end of posterior margin,
palm provided with many submarginal setae of various lengths and
with prehensile spine ; finger strong, curved, and provided with a
few setae on inner margin.

Second gnathopods with epimeron rounded ventrally, higher than
long and bearing triangular lobe on posterior margin and submarginal
setae ventrall}' ; second joint extending considerably be3-ond epimeron,
with roimded lobe at antero-distal angle ; third and fourth segments
essentially as in first gnathopod ; wrist triangular and smaller than
in first ; hand large, oval, about twice as long as broad, posterior
margin continuous with palm by even curve and provided with
many teeth and setae of various lengths, prehensile spine present ;
finger strong and curved, having a few setae on concave margin.

Pereiopods furnished with dactyls, last 2 pairs subequal ; epimera
moderate with margins entire except for rounded notch on first 3 ;
that of second pereipod largest of series.

Uropods, 3 pairs ; first and second biramous, first longer than
second and third, wnth rami somewhat shorter than peduncle, the
inner one of which is slightly longer than the outer, provided with
2 or 3 spines on dorsal margin and several on apex ; second with
peduncle relatively shorter than that of first, otherwise of similar

72

B. W. Ktmkel,

form ; terminal uropods quite short, uniramous, with ramus shorter
than peduncle and bearing several spines on apex, peduncle extend-
ing beyond telson.

Telson thick, very deeply cleft, broader than long.

There were present in the collection only a few males having a
length of about 15 mm.

The species has been previously recorded from the North Atlantic,
the North Sea, and the Mediterranean.

Hyale trifoliadens sp. nov.

Eyes small, compound, deeply pigmented in alcoholic specimens.

First antennae with peduncle half as long as flagellum ; lirst joint
slightly longer than second, stout, scarcely twice as long as broad ;
third joint short and slender, very similar to first joint of flagellum
which is made up of about 9 segments. Second antennae much

Fig. 27. Hyale trifoliadens sp. nov.

longer than first, scarcely V2 as long as body; peduncle nearly as
long as entire first antennae ; first and second joints short and broad
with gland cone slender ; third joint not as long as broad ; fourth
joint twice as long as broad and shorter than fifth which is more
slender; flagellum made up of al)out 15 segments ]:)rovided with
setae on distal margins.

Mandibles strong ; palp wanting ; princi]:)al cutting edge divided
into 3 teeth ; secondary cutting edge with 2 processes, much smaller
than principal ; spine row with a munber of short plumose spines ;
molar tubercle .large, furnished with a plumose seta.

The Amphipoda of Bcrunida. 73

Lower lip and first and second maxillae as in H. pontica. Maxilli-
peds with inner plates well developed, narrow, extending as far as
first joint of palp, provided with plumose spines on inner margin
and apex which also bears 3 odontoid spines ; outer plate extending
well beyond inner and bearing 2 plumose spines apically and m;iny
setae on inner margin; palp well developed with second joint sub-
rectangular and bearing a semicircular lobe on inner distal angle
and with many setae on inner margin ; third joint about as long as
first, broader distally than proximally and bearing many setae on
distal margin; fourth joint more or less clawlike, not as long as
preceding joint.

In male first gnathopods with epimeron longer than high, rounded
ventrally but with anterior angle projectmg well forward ; second
joint moderately stout, projecting well beyond epimeron, bearing
on anterior margin 2 or 3 short setae and several long setae on
distal posterior angle ; third joint about as long as broad with a
few setae on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint about twice as
long as wide with a few setae on posterior distal angle ; fifth joint
articulating with fourth along nearly entire anterior margin, more or
less triangular with prominent semicircular lobe bearing long setae
on posterior margin, anterior margin moderately convex ; hand sub-
rectangular, rather more than twice as long as broad, not as broad
as wrist, posterior margin bearing single fascicle of setae near middle,
palm transverse and furnished with setae, the longest of which are
at the prehensile angle ; finger fairly stout, of usual form.

Second gnathopods with epimeron slightly shorter than that of
first gnathopods with ventral margin evenly rounded ; second joint
robust but slender at proximal end, bearing a few setae on anterior
and posterior margins ; third joint as long as broad, with a few setae
on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint triangular, articulating with
wrist by distal portion of anterior margin, bearing several setae on
apex ; wrist rather short, bearing long curved process on posterior
side which renders wrist broader than hand which bears a fascicle
of setae apically ; hand oval, rather broader distally than proximally,
about twice as long as broad, palm somewhat oblique, straight,
provided with numerous setae of various lengths and prehensile
spine, posterior margin with fascicle of setae near middle ; finger
of usual form and size ; second gnathopods in every way stronger
than first.

In female, first gnathopods with wrist longer than in male and
provided with many more setae on posterior margin ; hand shorter
than in male and furnished with many setae on posterior margin,

74 B. IV. Ktuikel,

provided with prehensile spine. In second gnathopods, wrist shorter
than in first and hand more nearly oval with palm qnite obhque
and posterior margin much shorter than palm and provided with
several groups of spines, palm with numerous submarginal spines
of various lengths and 2 prehensile spines ; finger moderately stout,
provided with 2 short cilia on inner concave margin.

Other characters as in H. poniica.

The species was represented by several individuals 6—8 mm. in
length.

Parhyalella gen. nov.

First antennae longer than peduncle of second ; first maxillae with
palp wanting ; maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, last joint being ungui-
form ; gnathopods subchelate ; telson entire.

This genus is closel}^ related to H3'alella but differs from it in the
alisence of a maxillary palp.

Parhyalella batesoni sp. nov.

Eyes moderately large, compound, situated well toward dorsal
side of head.

First antennae nearly as long as second ; peduncle longer than
flagellum which is composed of about a dozen rather short segments
which are markedly broader at the distal than at proximal end ;
first joint of peduncle very stout, scarcely longer than broad, second
joint subequal in length but much narrower, third joint shorter than
second and about twice as long as broad. Second antennae with
first and second joints of peduncle short and coalesced with head,
gland cone absent, third joint about as broad as long, fourth joint
rather more than twice as long as broad, fifth joint somewhat longer
and more slender than fourth ; flagellum very short, scarcely longer
than last joint of peduncle, m.ade up of onl}' a few segments which
rapidly become shorter and thinner distally.

Mandibles with principal cutting edge divided into 6 teeth of
which the second and third from the anterior end are largest, sec-
ondary edge divided into 5 nearly equal teeth, molar tubercle ver}'
strong, palp wanting. First maxillae with palp wanting, outer plate
rather large with pectinate and branched spine-teeth on distal end ;
inner plate rather short and slender with 2 plumose spines on apex.
Second maxillae with outer and inner plates rather narrow and sub-
equal, outer one with setae on distal margin, inner one with setae
also on distal half of inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner and outer
plates rather small, outer plates extending as far as apex of first

The Ampiiipoda of Bermuda. 75

joint of pal[) and inner one extendincr not quite so far ; distal margin
of inner plate provided with 3 odontoid spines and numerous plu-
mose spines, outer plates with inner margin and a]:)ex which is
rounded, provided with setae ; palp 4-jointed with first joint ver}'
short and outer apex rather prolonged, second joint not as long as
broad with broad lobe extending along inner side provided with
row of stout spines, fourth joint clawlike, about as long as third joint.
In male, first gnathopods with moderately high epimeron produced
at antero- ventral angle ; second joint stout ; wrist triangular, about

Fig. 28. Parhyalelld hatesoni sp. iiov.

as broad as long and bearing prominent rounded lobe on posterior
margin ; hand subrectangular, not as broad as wrist, nearly twice
as long as wide, palm rather short and nearly transverse, provided
with setae of various lengths, prehensile angle rounded and furnished
with stout spine ; finger short and ver}' stout.

Second gnathopods ver}- large with subrectangular epimeron which
are higher than long ; second joint of moderate proportions with
projecting lobe on anterior side ; fourth joint with anterior and pos-
terior margins nearly parallel and with posterior apex somewhat
produced ; wrist triangular, short, with very broad lobe from distal
posterior angle which projects as far as posterior margin of fourth
joint; hand oval, about twice as long as wide, with base deeply

76 B. W. Kunkel,

incised, palm oblique and furnished with submarginal setae, prehen-
sile angle moderately prominent and bearing two stout setae ; finger
long and curved.

Telson triangular, about as broad as long with apex rounded.

Length 9 mm. There was a single specimen in the collection.

Microdeutopus anomalus (Rathke, 1843) Bate, 1862.

1843. Gauunanis anomahis. Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Caesa-

real Leopold. Carol. German., vol. 30 I, p. 63, pi. 4, fig. 7.
1862. Microdeutopus anomalus. Bate, Cat. Brit. Mus., p. 164,

pi. 30, fig. 3.

Eyes small, round, compound, widely separated from each other
dorsally, and very close to margin of interantennal lobes. Head
produced to form short, rather acutely pointed rostrum.

First antennae about one half as long as body and with principal
flagellum longer than peduncle, made up of about 25 segments and
provided with accessory flagellum of 4 or 5 elongated joints ; second
joint of peduncle longest, third joint not more than one half as long
as first. Second antennae somewhat shorter than first, with very
short flagellum of about 8 joints furnished with setae ; glandular
cone long and slender; third joint less than twice as long as broad,
fourth and fifth joints very long and slender, subequal in length.

Mandibles with all parts well developed, palp 3-jointed, with third
joint longer than second and with proximal half broad and distal
half tapering to a point and provided on inner margin with setae ;
primary and secondary cutting edges denticulated. Lower lip with
outer plates having anterior margin entire and widely separated
from each other and with inner plates wide, mandibular processes
long and slender. First maxillae with inner plate small, triangular,
provided apically with single plumose spine, outer plate of moderate
size with oblique distal margin armed in usual w^a}- ; palp well devel-
oped, 2-jointed, second joint curved and moderatel}' long, with apex
rounded and furnished with group of setae. Second maxillae with
plates moderately broad and rounded apically, furnished with abun-
dant setae on distal end ; outer plate slightly longer and broader
than inner. Maxillipeds with large rectangular inner plates extend-
ing as far as apex of first joint of palp, and furnished with slender
spines apically ; outer plates broad, extending nearly as far as apex
of second joint of palp, outer margin and apex rounded, inner mar-
gin straight and furnished with short odontoid spines which become
longer at apex ; palp 4-jointed and slender, second joint longest,
terminal joint provided with claw^like spine.

The Amphipoda of Bcrnnida.

77

First gnathopods of female larger than second ; epimeron moderate,
third and fourth joints small ; wrist rather large, nearly oval in form,
about twice as long as broad, posterior margin more convex than
anterior and provided with slender setae ; hand subrectangular, more
than twice as long as broad and somewhat longer than wrist,
broader at distal end than at proximal, jialm slightly oblique, irreg-
ular in shape, with stout spine tooth sejiarating it from posterior
margin ; linger moderate in size, of usual form with concave margin
serrated. Second gnathopods with small rounded epimera as long as
high ; second joint long and slender, of uniform thickness ; third and

Fig. 29. Microdentopus aiiomalus (H. Ratlike).

fourth joints small ; wrist triangular, twice as long as l)road, provided
with numerous long setae on posterior margin ; hand subrectangular,
shorter than wrist, palm nearly transverse, posterior margin and palm
provided with abundant setae ; finger similar to that'of first gnathopod.
Marsupial plates oval, about two and a half times as long as broad.

Pereiopods of middle group short, with epimera of moderate size,
longer than high ; posterior pereiopods very long and slender with
second joints moderately expanded.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, first pair extending slightly beyond
other two ; rami styliform with stout spines at apex and along inner
margin, inner rami of first and second longer than outer, inner rami
of third uropods slightly shorter.

78 B. IV. Kuiikcl,

Telson oval, longer than broad, apex truncated, furnished with 2
symmetrical fascicles of moderately stout spines.

Length, 8 mm. A single female represented the species in the
collection.

The species has been previously reported from the Atlantic Coast
of Norway, the Shetlands, and the Black Sea.

Autonoe longipes (Liljeborg, 1852) Bruzelius, 1859.

1852. Gammarus longipes. Liljeborg, Ofversigtaf Kongl. Vetens.-
Akad. Forhandl. Stockholm, p. 10.

1859. Autonoe longipes. Bruzelius, Skandinavian Amphipoda
Gammar., Kongl. Sv. Vetens.-Akad. Handl., vol. 3, p. 28.

Eyes moderate, compound, reniform, approaching very close to-
gether on dorsal side of head.

First antennae rather long and slender with long flagellum com-
posed of more than a dozen rather elongated segments; peduncle
with first joint rather stout, nearly as long as head, second joint
slender and longer than first, third joint small, about ^3 as long as
second ; accessory flagellum made up of 5 joints. Second antennae
with peduncle much longer than that of first ; gland cone prominent,
third joint longer than broad, fourth and fifth joints subequal in
length ; flagellum about as long as last joint of peduncle, composed
of about 5 joints.

Mandibles with principal cutting edge divided into several teeth ;
secondary cutting edge also denticulate and rather narrow ; 4 spines
on spine row ; palp 3-jointed with third joint longest, about as long
as first and second together, inner margin straight, outer margin
convex, provided with plumose spines on both margins, second joint
about twice as long as first and somewhat stouter, with several long
setae on inner margin, first joint rather short, broader at distal end
than at proximal. Lower lip with outer plates rounded, anterior
margins entire, not very broad ; mandibular processes long and
pointed, diverging considerably ; inner plates broad, rounded. First
maxillae with inner plates rudimentary and l^earing single long plu-
mose spine apically ; outer plates broad, with distal margin oblique,
inclining toward inner margin, furnished with usual spine teeth ; palp
2-johited, first joint as broad as long and with single seta on outer distal
margin, second joint 4 times as long as broad with blunt apex pro-
vided with a number of slender teeth and setae. Second maxillae
with oval plates which are rather broad ; outer plates provided
with many long setae distally ; inner plates smaller than outer with

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

79

plumose spines on inner margin and setae on distal margin and in a
row extending obliquely from middle of distal margin to inner margin
proximally. Maxillipeds with inner plates short and provided with
plumose spines on transverse distal and inner margins ; outer plates
extending as far as second joint of palp, having outer margin convex
and unarmed and inner margin, which is straight, provided with
broad toothhke spines which become more slender distally and
become plumose spines around distal margin ; palps long, 4-jointed,
of which the first joint is longer than broad, the second joint 3 times
as long as broad with a number of long setae on inner margin ;

Fig. 30. Autotioe longipes Bruzelius.

third joint about -/a as long as second, being broader at di.stal
end and provided with many long setae ; fourth joint as long as
third and unguiform.

In male, first gnathopods with small subrectangular epimeron;
second joint very stout, ^/y as broad as long, widest in middle ; third
joint very short with several setae on postero-distal angle; fourth joint
longer than third and more slender with a few setae on posterior
margin ; wrist triangular, broader than long, having posterior margin
provided with long setae ; hand large, oval, with anterior margin
rather convex and much longer than posterior which bears several
fascicles of long setae, palm oblicjue, not very long, provided with

80 B. W. Kiinkel,

deep notch near prehensile angle and provided with numerous setae,
apex of hand with fascicle of long setae ; linger rather large, of
usual form with concave margin provided with numerous cilia.

Second gnathopods much smaller than first, with rhomboidal
epimeron about as long as high ; second joint moderate in width,
fairly long, anterior margin curved, posterior margin rather strongly
convex ; third and fourth joints as in first gnathopods but third
rather more slender ; wrist triangular, rather large, longer and broader
than hand, provided with very short setae on anterior margin and
with several fascicles of setae on posterior margin ; hand subrect-
angular, provided with setae on anterior and posterior margins, palm
moderate, with long prehensile spine and fascicle of setae ; finger
very large with concave margin serrated.

In female, first gnathopods with second joint much more slender
than in male ; third and fourth joints provided with many more
setae which are also longer than in male ; wrist longer than in male,
and hand more slender, being subrectangular, with ]3alm somewhat
oblique and sinuous, provided with prehensile spine and setae of
various lengths, posterior margin with many long setae and anterior
submargin with several fascicles of slender setae ; finger slender,
with concave margin serrated.

Second gnathopods smaller than first, with second joint more
slender and wrist broader than in male ; hand subrectangular, not
unlike that of male but setae rather longer.

E])imera moderately low, l^eing longer than high in each case,
diminishing slightl}' in height posteriorly, those of fourth and fifth
pereiopods being not more than half as high as long and suboval
in form ; fourth not emarginate posteriorly ; third, fourth and fifth
pereiopods with second joints normally expanded ; last pereiopods
longest, with fourth, fifth and sixth joints especially long and slender ;
first and second pereiopods with spinning glands.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair longest with peduncle some-
what longer than rami which are equal in length and provided with
stout spines ; second pair extending posteriori}^ as far as first ; ter-
minal pair very short, not extending as far as preceding, rami
styliform.

Telson slightly broader than long, with distal margin slightly
concave, postero-lateral angle provided with a spine and several
longer setae.

Length 5.5 mm.

This species has been previously reported from Naples, the coast
of Scandinavia, Great Britain, and Port Jackson, Australia.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

81

Eurystheus lina sp. no v.

Eyes compound, suboval, situated well on lateral aspect of head
on prominent interantennal lobes and widely separated from each
other.

Antennae subequal ; first antennae rather stout with peduncle
somewhat longer than fiagellum ; first joint of peduncle cylindrical

Fig. 31. Enrysthens lina sp. nov.

and about 3 times as long as broad, second joint nearl}- twice as
long as first and more slender, third joint somewhat shorter than
second, all joints provided with abundant setae, especially on lower
margin ; principal fiagellum made up of about 1 1 joints, also pro-
vided with abundant setae ; accessory fiagellum made up of 4 or
5 joints. Second antennae with gland cone rather prominent and
moderately long ; third joint hardly twice as long as wide and with
Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 6 May, 1910.

82 B. W. Knukel,

distal end somewhat wider than proximal and provided with rather
long setae on ventral margin ; fourth joint rather long and slender,
cylindrical ; fifth joint shorter than fourth ; flagellum about as long
as fourth joint of peduncle, made up of 4 or 5 short, stout segments
which are provided with setae.

Mandibles triangular, with principal and secondary cutting edges
denticulated, with 9 or 10 spines on spine row and with prominent
molar tubercle ; palp 3-jointed, first joint short and cup-shaped with
proximal end very narrow, second joint about 3 times as long as
broad, slightly broader distally and with rather long setae on inner
margin, third joint slightly shorter than second with rounded apex
which is provided with abundant setae. Lower lip with outer plates
having anterior margin entire. First maxillae having inner plate tri-
angular and with numerous setae on inner margin ; outer plate of
usual form with stout spines on oblique apex ; palp 2-jointed, of
which the first is about as long as wide and the second is some-
what curved and club-shaped with setae on rounded apex. Second
maxillae of usual form with plates rounded distall}'. Maxillipeds
with plates well developed and with 4-jointed palp ; inner plates
rectangular with distal margin provided with abundant setae and
a few spines ; outer plates extending nearly as far as distal end of
second joint of palp, with inner margin straight and armed with
broad toothlike spines and abundant setae, outer and distal margins
convex, distal margin with long setae ; palp with first joint short,
hardly as long as broad, second joint cylindrical, 3 times as long
as broad and with long and abundant setae on inner margin, third joint
2/3 as long as second with rounded apex having abundant setae, fourth
joint less than ^/2 as long as third with rounded apex as in third joint.

In male, first gnathopods with moderate epimera having anterior
ventral angle only slightly produced and with ver}' short setae on
ventral margin ; second joint moderate in size, third joint rather
shorter than broad; fourth joint broader toward distal end than
proximal with posterior margin much longer than anterior and with
4 or 5 fascicles of setae ; wrist as long as second joint, subtriangular
with distal margin somewhat oblique, posterior margin with 5 or
6 fascicles of setae and with similar number of fascicles along axis
of joint; hand suboval, slightly broader than wrist, more than ^j^
as broad as long, anterior and posterior margins slightly convex,
posterior margin passing by even curve into palm which is slightly
convex and provided with setae of various lengths, prehensile angle
with spine, posterior and anterior margins with numerous fascicles-
of setae ; finger long and moderately slender, serrated.

Tlic ^{lupliipoda of Bcriiiuda. 83

Second gnathopods very much larger in every way than first,
epimeron small, rounded and not higher than long; second joint
large and stout with fascicles of setae on both anterior and posterior
margins ; fourth joint hardly longer than third which is provided
with rounded lobe on anterior distal apex ; wrist short and triangular,
articulating with fourth joint by most of posterior margin, distal
l)art of margin in form of lobe extending over distal end of fourth
joint and provided with numerous setae; hand very large, subrec-
tangular, twice as long as broad with posterior margin provided
with numerous setae, posterior margin prolonged distally so that
prehensile angle is acute and palm is more or less concave ; finger
very stout, tapering and rounded apically, concave margin provided
with a triangular process near base.

Epimera rather low, first 2 pereiopods with spinning glands, last
pereiopod slightly longer than preceding.

Uropods 3 pairs, biramous ; posterior pair extending- shghtly beyond
second which in turn extend slightly beyond first ; inner rami slightly
longer than outer, styliform.

Telson subrectangular, stout, bilobed, with lobes well separated
by triangular emargination and armed apically with 2 or 3 stout
spines.

Length 6 mm.

The species was represented by 2 specimens which were collected
in 1903.

Podoceropsis sophia Boeck, 1861.

1861. Boeck, Forh. Skand. Naturf, vol. 8, p. 666.

Eyes compound, reniform, situated very close to front margin of
head.

First antennae slightly longer than second, with first 2 joints of
peduncle rather stout, cylindrical and equal in length, last joint 2/3
as long as first; principal flagellum made up of 5 elongated joints,
about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle ; accessory flagellum short,
consisting of 2 unequal joints, the first of which is much longer
than the second. Second antennae with second joint rather short
but with gland cone rather long and slender ; third joint more than
twice as long as broad, slightly thicker distally than proximally ;
fourth and fifth joints subequal, about as long as first joint of first
antennae ; flagellum made up of 6 joints, somewhat shorter than that
of first antennae.

Mandibles with 8-jointed jialp and denticulated cutting edge ; first
joint short ; second and third subequal in length, second C3iindrical ;

84

B. IV. KxinkeL

third broader at distal end which is rounded and provided with
numerous long setae, some of which are plumose ; secondary cutting
edge long ; molar tubercle prominent. Lower lip with outer plates
having anterior margin entire. First maxillae with small triangular
inner plate and 2-jointed palp, having terminal joint rounded api-
cally and provided with a few setae ; outer plate with distal margin
obliquely truncate and provided with toothed and branching spines.
Second maxillae with inner ]:)late rounded apically with setae on
inner margin ; outer plate somewhat longer than inner one and
provided with long setae apically. Maxillipeds with plates well
developed and 4-jointed palp ; inner plate rather slender, triangular,
provided with fairly stout spines apically ; outer plate with rounded
apex, furnished with odontoid spines and setae on inner margin
and apex; last joint of palp cylindrical, furnished with single stout
spine apicall}^

Fig. 32. Poduceroims SDjthia Boeck.

In male, tirst gnathopods with trapezoidal epimeron projecting
well forward, ventral margin provided with short setae ; second
joint very stout and of moderate length, provided with long setae
at distal end of posterior margin; third joint short; fourth some-
what longer than broad and broader at distal end, articulating with
wrist by anterior margin ; ])osterior margin and apex provided with
long setae ; wrist triangular, somewhat longer than broad, with setae
on posterior and distal margins; hand oval, somewhat longer than
wrist and slightly broader, posterior margin passing by even
cur\e into palm which is convex and provided with submarginal
setae and a rather large prehensile spine ; hand also furnished with
fascicles of setae on anterior margin and apex ; linger of usual form,
rather long and bearing a single cilium near apex on inner concave
margin.

Second gnathopods with subrectangular epimeron much higher
than long with ventral margin rounded; second joint stout and

The Ampkipoda of Bermuda. 85

moderately long, anterior margin straight and provided with numerous
ver}' long setae ; third joint very short ; fourth joint small, rectan-
gular, about twice as long as broad with group of setae at apex,
articulating with wrist by entire anterior margin ; wrist small and
cup-shaped, broader than long, with a fascicle of setae on very short
free portion of posterior margin ; hand large, much larger than that
of first, subrectangular, palm rather irregular, convex near articulation
of finger, bearing decided cavity with broad bottom in region of
prehensile spine, posterior margin prolonged to form triangular
process behind which the apex of the finger fits, posterior and an-
terior margins provided with fascicles of setae, palm provided with
a few setae of various lengths ; finger rather stout, of usual form.

In female, gnathopods smaller than in male ; first gnathopods
with relatively longer and more slender finger; second gnathopods
with palm regularly convex and lacking prolongation of posterior
margin of hand to form triangular process.

Pereiopods of usual form, provided with pointed dactyls, first
2 pairs with spinning glands.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; second pair projecting beyond first
and third ; terminal uropods having rami nearly as long as ped-
uncle and provided with several stout spines apically.

Telson thick, short, entire.

The species was "represented in the collection by a male and a
female 2.5 mm. in length, collected by W. G. VanName, 1901. It
has been recorded from the Arctic Ocean, Scandinavia, the British
coast, and Shetland Isles (70—90 fathoms).

Isaea longipalpus sp. nov.

Eyes small, compound, circular.

First antennae long and slender, more than ^\i as long as body,
with elongated flagellum ; first joint of peduncle stout and armed
with stout setae ; second joint slender, slightly longer than first ;
third joint short and narrow, about ^/s as long as second ; principal
flagellum considerably longer than peduncle, composed of numerous
elongated joints ; accessory flagellum long, made up of at least
4 segments. Second antennae shorter than first ; gland cone rather
prominent but not long ; third joint of peduncle slightly longer than
broad'; fourth and fifth joints long and subequal in length ; flagellum
about as long as last joint of peduncle, composed of about 6 joints.

Mandibles strong, triangular, with principal cutting edge denticu-
lated and all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed, the first of which
is rather long, only half as broad as long, second joint stouter than

86

B. IV. Kitnkel,

tirst and about 3 times as lon<i;- as Inroad, third joint longest, of
tai:)ering form with setae on inner margin and plumose spines on
terminal portion of outer margin ; secondary cutting edge moderateh'
developed; molar tubercle large and prominent. First maxillae with
inner plate rudimentary, bearing a single plumose spine apically ;
outer plate moderately large, with branching toothlike spines on
distal margin; palp 2-jointed, with first joint small, second curved,
elongated, larger at distal end, which is rounded, than at proximal
end and armed with toothlike spines. Second maxillae of moderate
size, plates rounded apically and provided with many setae. Maxilli-
peds with plates well developed and with palp 4-jointed ; inner

Fig. 33. Ii-aea lovgipalpus sp. uov.

plates moderately large, rectangular, with 3 spine teeth and plumose
spines on terminal margin, inner margin with plumose spines ; outer
plates large, oval, with dagger-shaped spines on distal portion of
inner margin and apex ; palp rather slender with numerous setae
on inner margin of joints ; second joint cylindrical, third with en-
larged, rounded apex bearing setae, fourth conical and bearing
a terminal spine.

First gnathopods larger than second; epimeron irregularly rec-
tangular; second joint rather long and stout, slightly more than
twice as long as broad : third joint short ; fourth more or less oval
with setae on posterior margin ; wrist articulating with anterior
margin of preceding joint, triangular, somewhat longer than broad
with convex posterior margin provided with long setae ; hand sub-

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 87

rectangular, as broad as wrist and about 1^/2 times as long, slightly
broader distally than proximally, palm irregularly incised, slightly
oblique with numerous setae and large prehensile spine, posterior
margin with several fascicles of setae ; linger of usual form with
concave margin serrate, somewhat longer than palm.

Second gnathopods with rather small subrectangular epimeron
which is longer than high and with rounded angles ; second joint
moderate ; third joint short ; fourth oblong with wrist articulating
by whole anterior margin, provided with setae on distal portion of
posterior margin and apex ; wrist triangular, twice as long as wide
and as wide as hand, with many setae on posterior margin ; hand
subrectangular, about as long as wrist with palm nearly transverse
and provided with numerous submarginal setae and a prehensile spine,
posterior margin with numerous setae ; finger of usual form, fairly
stout, serrated on concave margin.

Epimera rather low ; gills oval and broad. In the single specimen
at hand all the pereiopods were missing.

Uro])ods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami styliform ; first and second pro-
jecting slightly beyond terminal j^air ; all provided apicall}' with
groups of several stout spines.

Telson thick, entire, about as broad as long, with 2 setae at
each distal angle.

Dorsally and laterally the 5 anterior thoracic segments and the
head are marked with irregular masses of pigment in the form of
a fine network which, in the alcoholic specimen, is brownish black.

Length 2.5 mm.

The single specimen in the collection was found in Baile}' Bay
in coralline at low water in 1898.

Amphithoe longimana Smith, 1874.

1874. Smith, Rep. U. S. Fish. Com., vol. 1, p. 563.

Eyes small, compound, somewhat oval, made up of many ocelli
crowded together.

First antennae longer than second, and nearly as long as body,
with no accessory flagellum ; first joint of peduncle stout, cyHndrical,
about 5 times as long as broad, provided with a few setae ; second
joint somewhat longer than first and more slender ; third joint about
^/'2 as long as first and much thinner, bearing a few setae on distal
end; flagellum slender, composed of about 32 segments each with
short setae on apical margin. Second antennae long and slender;
gland cone small and slender ; third joint of peduncle nearly twice
as long as wide and with a few setae at apex ; fourth and fifth joints

88 B. IV. Kunkel,

subequal and slightly longer than second joint of first antennae ;
flagelhim about as long as peduncle and made up of 12 to 15 seg-
ments.

Mandibles with principal cutting edge divided into 7 teeth dimin-
ishing regularly in size from apical one which is largest ; secondary

Fig. 34. Amphithoe longimana Smitli.

cutting edge small and likewise denticulated ; spine row with 5
plumose spines ; molar tubercle large ; palp 3-jointed with first joint
short and not much longer than wide, second joint very slightly
longer than third tmd jjrovided with setae on inner margin, third
joint rounded apicall}^ where joint is thicker than at base, provided
with many long setae on apex and distal half of inner margin.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 89

Lower lip with large outer plates incised at apex ; mandibular pro-
cesses large and diverging; inner plates large and oval. First
maxillae with small triangular inner plates armed with short setae
on inner margin ; outer plates large, curved, with distal margin ob-
lique and provided with 8 or 9 branching toothlike spines ; palp
2-jointed, lirst joint l^/g times as long as broad, second joint thicker
than proximal and about 4 times as long as broad, rounded at apex
which is provided with slender conical spines. Second maxillae
with outer plates much broader at distal end than at proximal;
inner plate not quite as long as outer, triangular. Maxillipeds with
plates well developed ; inner plates extending as far as tirst joint
of palp with apex rounded and provided at inner distal angle with
2 stout teeth, external to which are 8 plumose spines ; outer plates
broad and large, extending as far as second joint of palp, provided
on inner margin with teeth which become longer toward apex and
pass over into long setae extending around apex to outer side ;
palp 4-jointed, tirst joint short, second nearly twice as long as wide
with many setae on inner margin ; third joint equal to lirst in length,
rounded apically where it is broader than at base, provided with
a fascicle of setae on outer distal angle and many setae on inner
margin ; fourth joint about -/s length of third, slender and curved,
bearing a stout spine apically which renders whole segment as long
as third.

hi female, tirst gnathopods with epimeron produced anteriorly to
acute angle, ventral margin convex and provided with short setae
on anterior portion; second joint moderately slender, broader at
distal end which bears on anterior margin a semicircular lobe
with a short seta ; third joint broader than long ; fourth joint rather
slender, with posterior margin long and convex, bearing several
fascicles of setae, anterior margin short, distal end broader than
base and cup-shaped; wrist as long as third and fourth joints to-
gether, triangular, broader than hand, posterior margin with many
long setae, anterior margin with 2 toothlike spines on proximal
half, distal margin slightly concave ; hand subrectangular, twice as
long as broad, somewhat longer than wrist, anterior and posterior
submargins with numerous fascicles of setae, palm oblique and con-
vex, provided with many setae and a stout prehensile spine ; finger
rather long and stout with a few serrations distally on concave
margin.

Second gnathopods with oval epimeron having ventral margin
armed with setae ; second joint with a number of short setae at proxim-
al end of anterior margin ; third joint much as in first gnathopod

90 B. IF. Kinike/,

but with group of setae at posterior distal corner; fourth joint
scarcely longer than third, oblong, ^/s as broad as long, armed with
several fascicles of setae on anterior margin ; wrist triangular, not
as long as wrist of first gnathopod, provided with numerous setae
on distal margin ; hand much like that of first gnathopod but
broader and shorter, palm less oblique and posterior margin more
convex ; finger short and stout with concave margin serrate.

First and second pereiopods with spinning glands ; epimera moder-
ate, gradually increasing in size toward posterior end, wiih ventral
margins in each case rounded and armed with very short setae.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; second pair extending beyond first
and third ; first pair with outer margin of peduncle armed with 3
conical toothlike spines, inner ramus more than half as long as ped-
uncle and slightly longer and more slender than outer ramus ; rami
provided with toothlike spines on margins and apically ; second pair
like first but stoviter and with no spines on peduncle ; third pair
with peduncle extending beyond that of second, armed with several
toothlike spines on distal margin; rami very short, about half as
long as peduncle and terminating in 2 stout hooked spines and armed
wath several long setae.

Telson broader than long, semicircular, with apex slightly truncate
and with lateral margins slightly produced to form triangular pro-
cesses which are each armed with a seta, apex also provided with 4
long setae and lateral margins with 4 shorter ones.

Length 12 mm.

The species was represented b}- a number of specimens. It
occurs abundantly on the New England coast.

Amphithoe rubricata (Montagu, 1808) Leach, 1813.

1808. Cancer rubricatus. Montagu, Trans. Linn. Soc. London,

vol. 9, p. 99; pi. 5, fig. 1.

1813—14. Amphithoe rubricata. Leach, Edinb. Encycl., vol. 7,

p. 403.

Eyes moderately large, round, compound.

First antennae longer than second. First joint of peduncle fairly
stout and shorter than second ; third joint short and slender, hardly
to be distinguished from proximal joints of flagellum, about '/s as
long as second joint; flagellum composed of many segments, long
and slender and less than twice as long as peduncle. Second an-
tennae with peduncle longer than that of first ; fourth and fifth joints
subecjual in length ; third joint rather broad and shorter than broad ;
flagellum composed of man\- segments.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

91

In female, first gnathopods with trapezoidal epimeron projecting
anteriorl}- by acutel}' rounded angle, ventral margin slightl}- rounded
and armed with numerous short setae ; second joint robust, extend-
ing well be3'ond epimeron, anterior margin straight with small flat
rounded lobe at distal end ; third and fourth joints short, fourth
joint triangular, widened distally, provided with setae at apex and
on posterior margin ; wrist triangular armed with a few rather long
stout setae on rounded posterior margin which forms a kind of lobe
so that the wrist is broader than the hand, wrist provided with
several fascicles of setae on surface ; hand rather long, about ^/s
longer than wrist, subrectangular with anterior and posterior margins
nearly parallel, with posterior margin and palm provided with many
setae of different lengths, palm oblique and passing evenly into

Fig. 35. Amphithoe ruhricata (Montagu).

posterior margin, prehensile angle with a large submarginal spine ;
finger very long and slender with inner concave margin serrate.

Second gnathopods with rectangular epimeron nearly as long as
high, convex on ventral margin which is armed with many short
setae ; second joint similar to that of first gnathopod ; third joint
short ; fourth joint twice as long as broad with wrist attached to
anterior margin, provided with setae apically and on posterior mar-
gin ; wrist more or less triangular, posterior margin strongly convex
forming a lobe which makes the wrist wider than the hand ; haiid
subrectangular, much shorter and stouter than that of first gnathopod,
palm oblique and forming with posterior margin a small process
which bears a submarginal prehensile spine, anterior margin pro-
vided with 4 fascicles of slender setae, posterior margin and palm

92 B. IV. Kunkel,

with many setae ; finger curved, moderately slender, with concave
margin serrated.

In male, first gnathopods with epimeron prolonged anteriorly with
antero-ventral angle rounded ; second joint fairly stout ; fourth joint
short with fascicle of setae on acute postero-ventral angle, wrist
nearly as long as hand with anterior and posterior margins parallel,
the latter of which is provided with numerous fascicles of setae ;
hand long and slender, almost rectangular, about twice as long as
broad and not broader than wrist, anterior margin slightly convex,
posterior margin with many setae, palm very short and irregular;
finger long and of usual form with concave margin provided with
coarse serrations.

Second gnathopods with epimeron slightly higher than long and
rounded with moderate notch in ventral margin dividing it into a
larger anterior and smaller posterior lobe ; second, third, and fourth
joints essentially as in first gnathopod ; wrist triangular, about as
broad as long with postero-ventral angle rounded and provided
with a tuft of setae ; hand strong, subrectangular, with anterior
margin slightly convex and provided with numerous fascicles of
setae, posterior margin also with numerous fascicles of setae, palm
oblique and convex, prehensile angle very prominent and acute ;
finger stout and curved with a few serrations on concave margin
fitting behind prehensile angle.

Epimera of second gnathopod and first and second pereiopods
provided with small notch in ventral margin, dividing epimeron
into 2 rounded lobes.

Telson triangular, not as long as wide, apex more or less truncated,
provided with 2 fascicles of setae along lateral margins.

One of the specimens, a male, was dredged in 3 fathoms in Castle
Harbor, in dead coral, April 24, 1901. The species has been pre-
viously reported from the North Atlantic and adjoing seas of Europe
between tide marks and at small depths.

Amphithoe pollex sp. nov.

Eyes compound, round, moderate in size.

First antennae with second joint of peduncle slightly longer than
first which is moderately stout. Rest of antennae wanting in speci-
mens at hand. Second antennae with gland cone absent, third joint
of peduncle broader than long; fourth and fifth joints subequal in
length but fifth rather more slender than fourth ; flagelkim n)ade
up of about 10 joints, equal in length to last 2 joints of peduncle
together.

TJie Ampliipoda of Bernwda.

93

First gnathopods with rhomboidal epimeron, rather longer than
high and provided with short setae on ventral margin ; second joint
fairly stout with a semicircular process at antero-distal angle ; third
and fourth joints short, fourth twice as long as broad with setae
on apex ; wrist triangular, scarcely as broad as long, with short pos-
terior margin rounded and provided with a few long setae ; hand
oval, rather large, nearly twice as long as wrist and more than twice
as long as broad, widest portion very near proximal end, posterior
margin and palm forming an even curve, prehensile angle with a stout

Fig. 36. Amphithoe jwUex sp. uov.

spine, palm very oblique and provided with numerous setae ; finger
rather large and stout with concave margin bearing several serrations.
Second gnathopods with rounded epimeron and very stout se-
cond joint ; fourth joint rectangular, about twice as long as broad ;
wrist very short, triangular, considerably broader than long,
with free posterior margin very short and strongly convex and
bearing a fascicle of long setae ; hand exceedingly large, broader
at distal end than at proximal and somewhat longer than broad at
widest part, posterior margin produced to form a long, slightly
curved, thumblike process ; palm very oblique and shorter than

94 B. W. Kiiukel,

thumblike process just described, provided with a few long setae near
apex, distal margin of hand transverse and rather long ; finger stout,
with broad base and with concave margin provided with a low
broad triangular process.

Epimera rather low, with ventral margins not strongly convex ;
pereiopods fairly stout, first and second provided with spinning
glands, fourth and fifth longer than others.

Uropods and telson as in A. longimana.

The species was represented in the collection by 2 male speci-
mens, the larger one of which measured 5.5 mm. in length.

Grubia crassicornis (A. Costa, 1853) Delia Valle, 1893.

1853. Amphithoe crassicornis. A. Costa, Rendic. Soc. Reale
Borbon., Accad. Sci. Napoli, vol. 1, p. 306, pi. 3, fig. 1 a-d.

1898. Grubia crassicornis. Delia Valle, Fauna und Flora des
Golfes von Neapel, vol. 20, p. 464, pi. 2, fig. 12; pi. 13, fig. 18-29.

Eyes small, nearly circular, comjDound and made up of very many
ocelli which are yellowish brown in the alcoholic specimens at
hand.

First antennae longer than second, with peduncle about ^/a length
of flagellum; first johit rather stout and about as long as second;
third about ^'3 as long as second ; flagellum made up of large
number of segments which are furnished with setules distally ; ac-
cessory flagellum composed of single segment which is about V2
as long as first joint of principal flagellum. Second antennae with
gland cone prominent and slender; third joint of peduncle rather
long and about as long as fifth which is as long as fourth joint ;
flagellum made up of many joints, about as long as peduncle.

Mandibles strong, well developed ; palp 3-jointed, slender, first
joint ' '2 as long as second, third joint shorter than second and stouter,
with apex rounded and provided with numerous long setae ; prin-
cipal cutting edge long with numerous triangular teeth ; secondary
cutting edge also with numerous teeth ; spine row with 6 spines ;
molar tubercle very large and prominent, provided with 6 or 7 fla-
gella. Lower lip with inner plates large, rounded, with many short
liairs on anterior margin ; outer plates large, with anterior margin
incised with deep, broad notch ; mandibular processes long, broad,
tapering, and widely divergent. First maxillae with inner plate small,
triangular, provided with a single seta on inner margin ; outer plate
broad, curved, apical margin obliquely truncated and provided with
numerous pectinate toothlike spines ; palp 2-jointed and slender, first

The Amphipoda of Bermuda.

95

joint slightly longer than broad, second joint long, tapering, provided
with many long setae on distal half of inner margin and apex.
Second maxillae with inner plate narrower than outer and tapering
slightly, with apex rounded and provided with plumose spines on
distal third of inner margin and apex ; outer plate slightly longer
than inner plate with outer margin rounded, inner margin straight,
slightly broader toward distal end than at base and provided with
setae. Maxillipeds with inner plates moderately long, provided with
many setae distally and on inner margin, apex rounded ; outer plate
large, inner margin straight, outer strongly convex, provided with
many long setae on apex and numerous very short ones on inner

Fig. 37. Grubia crassicornis (A. Costa).

margin ; palp 4-jointed of which the tirst joint reaches farther than
the inner plate and the second about as far as outer plate and
is provided with plumose spines on inner margin, third joint nearly
as long as second, more or less oval in form, with many setae on
inner margin and a fascicle on outer margin near distal end and a
second fascicle at apex, fourth joint conical and provided with a
nail apically which equals the joint itself in length.

In female lirst gnathopods with epimeron about as long as high,
with ventral margin much longer than dorsal, convex and furnished
with a few very short setae; second joint moderately stout, broader
at distal end than at proximal, furnished with 2 long setae on po •.-

96 B. JV. Kimkrl,

terior marj2:in, distal anterior corner prolonged into rounded process
which bears a single seta; third joint slightly longer than broad,
provided with several setae distally ; fourth joint broader distall}-
and slightly longer than third and provided with a few setae on
distal margin ; fifth joint ^ji as long as hand, provided with a single
seta on middle of posterior margin and another at distal end, and
many on anterior margin ; hand oval, provided with many setae on
anterior margin and several distally and on posterior margin, palm
oblique, passing by smooth curve into posterior margin of hand;
prehensile spine present, palm provided at articulation of finger
with curved spine somewhat smaller than prehensile spine ; finger
curved and slender, about V2 as long as hand, inner concave margin
notched.

Second gnathopods with hand shorter than that of first but about
as stout; epimeron subrectangular, slightly higher than long, pro-
vided with short setae on convex ventral margin ; second and third
joints as in first gnathopod; fourth joint longer than broad, with
a fascicle of setae terminally, articulating by entire anterior margin
with wrist which is subtriangular and nearly as broad as long ; pos-
terior margin very strongly convex and provided with several groups
of setae toward apex and proximal to these with 5 transverse rows
of very short cilia ; hand oval, provided with several setae on an-
terior margin and more closely set setae on posterior, very similar
to hand of first gnathopod, palm provided with submarginal setae
of various lengths ; finger ver}^ slender, of usual form.

Pereiopods of anterior group provided with spinning glands; epi-
mera moderate with ventral margins rounded and bearing a few short
setae.

Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous; first with long peduncle and with
inner ramus, which is the longer, about as long as peduncle, rami
terminated b}' 3 short, stout spines and a single larger one ; second
uropods extending nearly as far as first, with rami similar to those
of first but stouter; third uropods very stout, and extending as far
as preceding ones ; subequal rami, the inner one of which is provided
with 2 curved spines apically and the outer one with a fascicle of setae,
rami about ^/s as long as peduncle which is moderate in size and
provided distally with several short stout spines.

Telson not as long as wide, triangular or semicircular in shape,
entire.

Length about 6 mm.

The species is rather common at Naples and has also l^een re-
corded from the Black Sea.

The Amphipoda of Bernmda.

97

Grubia coei sp. nov.

Eyes compound, oval, situated very well forward on interantennal
lobes.

First antennae longer than second and nearly ^/s as long as body ;
peduncle more than ^/2 as long as principal flagellum, first joint
stout, cylindrical, nearly as long as head, second nearl}^ as long as
first but much more slender; third joint very short, about as long
as first joint of flagellum ; accessory flagellum one-jointed, not as
long as first joint of principal flagellum which is slender and made
up of a large number of segments. Second antennae with gland

Fig'. 38. Grubia coei sp. nov.

cone .small ; third joint of j^eduncle longer than broad, extending
^/4 as far as first joint of first antennae ; fourth and fifth joints long,
subequal, provided with dense plumose spines ; flagellum made up
of many joints, scarcely as long as peduncle.

Mandibles with all parts well developed ; principal cutting edge
denticulated, also secondary cutting edge which is long ; spine row
with 8 spines ; molar tubercle large and prominent ; pa.\p .8-jointed
having the second joint longer than third, which is stouter than
second and with rounded apex provided with numerous setae.
Lower lip with outer plates large, having anterior margin deeply
incised and mandibular processes prominent : inner plates large and

Trans. Conn. Acad.. Vol. XVI. 7 May, 1910.

98 B. IV. Kunkcl,

oval. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, of which the terminal joint
is club-shaped with sharp spines on apical margin ; outer plate rather
large with obliquely truncate apical margin provided with branched
spines ; inner plate very small, triangular, provided with setae on
inner margin. Second maxillae with outer plate longer than inner
and much broader apically than proximally, provided with setae
apically ; inner plate tapering, with rounded apex, which, with inner
margin, is provided with plumose spines. Maxillipeds with plates
w^ell developed and with 4-jointed palp ; inner plate extending about
as far as apex of tirst joint of palp, rounded and provided with
plumose spines and with apical odontoid spine ; outer plate large,
oval, extending beyond apex of second joint of palp ; inner margin
armed with odontoid spines which increase in length and become
slender distally ; palp with first joint triangular, short, second joint
cylindrical with spines near distal end of inner margin, third joint
short, broader distally, with setae on distal half of inner margin and
apex, fourth joint curved, conical, armed with clawlike spine apic-
ally and several setae on inner margin.

In male, first gnathopods with triangular epimeron bearing setae
on ventral margin, about as high as greatest length ; second joint
rather long and slender with small rounded process at distal end
of anterior margin ; third joint short, more or less triangular ; fourth
joint moderately long, with long, rather slender process at distal
end of posterior margin, so that posterior margin, which is provided
with setae, is much longer than anterior, distal margin oblique, ar-
ticulation with wrist rather short ; wrist very long, as long as second
joint and much stouter, articulating with fourth joint liy proximal
part of posterior margin, distal portions of posterior and anterior
margins parallel, distal margin transverse, margins provided with
setae ; hand oval, stout, palm very oblique, slightly convex, posterior
margin very convex, separated from palm by prehensile spine, an-
terior margin moderately convex, hand broader than wrist but
shorter, slender setae on palm, posterior and anterior margins ;
finger moderately long, with serrated concave margin.

Second gnathopods with epimeron rectangular, slightly higher
than long with ventral margin provided with long setae and slightly
indented by broad sinus ; second joint rather long with anterior
margin provided with setae ; third joint of usual form, about as long
as broad ; fourth joint rectangular, with posterior margin provided
with setae near distal end and longer than anterior, apex somewhat
oblique ; wrist triangular, articulating with almost entire anterior
margin of fourth segment, posterior margin provided with short

The Aniphipoda of Bcnuitda. 99

setae and strongly convex to form rounded lol^e which extends as
far as posterior margin of fourth joint, anterior margin slightly
convex and provided with large number of very long plumose
spines; hand oval, not much longer than broad, wider than wrist,
anterior margin with very large number of long plumose spines,
posterior margin with several fascicles of setae, both margins rather
convex, palm oblique, marked off from posterior margin by slight
triangular process, provided with setae of various lengths; finger
short and stout.

In female first gnathopods with epimeron having anterior ventral
corner rounded and projecting considerably so that ventral margin
is nearly twice as long as dorsal, provided with long setae ; second
joint moderatel}^ long and slender, with setae on posterior margin
and rounded lobe at distal end of anterior margin ; third joint longer
than broad ; fourth joint broader distally than proximally, with pos-
terior margin much longer than anterior and provided with nu-
merous setae ; wrist somewhat triangular, twice as long as broad,
articulating with oblique distal margin of fourth, anterior margin
much longer than posterior so that distal margin is transverse, pos-
terior margin provided with numerous long setae ; hand scarcely as
long as wrist and about as broad, oval, posterior margin short, palm
very oblique, separated from posterior margin by prehensile spine,
anterior and posterior margins provided with numerous fascicles of
setae, palm provided with numerous submarginal setae of various
lengths; finger moderately strong wnth inner margin only slightly
concave and serrated.

Second gnathopods with rectangular epimeron higher than long,
with rounded ventral margin provided with long setae ; second joint
similar to that of first gnathopod ; third short ; fourth rectangular
twice as long as wide, with posterior margin longer than anterior
and provided with several fascicles of setae ; wrist triangular, broader
than long and with posterior margin produced to form rounded lobe
which is densely covered with setae ; hand longer than broad with
distal end broader than proximal, palm slightly oblique, jjrovided
with numerous submarginal setae, separated from posterior margin
by slight process and prehensile spine, anterior and posterior mar-
gins provided with numerous fascicles of setae ; finger of usual form
and size. In both sexes second gnathopods larger than first.

Epimera increasing slightly in height to fifth, all provided with
setae on ventral rounded margins.

Uropods biramous ; first and second pairs Avith inner ramus slightly
longer than outer, second pair projecting hardly as far as first ; rami

100 B. IV. Kunkel,

provided with short setae on inner margins and apex ; third uropods
with short conical rami armed apically with hook-Uke spines, ex-
tending beyond other uropods.

Telson small, entire, thick, subtriangular, about as long as broad.

In the alcoholic specimens represented in the collection by 2
males and 2 females, the epimera, terga, and proximal joints of the
antennae and uropods were marked with irregular spots of a dark
flesh color. Length of males, 10 mm.; of females, 18 mm.

Ericthonius braziliensis (Dana, 1853) Stebbing, 1906.

1853. J. D. Dana, Pyctilns braziliensis. U. S. Explor. Exped.,

vol. 13 II, p. 976; pi. 67, fig 5.

1906. Stebbing, Ericthonius braziliensis. Das Tierreich, Lief 21,

p. 671.

Eyes compound, with ocelli very closely crowded together, situated
on basal portion of very prominent interantennal lobes.

Antennae subequal and more than half as long as body.

Mandibles with all parts well developed ; palp stout, 3-jointed ;
first joint broader than long, narrower at base than apically ; second
joint longer and stouter than first, armed with long slender
setae on inner margin ; third joint nearly 8 times as long as broad,
with rounded apex, armed with setae along inner margin, more
numerous on distal half and apex, outer margin with fascicles of
setae at middle ; cutting edge short, divided into 4 or 5 teeth, of
which the second is the largest; secondary cutting plate expanded
distally and cutting edge ver}^ oblique, composed of 4 rather sharply
pointed teeth, diminishing in size from the anterior one ; 5 plumose
spines on spine row ; molar tubercle moderatel}' large. Lower lip
with outer plates having anterior margin entire, inner plates mod-
erately developed. First maxillae with inner plate small, triangular,
with 2 setae on inner margin ; outer plate moderately broad, taper-
ing slightl}-, with 7 forked spine teeth on distal margin; palp 2-
jomted, curved ; first joint broader than long : second about as long
as wide with apex truncate, armed with 4 stout setae and several
smaller ones. Second maxillae with broad plates rounded distally ;
outer plate longer than inner one and with setae on apex ; inner plate
with spines on apex and diagonally on surface. Maxillipeds with
long, 4-jointed palp ; fourth joint cylindrical, about twice as long
as broad, with 4 apical setae, of which the 2 outer are longer than
segment ; third joint stout, twice as long as broad with numerous
long setae on distal portion ; second joint broader and longer than
third and armed with long setae on inner margin ; first joint slightlX

The .[niphipoda of Brruiuda.

101

longer than l)road ; outer plate extending scarcely to middle of
second joint of palp, armed with plumose spines on rounded apex,
the spines becoming smaller as they pass obliquel}' over the surface
to inner margin proximally, margin with dagger-shaped spines on
distal portion of inner margin ; inner i:)late rather rectangular in
shape, extending as far as tirst joint of palp, armed with plumose
spines apically and on distal half of inner margin ; apex with 3
odontoid spines.

In male first gnathopods with small epimeron ; second joint rather

Fig. 39. Ericthotiius brazilieiisis (Dana).

short, about 3 times as long as broad : third and fourth joints short,
fourth bearing a few setae apically, third bearing fewer and shorter
ones ; wrist large, triangular, somewhat longer than broad, attached
to anterior margin of fourth, posterior margin provided with many
long setae ; hand, triangular, as broad as wrist but not so long,
about as long as broad, with 4 fascicles of setae near anterior
margin, posterior one very short and convex with several moderately
long setae, passing into palm bj^ even curve ; palm finely serrate,
provided near proximal end with a single stout plumose spine and
numerous setae of various lengths; hand provided apically with

102 B. JJ\ Kuukel,

several long setae ; finger moderately long and curved, with one
seta near middle of outer convex margin and another near proximal
end; finely serrate on inner margin.

Second gnathopods with epimeron rounded ventrally, with a single
seta anteriorl}^ ; second joint rather stout, armed with a very few
short setae on anterior and posterior margins ; third joint not as
long as broad ; fourth joint oblong, more slender than third and
about 3 times as long as wide ; wrist very large and strong, sub-
triangular in shape, considerably longer than broad ; posterior margin
prolonged to form a large process extending past base of hand in the
form of 2 moderately sharp toothlike projections, of which the outer
one is the longer, posterior margin l^earing 4 fascicles of short setae
toward distal end ; hand subrectangular and smaller in all dimensions
than wrist, ver}' markedly narrower, anterior margin convex, pos-
terior margin about ^/s as long as anterior and parallel to it, palm
longer than posterior margin and very oblique, passing into posterior
margin by a slightly projecting obtuse prehensile angle, palm pro-
vided with setae of various lengths ; finger long, curved, stout,
nearly equalling the hand in length so that apex fits into notch
between process of wrist and hand, provided with short setae which
are longer and more crowded together around apex.

In female, second gnathopods simply subchelate ; wrist provided
with long process on posterior margin which extends nearly as far
as proximal end of palm, process provided with setae along pos-
terior margin and at apex, where there are also 2 odontoid spines ;
hand oval with distal portion more slender, transition between pos-
terior margin and palm 1)}' an even curve which is provided with
2 or 3 prehensile spines ; finger slender, moderately long and curved,
armed with a few setae.

Pereiopods with low epimera ; first, second, and third pereiopods
rather short and stout with moderately long and slender dact3'ls ;
first and second appendages with spinning glands; fourth and fifth
appendages rather long and slender.

Uropods, 3 pairs ; first pair longest, with peduncle serrate on inner
margin and slightly longer than rami which are subequal and have
margins finely serrate and provided with 2 short stout spines and
with one long stout s]3ine and several shorter setae on apex ; second
pair not extending as far as others, similar to first pair; third pair
with stout peduncle and single ramus which is stout and projects
as far as first uropods, somewhat curved in form and provided
apically with 2 very short, stout, hooked spines.

Telson broad 1)ut short, not extending as far as peduncle of second

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 103

uropods, apically rounded with broad, shallow depression dividing
it into 2 lobes which are armed on the dorsal surface with numerous
recurved spines.

There were only 2 or 3 specimens of the species in the collection,
about 4 mm. in length. The species has been previously reported
from the Atlantic coast of N. America (Vineyard Sound), Norway,
the Adriatic, Rio Janeiro, and the North Pacific (San Francisco).

Chelura terebrans Philippi, 1839.

1839. Philippi, Arch, f Naturgesch., vol. 5, p. 120, pi. 3, fig. 3.

Eyes round, compound, situated close to lateral lobes of head.

First antennae about Vs as long as body, with joints of peduncle
successively diminishing in size ; principal flagellum about as long
as last 2 joints of peduncle, composed of 6 joints rather densely
provided with slender setae ; accessory flagellum short, made up
of 2 joints. Second antennae much longer and stronger than first
and somewhat curved ; third, fourth, and fifth joints of peduncle
nearly equal in length, fifth being longer than either fourth or third ;
flagellum not segmented, consisting of a large spatulate joint pro-
vided with dense setae on both edges and tipped with one or two
rudimentary segments.

Upper lip rather elongated with apex broad and entire. Mandibles
with strong body but relatively small palp ; principal and secondary
cutting edges denticulated, molar tubercle strongly developed ; palp
3-jointed with terminal joint longest and having acute apex armed
with several long setae and inner margin beset with short setae,
second joint cylindrical, about twice as long as wide; first joint
very short. Lower lip made up of 2 pairs of plates with cilia on
anterior margin of outer plates. First maxillae with inner plate
moderately developed, provided with several setae on apex ; outer
plate strong, provided with many strong, branching spines ; palp
moderate, composed of 2 joints of which the distal one is the longer
with rounded apex which is provided with setae of various lengths.
.Second maxillae with plates rather narrow and provided apically
with setae. Maxillipeds with well developed plates and 4-jointed
palp ; inner plate with rounded apex and extending nearly as far
as distal end of first joint of ]5alp, with slender setae on inner and
apical margin ; outer plate with outer margin rather strongly convex,
inner margin straight and apex fairly acute, both provided with
setae; palp with second joint long and slender, slightly spindle-
shaped with setae on inner margin, third joint about twice as long
as broad, with outer apex produced to rounded lobe, fourth joint

104

B. JV. Kunkel,

slightly curved, cylindrical, much smaller than third joint, provided
apically with clawlike spine.

First gnathopods with rectangular epimeron about as long as broad
and with angles rounded, and with anterior ventral angle provided
with long setae : second joint rather stout, with anterior and pos-
terior margins parallel and provided with long setae ; third joint
very short ; fourth joint about as broad as long with apex rounded
and armed with a fascicle of setae ; wrist short, subrectangular with
anterior margin longer than posterior and with the latter provided
with long setae ; hand subrectangular, about twice as long as broad
and much longer than wrist, with posterior apex produced to form
a stout thumb against which the linger closes ; finger curved, small.

Fig. 40. Chehira terebrans Philippi.

.Second gnathopods with small triangular epimeron provided with
stout spines ; second joint rather longer and more slender than that
of first gnathopod with anterior margin provided with long setae ;
third joint shorter than Inroad ; fourth joint triangular, nearly twice
as long as broad with anterior and posterior margins slightl}- convex,
anterior margin and apex provided with rather long, plumose spines ;
w^ist subrectangular, as long as but narrower than j^receding joint ;
hand subrectangular, ver}^ long and slender, being longer than fourth
joint t)ut much narrower, smaller than that of first gnathopod, pos-
terior apex prolonged to form rounded thumb against which the
strongly curved but short finger closes to form a chela.

Epimera of pereiopods rather small, j^ereiopods subequal in length

The Aniphipoda of Bermuda. 105

and rather short and stout, second joints of posterior pairs scarcely
broader than those of anterior pairs ; posterior pereiopods with pos-
terior margin fringed with strong ciliated setae.

Posterior abdominal segments fused, about ^/2 as long as body in
male, ^/s in female; dorsal posterior margin of third segment pro-
duced to form long projection, slightly curved, directed posteriorly,
which is much longer in male than in female.

Uropods, 3 pairs; first pair biramous with long cylindrical ped-
uncle and rather short styliform rami scarcely half as long as ped-
uncle, inner ramus somewhat broader than outer and armed apically
with 3 short spines ; second pair rather short, biramous, with lamelli-
form rami which have 5 or 6 serrations apically and are scarcely
half as long as peduncle which is expanded greatly to form a sub-
quadrate lobe having serrated outer margin ; third pair with short
peduncle and single rather long, oval ramus which is leaflike and
serrated on edge.

Telson small, triangular, subcarinated dorsally, apex acute.

Length of female 5 mm., of male (exclusive of terminal uropods)
6 mm.

Sexual diffences rather marked; in male, dorsal projection from
third abdominal segment relatively much longer than in female ;
second pair of uropods with expansion of peduncle broader than long
and with serrated margins, whereas in female the expansion is long
and provided with many closely set long spines ; third uropod with
much longer ramus than in female.

A large number of specimens were obtained from the neighbor-
hood of Coney Island in submerged timbers which were thoroughly
honey- combed with the tunnels of the animal.

The species has been recorded from the North Atlantic and ad-
joining seas (Europe from Norway to the Black Sea, North America).

Tribe Laemodipoda.

First thoracic segment fused with head ; eyes small, compound ;
mandibles with or without palp ; first maxillae without inner plate ;
maxillipeds normally developed with 1- to 4-jointed palp.

Pereiopods, when not rudimentary, ending in prehensile claws.
Abdomen short and small with or without appendages.

The tribe is divided into 2 families, the Caprellidae and the
Cyamidae, characterized as follows :

106 B. IV. KwikeL

Caprellidae.

Body slender, first antennae much longer than second. Gills
saclike and confined to the second, third, and fourth, or to only the
third and fourth thoracic segments.

Abdomen of 5 joints at most, of which the first 3 are very short
and do not bear appendages ; uropods rudimentary or obsolete.

Non-parasitic in habit.

Cyamidae.

Body broad and flat ; third and fourth thoracic segments without
limbs, posterior segments with prehensile limbs.

Both pairs of antennae 4-jointed, first pair much longer and stouter
than second.

Gills confined to third and fourth thoracic segments, elongated in
form.

Parasitic on Cetacea.

Key to the genera, of the Caprellidae.

Mandibles without palj) Caprella

Mandibles with palp Protellopsis

Caprella equilibra Say, 1818.

1818. Say, Journ. Acad. Natur. Sci. Phil, vol. 1. p. 374-401.

Eyes compound, moderate in size. Rostrum al^sent. Body with
smooth dorsum.

First antennae with peduncle stout, having third joint longer than
first and second longer than third ; flagellum abruptly narrower than
peduncle, made up of about 12 joints, less than ^/s as long as ped-
uncle. Second antennae fringed with long setae ; flagellum made
up of 2 joints, nearly as long as fourth joint of peduncle which is
as long as fifth, provided with long setae, terminal joint small.

Mandibles without palp ; cutting edge divided into about 5 acute
teeth ; spine row with 2 or 3 stout plumose spines ; molar tubercle
strong, with a triangular process which gives it an irregular shape in
the side view. Lower lip with principal lobes widely dehiscent;
inner lobes fairly large ; mandibular processes narrow, rather wideh*
dehiscent. First maxillae with no inner plate ; outer plate cur^'ed,
shorter than palp, with distal margin furnished with 7 forked tooth-
like spines ; first joint of palp short ; second widening toward dent-
ated, obliquely rounded apex which is provided with many setae
on margin and with row of longer ones on surface near apical

The AmpJiipoda of Bermuda.

107

margin. Second maxillae with inner plate shorter than outer, with
many slender setae around margin ; outer plate oblong with long
setae on apex. Maxillipeds with inner plate small, scarcely reaching
to base of first joint of palp, distal margin transverse and provided
with 2 or 3 spine teeth ; outer plate small, extending slightly beyond
first joint of palp ; with 8 rather long spine teeth on distal part of
inner margin and long setae which also arm the oblique distal
margin ; palp 4-jointed with first joint small and moderately stout,
having a few setae on inner margin ; second joint stouter and much
longer, about twice as long as wide, with inner margin provided
with many long setae ; third joint shorter and more slender than
second and with fringe of long setae on inner margin and apex ;
fourth joint unguiform, as long as third joint.

Fig. 41. Caprella equilibra Say.

First gnathopods with second joint moderately short ; third and
fourth joints short, fourth with a fascicle of long setae on distal por-
tion of posterior margin ; wrist about as broad as long, with setae
on rounded posterior margin ; hand oval, about twice as long as
wide, tapering toward distal end, anterior margin convex, posterior
margin very short, palm extending practically to base of hand, and
provided with setae of various lengths and a stout prehensile spine,
posterior part of palm finely serrate; finger long and strong with
inner concave margin toothed.

Second gnathopods rather short and stout, with distal end much
broader than proximal and with lamellar process extending along
anterior margin ; third, fourth, and fifth joints short ; hand oval, long,
with long palm bearing 2 or 3 rounded processes about middle and
several short setae, prehensile angle {prominent, terminating in stout
spine : finger strong. " Of special importance as a character of the

108 B. IV. Kuukel,

species is the strong sharp process projecting ventrally in the middle
Hne between the insertions of the second gnathopods of the male,
which is developed only slightly in the female." (Mayer.)

Pereiopods, first and second pairs wanting, third pair present.
Gills present on third and fourth thoracic segments, long and narrow.
Abdomen with single segment. Uropods, one pair present in male,
wanting in female.

There were several specimens in the collection, the longest of
which was hardly 10 mm. in length.

The species is widely distributed, having been recorded from the
Mediterranean ; the coast of Norway ; Charleston, S. Car. ; Hongkong ;
Rio Janeiro; and New South Wales.

Caprella bermudia sp. nov.

Eyes small, round, situated well posterior to front margin of head.

First antennae stout, more than ^/a as long as body ; peduncle
somewhat longer than flagellum which is composed of 12 or more
elongated segments ; first joint of peduncle short and thick, second
joint nearly twice as long as first and not so thick, and provided
with a row of long setae on distal half of lower margin ; third joint
somewhat longer than first, C3dindrical in form and provided on
lower margin with many short setae. Second antennae slightly
longer than peduncle of first; second joint of peduncle very short
with inconspicuous gland cone ; third joint about twice as long as
wide ; fourth and fifth joints subequal in length and provided on
lower margin with rather long setae ; fiagellum made up of 2 joints,
about as long as fifth joint of peduncle, first joint 3 or 4 times as
long as terminal joint and provided with setae on lower margin.

Mandibles without palp, principal cutting edge divided into 5 un-
equal teeth, secondary cutting edge divided into 5 equal teeth,
molar tubercle large, of irregular form. Lower lip with large
rounded inner lobes and principal lol)es with anterior margin entire,
mandibular processes short and stout. First maxillae with 2-jointed
palp, of which the last is long and abundantly provided with spines
toward apex where joint is widened ; outer plates rather short ;
inner plates wanting. Second maxillae with inner plate shorter than
outer but wider at base than outer plate, both with distal margins
rounded and provided with setae. Maxillipeds with outer and inner
plates rather small ; palp long and 4-jointed : inner plates broader
distally than proximal!}', distal margin straight, oblique, provided
with numerous setae ; outer plates extending slightly beyond first-
joint of palp, outer margin and apex rounded, inner margin with 5

The Atnpliipoda of Bcrumda.

109

or 6 sharply pointed tootlilike spines and numerous setae ; first joint
of palp short, outer margin rather longer than inner, second joint
about twice as long as wide with setae on inner margin, third joint
about as long as second but more slender, provided with setae on
inner margin toward apex; terminal joint clawlike, nearly as long
as third joint.

Fig. 42. Caprella bermuiUa sp. nov.

\n male, first gnathopods with second joint very short and stout ;
third joint broader than long ; fourth joint subrectangular with group
of setae on distal margin ; wri.st somewhat triangular, posterior margin
strongl}^ convex, forming semicircular lobe, provided with about a
dozen setae; hand subtriangular, as broad as wrist and about
twice as long as broad, anterior margin convex, palm forming
posterior margin, very slightly convex, with 2 prehensile spines
and a few slender setae; finger long and not greatly curved, mod-
erately' slender.

110 B. W. Kuukel,

Second gnathopods very large ; second joint about twice as long
as wide at distal end, proximal end rather narrow, anterior margin
notched and slightly convex, anterior apex produced, forming a
triangular process, posterior margin rather strongly convex ; third
joint shorter than long; fourth joint about as long as broad, rec-
tangular with small process extending from distal end of posterior
margin ; wrist very small, articulating with anterior margin of fourth
joint ; hand large, suboval, anterior margin slightly convex ; palm
rather long and very oblique, nearly parallel with anterior margin,
separated from posterior margin by rather prominent process bear-
ing prehensile spine, palm provided with a rather deep notch near
distal end, behind which is a toothlike process, proximal to which
the palm is nearly straight and less prominent than toward the
distal end ; finger stout and curved, moderately long.

Second thoracic segment provided with long acutely pointed
process ventral to articulation of gnathopod which is near posterior
end of segment. Pereiopods of third and fourth segments wanting.
Branchial vesicles narrow, 3 times as long as broad, present on
third and fourth thoracic segments. Fifth, sixth, and seventh pereio-
pods of usual form.

Abdomen represented by a single segment with a single pair of
rudimentary uropods.

Length about 9 mm.

There were 2 specimens collected by Dr. L. J. Cole, July 15,
1903.

Caprella danilevskii Czerniavski, 1868.

1868. Materialia ad zoograph. pont. campar., p. 92 ; pi. 6,
fig. 21-34.

The following description is modified from Haswell's of C. inermis
which is evidently the same as C. danilevskii. (Proc. Linn. Soc.
N. S. Wales, vol. 4, p. 348. 1879.)

Cephalon terminating anteriorl}' in minute mesial tooth. Neck
very long ; first segment of body longer than head and neck, other
segments shorter.

First antennae as long as head and first 2 thoracic segments ;
flagellum shorter than last 2 segments of peduncle. Second an-
tennae slightly longer than peduncle of first ; flagellum shorter than
last 2 joints of peduncle.

First gnathopods short with ovate hand having a longitudinal
palm which is undefined.

TJie Amphipoda of Bennuda. Ill

Second gnathopods very large, with hand elongated and narrow
with the palm uniformly excavate and occupying Vs entire length
of hand.

Gills subcylindrical.

Last pair of pereiopods longer than others.

Color, green.

Length ^/lo in.

The species is of exceedingly wide occurrence, having been already
reported from the Mediterranean, Black' Sea, Copenhagen, Bay of
Biscay, Sea of Japan, Port Jackson (New South Wales), Rio Janeiro,
and Bermuda (Stebbing, 1888, Challenger Report, vol. 29, p. 1264).

No specimens of this species were present in the collection studied.

Protellopsis stebbingii Pearse, 1908.

1908. A. S. Pearse, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. 34, p. 30.

Head rounded and provided with acutely pointed spinous pro-
cesses. There may be 2 processes directed forwards and situated
above and behind the eye, or there may be a single process in the
middorsal line and also one just lateral to the base of the second
antennae. Second thoracic segment with spinous process in mid-
dorsal line situated at about middle of segment, anterior margin
with large process laterally and also several just dorsal to articu-
lation of second gnathopod. These processes are variable in size
and occurrence.

Eyes large, circular, situated near anterior margin of head.

First antennae rather slender, more than ^/2 as long as body •
peduncle over ^{^ as long as flagellum which is made up of numer-
ous elongated segments ; first joint of peduncle moderately stout,
cylindrical ; second joint about twice as long as first and not so
broad ; third joint less than ^/2 as long as first, broader at distal
than proximal end. Second antennae much shorter than first, ex-
tending as far as first third of flagellum of first ; flagellum 2-jointed,
first joint 1^/2 times as long as distal one, as long as fourth joint
of peduncle ; gland cone rather prominent ; third joint longer than
broad ; fourth and fifth joints subequal and slender, with a few setae.

Mandibles with 3-jointed palp, of which the first is short and
C3'lindrical and about twice as long as broad ; second joint slender,
of about the same width as first but more than twice as long ; third
joint shorter than second, broader at distal end than at proximal,
apex obliquely truncated and provided with setae of various lengths ;
principal and secondary cutting edges divided into numerous teeth ;

112

B. W. KwikeL

molar tubercle large, cylindrical. First maxillae without inner plate ;
outer plate narrow, provided with serrated toothlike spines on short
apical margin; palp 2-jointed, first joint about as broad as long,
second twice as broad as long with apex rounded and broader than
proximal end and provided with short spines. Second maxillae
small, outer plate longer and narrower than inner plate, both plates
with fine setae on apex. Lower lip with principal plates broad and
oval; inner plates rather large; mandibular processes short. Max-
illipeds with outer and inner plates small and with long, 4-jointed
palp ; inner plates not reaching as far as base of first joint of palp,
rather broad and with apical margin rounded and provided with
a few stout spines; outer plates extending to about the middle of

Fig. 43. Profellopsis stebbingii Peai-se.

second joint of palp, outer margin rather strongly convex, inner
margin straight and provided with a few setae ; palp with first joint
longer than broad, cylindrical, second joint cylindrical, 3 times as
long as broad ; third joint somewhat shorter than second and nar-
rower, provided at distal end of inner margin with a few setae ;
fourth joint clawlike and as long as third, provided on inner margin
with exceedingly fine setae.

First gnathopods with second joint moderately slender ; third joint
about as broad as long ; fourth joint more or less cuplike and with
posterior margin much longer than anterior and provided with a
few setae near aj^ex ; wrist triangular, rather longer than wide, pos-
terior margin and apex provided with a few short setae ; hand tri-
angular, about IV9 times as long as wide and much wider than wrist.

The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 113

palm olilique, forming- nearly entire posterior margin, provided with
numerous short setae ; finger rather long and curved, concave mar-
gin somewhat serrated.

Second gnathopods with second joint long and slender and slight-
ly curved so that posterior margin is slightly convex, anterior apex
produced to form acutely pointed process ; third joint about as
broad as long; fourth joint spheroidal, articulating with third joint
by rather slender stalk, provided with a few setae posteriorly ; wrist
very short, triangular ; hand strongly developed, oval in form, broad-
est about ^/a distance from proximal to distal end, palm extending
to very near proximal end of posterior margin and somewhat in-
cised, posterior margin separated from palm by rather prominent
triangular process which bears apically a stout spine, form of palm
variable, but always with deep U-shaped notch toward distal end ;
linger very long and curved.

First and second pereiopods rudimentary and 2-jointed. Branchial
vesicles confined to third and fourth thoracic segments, long and
oval in form. Third, fourth, and fifth pereiopods developed normally.

Abdomen made up of 2 segments. Uropods, only one pair which
are very short and 2-jointed, with the terminal joint exceedingly
small and rounded, the iirst joint broader apically than proximally
and bearing several setae apically.

Length 9 mm.

The species was represented by numerous specimens received
from Dr. L. J. Cole and bearing the date July 15, 1903.

According to Pearse this species was abundant in the Gulf of
Mexico, off Northwest Channel, in 10^/^ fathoms.

Pearse figures the second gnathopod of the male with the prox-
imal end of the hand broadened to form a triangular process and
with the palm bearing a very large triangular notch. In the speci-
mens from Bermuda the second gnathopod of the males does not
differ from that of the females which corresponds with that figured
by Pearse.

Cyamus fascicularis Verrill, 1903.

1903. Trans. Conn. Acad. vol. 11, p. 21; pi. 8, fig. 4.

A slender bodied Cyamus from the body of a young sperm whale,
taken off Bermuda and exhibited at St. George's in April.

" This species is much more slender than those of the right whales
and allied cetaceans. The two branchial segments are about as
wide as the following ones, and bear fascicles of small, short, some-

114 B. W. Kunkel, The Auiphipoda of Bermuda.

what unequal branchiae, scarcely longer than the segments. There
are about 10 to 12 branchial filaments in each of the four groups.

" The first segment is consolidated with the head, which is narrow
and rather long with conspicuous eyes. Antennae are about -/s the
length of the head. First pair of legs small, beneath the second.
The hands of the second pair are not much swollen, and have two
strong denticles, besides a similar one at the distal angle of the
carpus. The three posterior feet have a recurved denticle on the
distal angle of the carpus.

" Color, yellowish white ; branchiae have small black spots. The
specimens described are females. No males were taken.

" Length of body und head, 9 mm. ; greatest breadth of body,
3.5 mm."

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Bate, C. S. Catalogue of the Ampliipodous Crustacea in the British Mu-
seum. 1862. pp. 399, pi. 58.
B.ATE, C. S. and Westwood, J. O. A History of the British Sessile-eyed

Crustacea. 1868. 2 vols., pp. 507, 536.
BoECK, A. De Skandinaviske og Arktiske Amphipoder. Christiania 1872—

76. pp. 711, pi. 32.
Della Valle, a. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel. 1893. Monogr.

20, Gammarini, pp. 948, pi. 61.
Holmes, S. J. The Amphipods of Southern Nev\^ England. Bull. Bur.

Fish., AVashington 1905. vol. 24, p. 457-529, pi. 1-13.
Mayer, P. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel. 1882. Monogr. 6,

Caprelliden, pp. 201, pi. 10.
Sars, G. O. An Account of the Crustacea of Norv^^ay. Vol. 1, Amplii-

poda. pp. 711, pi. 248. Christiania and Copenhagen 1895.
Stebbing, T. R. R. Report on the Amphipoda. Challenger Reports 1888.

vol. 29, pp. 1737, pi. 210.
Das Tierreich. 1906. Lief. 21. Amphipoda, I. Gammaridea.

pp. 806, figs. 127.
Vkrrill, a. E. Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas from the Yale

Expedition of 1901. 1902. Trans. Conn. Acad. vol. II, p. 15-62.

^n

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

Incorporated A. D. 1799

VOLUME 16, PAGES 117-245.

OCT., 1910

The Clausula

in

Ammianus Marcellinus

BY

AUSTIN MORRIS HARMON

PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF

YALE UNIVERSITY

NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT
1 910

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES

Incorporated A. D. 1799

VOLUME 16, PAGES 117-245.

OCT., 1910

The Clausula

in

Ammianus Marcellinus

AUSTIN MORRIS HARMON

PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF

YALE UNIVERSITY

NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT
1910

WEIMAR : PRINTED BY R. WAGNER SOHN

Introduction.

The purpose of this treatise is to present the results of an in-
vestigation into the nature of the rhythm that characterized the
prose of Ammianus MarceUinus, the great historian of the fourth
century. Inasmuch as the subject is by no means an entirely new
one, it is fitting that we should begin by passing in brief review
the facts already established.

The fundamental features of the rhythm employed by Ammianus
were pointed out some years ago by Wilhelm Meyer of Speyer in
his review of Havet's book, La piose uu'trique de Symmaque} Meyer
discovered that in common with a large number of authors, both
Latin and Greek, from the fourth century on, Ammianus makes use
of accentual clausulae, — in other words, that he secures a rhythmical
effect in his prose by contriving that each clause shall end in one
or another of a limited number of accentual cadences. As a general
definition of the character of these cadences Meyer formulated the
following rule :

Both in the Greek and in the Latin accentual clausulae the rule
holds good that either two or four (rarely three) unaccented syllables
separate the accented syllables of the last two words in the clause.

Now this is a sweeping generalization, and as such it has the
faults that are consequent upon its merits. For in the first place,
although it holds good in the case of many (probably the majority)
of the Latin writers, there are on the one hand some who entirely
avoid the use of clausulae in which three syllables separate the
accents, and on the other hand some, like Ennodius, who employ
these cadences even more extensively than those in which there
are four intervening syllables. And in the second place, granted
its general truth, it remains an inadequate definition of the Latin
clausulae, for it leaves out of consideration two important factors,
to wit, the question of the number of the syllables which follow the
last accent, and the matter of word-division.^

» Gott. gel. Am. 1893, 1-27 = Ges. Abh. ziir Mittellat. Rytlumk II, 236-286.
References to Meyer will hereafter be made to the reprint.

* It is not in a spirit of carping criticism that I bring up these points,
but simply as a protest against a growing tendency to view this state-
ment as a law of Latin prose-rhythm, whereas it is nothing more than
a convenient expression of the extent to which Latin usage, taken by
and large, agrees with Greek usage.

120 Austin Morris Harmon,

These deficiencies are made j^ood, however, by Meyer's hst of
the various clausulae that he found in current use among Latin
authors. This Hst I reproduce in substance, though not in form,
since to avoid possible confusion it seems best to translate his data
into the terms of the classification which I have adopted. The
essential feature of this classification is that it groups the clausulae
first into forms on the basis of the accentual cadences they present,
and then into types of each form on the basis of word-division.^
In the graphic illustrations of the different forms the sign r^ de-
notes a syllable, and accented syllables are distinguished from those
unaccented by a superposed cross. ^

Clausulae in which tivo unaccented syllables come between
the accented syllables

I r^ r\j r\j f^ nu

Types 3; (;') transferre sermonem, (6) accipimus dictum, {y 6) dicta

sint carptim

\\ r\j r\j r\j rLi r\j i^u

Types : {y) suscepi provinciam, {6) animi poscitur, {y 6) argumento

vel ordine
Clausulae in which four unaccented syllables come between
the accented syllables

III n^ n^ r^^ r\j rsj r\j r\j

Types : {6) lapide disparatae, [6 f ) la])ide sic paratae, (;') deseruisse

convincebatur

1 The terms form and type are borrowed from Zielinski {Philol. Supp/e-
mentbd. IX p. 606), and the classilicatiou is parallel to his. Meyer's
system is not strictlj^ logical, nor is it flexible enough; though by em-
phasizing the type- distinctions in forms I and II it has the merit of
accenting their stjdistic importance.

* In the face of Zielinski's protest I retain Mej^er's sign rsj ; note, liow-
ever, that I do not use it to express the fact that a syllable may be
either long or short, but simply to avoid implication of its quantity. It
is therefore employed only when syllable-count is in question and not
quantity, and for this purpose it is indispensable.

' The Greek letters that denote the t^^pes are easilj' fixed in mind by
connecting J with diaeresis. The s^'stem of nomenclature is fully explained
on p. 178.

The Clausula in Ammiauiis Marcellimis. 121

Type : (Js) agitans ignobilibu.s

Clausulae in which three unaccented syllables come between
the accented syllables

Only type : ille properabat.

Far the most frequent of these forms in general use are I, II and
III, although their types are not all held in equal favor. Some
writers, as Sedulius, strenuously avoid I 8 and II tV {accipimns dictum,
animi poscitur) ; Ammianus, however, uses both of these clausulae
very freely. The common type in III is cV : for the clausula III ;'
Meyer cites only Ammianus. So too for the clausula IV reference
is made only to Ammianus. Meyer found 46 occurrences of III y
and IV (which he lumped together) among 800 sentence-endings.
As for the clausula A, it occurs only with the caesura after the first
unaccented syllable {ilk properabat), and is rare in most authors.
In Ammianus Meyer observed 15 cases among his 800 sentence-
endings, in Sedulius 11 among 1000; and he noted that the clausula
is in special favor with Ennodius and Gelasius.-

These, then, are the accentual cadences upon which the rhythm
of late Latin prose is based. The history of their origin in earlier
quantitative clausulae and of their persistence through the Middle
Ages in the so-called cursiis has been discussed at length and in
detail by Meyer, and to have established the course of this long
development is not the least of the achievements that earn him the
title of bene meritus. Into this matter, however, we cannot enter
at present : we shall return to it later to consider the genesis of
the accentual clausula in the light of Ammianus' testimony, which
illuminates certain dark places.

At the outset of our discussion it is well that we should recall to
mind a truth that has been voiced of late by Blass, to the effect that
the character of the prose-rhythm in any text can not be established

* My object in not numbering this form consecutively with the others
is primarily to save the numbers V and VI for possible clausulae with
six unaccented syllables between tlie accents (v. p. 168 ff.) and secondarily
to emphasize its distinction both in origin and in rhythm from the other
four forms (v. p. 199). The reason for giving it the letter A is mani-
fested in the table of cadences, p. 168).

* This statement, as regards Ammianus, stands in need of correction.
Type r/le properabat of A occurs in the text as we have it only about
once in 300 clausulae, hence it is to be eliminated as a characteristic of
Ammianus' style. V. p. 175.

122 Austin Morris Harmon,

with entire soundness unless the text itself is entirely sound. ^ Now
the text of Ammianus is unfortunately anything but sound, for it
rests almost entirely on the evidence of a single manuscript, which
is an unfaithful copy of a faulty and defective archetype.^ Conse-
quently the conditions in Ammianus are well-nigh the worst possible.
This will prevent us from attaining to certainty upon one or two
points of his usage, which, however, are of relatively slight import.^
Owing to the uniformity (not to sa}- monotony) of his rhythm, all
its essential features jDresent themselves with distinctness even in
our imperfect text.

So great is this uniformit}^ that I have considered it unnecessary
to demonstrate my observations by statistical evidence based on the
full text of Ammianus. It goes without saying, of course, that I
have contirmed them, both in general tenor and in certain particulars,
by repeated readings of the Histories, but the statistics which I shall
adduce in proof of them are not imposing. They rest upon two
distinct bases which include less than 3300 clausulae. One of these
is a catalogue of all the sentence-endings (exclusive of direct quo-
tations) in the first six and the last three books of our author,
amounting in all to 1811. The making of this collection was the
first step in my investigation, and in restricting it to sentence-endings
I was naturally determined by the fact that here if anywhere the
clausula is certain to occur. But, the final cadences, once fixed,
those in the interior of the sentence could not be left out of account :
hence the second collection, which embraces all the clausulae in
Book XXI, numbering 1461.

The results of my investigation fall under two heads : first, the
character of the rhythm in Ammianus, and second, inferences drawn
from the rhythm. Under the first head we shall consider first the
nature of the clausulae employed by Ammianus (taking up in order
the forms, the types and the matter of residual quantity, and clos-
ing with a brief stud}^ of their origin], and next the manner of their
employment (length of kola, number of kola in sentence, structure
of sentence, resi)onsion, etc.). Under the second head fall two groups
of observations — those pertaining to linguistic phenomena (matters

^ Rhythnten d. as/an. w. rdm. Kunstprosa, p. 123.

^ Vat. Lat. 1873 {V). Gelenius' edition contains some readings from
a Hersfeld codex, since lost. This, though it is apparently independent
of F", is unquestionably a copy of the same archet\'pe. On these matters
see C. U. Clark, The Text Tradition of Amin. Marc, New Haven, 1904.

* The question whether he absolutely avoided the clausula A (v. p. 175),
and the cadence I made in a single word (v. p. 185).

The Clausula in Ammianus MarceUinus. 123

of accent and syllabication) and those of a critical nature (dealing
both with text criticism and the higher criticism). Some of the
facts presented in this second part are of a nature to arouse interest
even among those who stand aloof from the field of rhythmical
studies.

Not only with the idea of facilitating control of my statements,
but with the larger purpose of presenting a clear and intelligible
picture of Ammianus' rhythm, I shall introduce my discussion of
the subject by printing Book XXI in full, sundering the kola from
one another and marking the form and type of each clausula.

Ammiani Marcellini Rerum Gestarum Liber XXI.

Preliminary Note.

No motive of any significance vinderlies my choice of Book XXI
for analysis. Any other portion of the Histories would have yielded
similar results, and I took this particular book because it seemed
to have a fairly sound text and had not previously been worked
over for my collection of sentence-endings. Gardhausen's text is
taken as a basis ; variations from it are accounted for in the foot-
notes. As my object is not so much to edit the text as to edit
the rhythm of it, I have made few changes except in the clausula.
Here I have admitted conjectures with considerable freedom, but the
reader will note that in most instances they do not rest solely upon
metrical grounds. The evidence of the unamended text will be
considered later.

Though in general the text is so arranged as to give each kolon
a separate line, I have occasionally printed two or more on one
line without any definite system save an inclination to do so in the
case of short kola (or kommata) that respond. The numbering of
the forms has already been explained : the Greek letters that dis-
tinguish the types of the difterent forms are interpreted fully on
page 178. The sign 7 marks the end of a cadence which is prob-
ably accidental, though the distinction is sometimes difficult to
make.^ Where the accent or syllabication of a word is peculiar
I have marked it in the usual way, and on the first occurrence of
each phenomenon I have referred to the place where it is treated
in the chapter dealing with matters of pronunciation. In order to
interpret the clausulae readily the reader should note in advance
that elision does not occur in Ammianus, while hiatus (within
certain bounds) is frequent (p. 222) ; further, that it makes no dif-
ference whether a word-break does or does not precede the first
accented syllable of the cadence (p. 181).

* The question of accidental clausulae is treated on p. 205 f.

The Clausula in Animiatnis Marcclliniis. 125

(I. 1) Intercluso hac bellurum difficili sorte Constantio II y

trans flumen Euphratem, I y

lulianus agens apud Viennam I ;'

formandis in futura consiliis II /

5 dies inpendebat et noctes, I y^

quantum opes patiebantur angustae I y

altius semet adtollens, I y

semperque ambigens II (5
utrum Constantium 7 modis omnibus alliceret

in concordiam IV (5 1

10 an terroris incutiendi gratia lacesseret prior. I cV

(2) quae sollicite reputans utrumqvie formidabat, II (5 III 6
et amicum cruentum I ;'

et (inimicum) in aerumnis civilibus saepe vic-

torem ; I /

maximeque Galli fratris exemplum I y

15 mentem eius anxiam suspendebat, III 6

quem inertia mixtaeque periuriis fraudes pro-

didere quorundam. I /

(3) erigebat tamen aliquotiens animum II 6
ad multa [et] urgentia, (II y)
tutissimum ratus I ^

20 inimicum se ex confesso monstrare I /

ei cuius ex praeteritis motus I rf

coniectabat ut jirudens, I y6

ne per amicitias fictas insidiis falleretur occultis. I cV \y

(4) parvi igitur habitis II 8
25 quae per Leonam Constantius scripserat, II (5

nulloque arbitrio eius promotorum suscepto 7

praeter Nebridium, II ;'

quinquennalia Augustus iam edidit : II / (V

et ambitioso diademati utebatur III 6

lapidum fulgore distincto, I ;-

30 cum inter exordia principatus adsumpti I ;'

vili corona circumdatus II ;'

erat xystarchae similis purpurato. Ill 6

(5) inter quae Helenae coniugis defunctae suprema I ;'
miserat Romam I 6

8 que semivocalis ti apud Amiiiianum syllabam saepe facit : v. p. 226
13 inimicum addidi 18 et delevi non modo metro sed setisid obiioxhtin :
V. p. 171

126 Austin Morris Haniioii,

ill suburbano viae Nomentanae condenda, I ;'

ubi uxor quoque Galli quondam, soror eius, se-

* pulta est Constantina. Ill y^

(6) accedebat autem incendebatque eius cupiditatem III /
pacatis iam Galliis incessere ultro Constantium WydWy

5 coniciens eum 7

per vaticinandi praesagia multa 7 quae callebat

et somnia II yd

e vita protinus excessurum. Ill 6

(7) et quoniam erudito et studioso cognitionum

omnium principi II d

malivoli praenoscendi futura I;'

10 pravas artes adsignant, I;'

advertendum est breviter Wyd
unde sapienti viro hoc quoque accidere poterit, \\d

doctrinae genus haud leve. I yd

(8) elementorum omnium spiritus II S
15 utpote perennium corporum II 6

praesentiendi motu semper et ubique vigens I 6

ex his quae per disciplinas varias adfectamus III d

participat nobiscum munera divinandi : III 6
et substantiales potestates ritu diverso placatae I y

20 velut ex perpetuis fontium venis I d

vaticina mortaUtati suppeditant verba, I d

quibus numen praeesse dicitur Themidis, II d

quam ex eo quod fixa fataU lege decreta I /

praescire facit in posterum, II y6

25 quae rtx^ttfiira sermo Graecus appellat, I ,i ly

ita cognominatam III y

in cubiU solioque lovis vigoris vivitici II ;'

theologi veteres conlocarunt. Ill d

(9) auguria et auspicia IV da
30 non volucrum arbitrio futura nescientium conli-

guntur — III d

nee enim hoc \e\ insipiens quisquam dicet — I 6

sed volatus avium dirigit deus 1 6

ut rostrum sonans aut praetervolans pinna I 6

turbido meatu vel leni I y6

35 futura praemonstret. I ;'

amat enim l:)enignitas numinis, II 6
seu quod merentur homines seu quod tangitur

eorum adfectione, III y

The Clausula in Aiiuiiiauus Ma)xellmus. 127

his quoque artihus prodere quae inpendent. \ll6i

(10) extis itidem pecudum attenti fatidicis, II y
in species converti suetis iiinumeras, II y
accidentia sciunt. I d

5 cuius disciplinae Tages nomine quidam mon-

strator est, II ^C

ut fabulantur, in Etruriae partibus II 6

emersisse subito visus e terra. I yd

(11) aperiunt tunc quoque ventura \y
cum aestuant hominum corda I 6

10 (sed locuntur divina). \y

sol enim, ut aiunt physici, II d
mens mundi nostras mentes ex sese 7 velut

scintillas diffunditans, II ^^

cum eas incenderit vehementius IV 6

futuri conscias reddit ; I d

15 unde Sibyllae crebro se dicunt ardere I /

torrente vi magna flammarum. I y

multa significant su])er his crepitus vocum I 6

et occurrentia signa. I S
tonitrua quin etiam et fulgura et fulmina itidemque

siderum sulci. I 6

(12) 20 somniorum autem rata fides et indubitabilis foret, \6

ni ratiocinantes coniectura fallerentur interdum. (I y)
quae, ut Aristoteles adfirmat, I y

tum fixa sunt et stabilia, IV /de

cum animantis altius quiescentis ocularis pupilla \l\6 \y
25 neiitrubi inclinata rectissime cernit. Ill did

(13) et quia vanities ahquotiens plebeia strepit, Id
haec inperite mussando, I y
si esset praesentiendi notitia quaedam, I d
cur ille se casurum in bello I yd

30 vel alius hoc se passurum ignoravit aut illud, I iiy lyd
sufficiet dici I d

quod et grammaticus locutus interdum est barbare II yd
et absurde cecinit musicus lid'

et ignoravit remedium medicus : II d

35 at non ideo nee grammatica nee musica nee

medicina subsistit. I y

(14) unde praeclare hoc quoque ut alia II yd

11 aiunt v.p. 224 21 fallerentur interdum quae Bentleius, J/tfrf77^f allerentur.
interdumque ^-^Z^. v.p. 171 22 Aristoteles z'./. 2/^ 26 plebeia ?/./. 22^

128 Austin Morris Harmon,

Tullius 'signa ostenduntur' ait 'a dis rerum

futurarum [A]

in his siqui erraverit [II ;']

non deorum natura [I ;-]

sed hominum coniectura peccavit.' [I y\

5 ne igitur extra caicem, quod dicitur, sermo

decurrens I /

lecturo fastidium ferat, I d

ad explicanda proposita revertamur. (Ill (J)
(II. 1) cum apud Parisios adhuc Caesar lulianus quatiens

scutvim 1 6

variis niotibus 7 exerceretur in campo, I j'rf
10 axiculis quibus orbis erat conpaginatus in vanum

excussis, I y

ampla remanserat sola I rf

quam retinens valida manu stringebat ; I y

(2) territisque ut omine diro praesentibus cunctis, \^ I rf
'nemo' inquit 'vereatur: III ()

15 habeo firmiter quod tenebam.' Ill (5f
item cum apud Viennam postea quiesceret sobrius, II 8

horrore medio noctis I 8

imago quaedam visa splendidior 11/

hos ei versus heroos I y

20 modo non vigilanti III y6

aperte dixit eadem saepius replicando, III 6
quibus fretus nihil asperum sibi superesse exi-

stimabat. Ill y

iquatbior versus Graecos oinisi)

(3) agebat itaque niliil interim de statu rerum

praesentium mutans, I 6

sed animo tranquillo et qiiieto III yd

25 incidentia cuncta disponens, I y

paulatimque sese conroborans 11/

ut dignitatis augmento I /

virium quoque congruerent incrementa. Ill 6

(4) utque omnes nullo inpedicnte III /
30 ad sui favorem inliceret, 11/

adhaerere cultui Christiano fingebat, I /

1 Cic. de vat. dear. II 4. 12 ubi erraveriint : ?'. /. 242 7 proposita

7v<r//<'r3az^<'r prospeeta V. v. p. I7i\ lyC) 10 ([uibiis scrips/ quis fdd. quid /'.

24 qiiieto ?■. /. 227.

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus 129

a quo iam pridem occulte desciverat, II y

arcanorum paiticipibus paucis, . 1 6

haruspicinae auguriisque intentus I;'

et ceteris quae deorum semper fecere cultores. I y
5 et ut haec interim celarentur, III 6

(5) feriarum die quem celebrantes mense lanuario

Christiani III ^

Epiphania dictitant II ^

progressus in eorum ecclesiam II ;'

sollemniter numino orato discessit. I y

(III. 1) 10 dum haec ita aguntur \y

propinquante iam vere, \y6

nuntio percitus inopino III 6

ad tristitiam versus est et maerorem : \l\y6f:

didicit enim Alamannos a pago Vadomari exorsos, (I y)
15 unde nihil post ictum foedus sperabatur incom-

modum, II ;'

vastare confinis Raetiis tractus, I 6

nihilque sinere intemptatum III 6

manus praedatorias fusius discurrentes. Ill 6

(2) quod ne dissimulatum redivivas bellorum materias

excitaret, III 6

20 Libinonem quendam comitem cum Celtis et

Petulantibus misit I 6

hiemantibus secum, I (V

negotium ut poscebat ratio correcturum. Ill d

(3) qui cum mature prope oppidumSanctionem venisset I y
longe visus a l^arbaris, Il^'d

25 qui iam certamina meditantes III 6

sese per valles abdiderant, II;'

hortatusque milites Hcet numero inpares II 6

cupidine tamen pugnandi 7 vehementius inritatos, III 6

adgreditur inconsulte Germanos, \y

30 interque dimicandi exordia II y

ipse concidit omnium primus : I 6

cuius interitu erecta barbarorum fiducia II;'

Romanisque ad ducis vindictam accensis I ;'

certamen committitur obstinatum, III 6

35 et urgente magnitudinis mole disiecti sunt nostri Id \y6

7 Epiphauia v. p. 212 14 Vadomarii V et edd. {v. p. 233)

18 post manus perperavi interpzmxit Gardt.

130 Austin Morris Harmon,

occisis paucis et vulneratis. Ill ;- 6

(4) cum hoc Vadomario et Gundomado eius fratre

itidem rege I d

Constantius, ut iam relatum est, firmaverat

pacem. I d

post quae mortuo Gundomado III 6

5 hunc sibi fore existimans fidum I 6

secretorumque tacitumum exsecutorem et effi-

cacem, III- /(J

» mandabat, si famae solius admittenda est fides, I / I ;' d
scribebatque ut tamquam rupto concordiae

pacto 1 6

subinde conlimitia sibi vicina vexaret, I /

10 quo lulianus id metuens Ilvrf

nusquam a tutela discederet Galliarum. Ill d

(5) quibus, ut dignum est credere, \\y6
obtemperans Vadomarius \W6
haec et similia perpetrabat, III d

15 ad perstringendum fallendumque miris modis ab

aetatis primitiis callens, I 6

ut postea quoque ducatum per Phoenicen regens

ostendit. I y

sed re ipsa couvictus abstinuit ; II /

capto enim a stationariis militibus notario quem

miserat ad Constantium, IV de

scrutatoque siquid portaret, I y

20 epistula eius reperta est Hp'C

in qua praeter alia multa I 6

id quoque scripserat, II (5

' Caesar tuus disciplinam non habet.' I ;- 6

lulianum autem adsidue per litteras dominum

et Augustum III c^ t

25 appellabat et deum. \y 6

(IV. 1) haec ut erant periculosa et dubia, lulianus, III 6
in exitiale malum eruptura considerans, 11/

in unum omni cogitatione intenta, I y

eum incautum rape-re festinabat, III 6

30 ut securitatem suam provinciarumque locaret

in tuto ; I / <S

et iniit consilium tale. I 6

(2) Philagrium notarium, orientis postea comitem, II d
ad eas miserat partes I cV

The Clausula in Animianus Marcellinus. 131

cuius prudentiae fidebat olim sibi conperti, \y \y
eique inter multa quae pro captu instantium

rerum erat acturus \^ \y

signatam quoque chartulam tradidit, II d

mandavitque ne aperiret vel recitaret III ;' 6

5 nisi Vadomario viso cis Khenum. I/rf

(3) perrexit Philagrius ut praeceptum est, IV (^ £ S'
eoque praesente et negotiis adstricto diversis ly ly
transgressus Vadomarius flumen I 6

ut nihil in }:)rofunda metuens pace I 6

10 nihilque secus gestorum 7 simulans scire, 16

viso praeposito militum ibi degentium. II ;'

pauca locutus ex more, I ;' cV
ultro semet, ut suspicionis nihil relinqueret abi-

turus, III 6

ad convivium eius venire promisit, I /

15 ad quod erat etiam Philagrius invitatus. Ill 6

(4) qui statim ingressus rege conspecto ly I y
imperatoris recordatus est verba ; ly6
causatusque rem seriam et urgentem III 6 e
ad diversorium redit, scriptisqiie lectis (I (J) I (J

20 doctus quid agi conveniet 0^7')

confestim reversus discubuit inter ceteros. ly IV6C

(5) finitisque epulis 7 Vadomarium fortiter adpre-

hensum III 6
rectori militum arte custodiendum apud signa

conmisit, I y

textu lecto iussorum, I y

25 comitibus eius ad sua redire conpulsis, I y

super quibus nihil fuerat imperatum. Ill 6

(6) exhibitus tamen idem rex ad principis castra, I tV
iamque spe veniae omni praeclusa I y
cum interceptum notarium II y

30 et quae scripserat ad Constantium IV 6 a

comperisset iam publicata, Illj'd
ne convicio quidem tenus compellatus missus

est ad Hispanias. IV ycSe

id enim studio curabatur ingenti I y

ne luliano discedente a Galliis 11 yd

1 prudentiae v. p. 223 sq. 19 redit scripsi rediit edd.^ v. p. 211

20 conveniet F, conveniret edd.^ v. p. lyi

132 Austin Morris Harmon,

inmanissimus homo 7 provinciarum statum aegre

conpositum II y

licentius conturbaret. Illd

(7) hoc casu elatior luhanus Illrf
regis opinione citius intercept! Ill 6

5 quern profecturus ad longinqua formidabat, III 6

nihil remittentibus curis I d

barbaros adoriri disposuit II /

quos peremisse Libinonem comitem (II 6)

in congressu cum miUtibus docuimus paucis. I d

(8) 10 et ne rumor adventus sui eos ad remotiora

traduceret, II y

superato Rheno noctis alto silentio II y

cum auxiliorum expeditissimis globis I d

nihil metuentes huiiismodi circumvenit, III 6

excitatosque hostilium fragore armorum I /

15 dum gladios circumspectant et tela \y6

celeriter involavit : III 6

et quosdam occidit, I y
orantes alios praedamque offerentes dediticios

cepit, 1 6

reliquis qui remansere pacem precantibus dedit, I (5

20 quietem pollicitis firmam. I (^

(V. 1) quae dum mentibus aguntur erectis, I ;'

coniectans quantas intestinae cladis excitaverat

moles, I d
nihilque tam convenire conatibus subitis 7 quam

celeritatem la?

sagaci praevidens mente, I 6

25 professa palam defectione III y

so tutiorem fore existimavit, III y

incertusque de militum fide, I 6

placata ritu secretiore Bellona, I y

classico ad contionem exercitu convocato, III 6

30 saxeo suggestu insistens, I y

iamque, ut apparebat, fidentior, II y

haec clarius solito disserebat : III 6
{adhortatio luliani)

(2) iam dudum tacita deliberatione vos aestimo, II ;' 6

8 Libinonem v. p. 221 13 liuiusmodi ?•. /. 210 23 celeri-

tatem V. p. iHs 33 srq. v. p. 23g s.

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 133

magni conmilitones, III y

gestorum excitos amplitudine, IV 6

hoc operiri consilium II y

ut eventus qui sperantur perpendi possint et

praecaveri: Ill/d

5 plus enim audire quam loqui militem decet \6 \d
actibus coalitum . . . gloriosis, (III 6)

nee alia spectatae aequitatis sentire rectorem I y
quam ea quae laudari digne poterunt et probari. (Ill 6 1)
ut igitur quae proposui abiectis . . . absolvam (I y)
10 advertite oro benivole II y

quae sermon e brevi percurram. I y

(3) arbitrio dei caelestis I y
voljis inter ipsa iuventae rudimenta permixtus I ;'
inruptiones Alamannorum adsiduas et Francorum III 6 1

15 populandique iugem licentiam fregi, I 6

et vigore communi Romanis agminibus I ;' II /

quotiens libet Rhenum pervium feci, \d 16

contra rumorum fremitus gentiumque validarum

violentos excursus I y

stando inmobilis II y

20 virtutis vestrae nimirum tirmamento confisus. I /

(4) et haec laborum quos exhausimus Galliae spec-

tatrices III 6

post funera multa 7 iacturasque recreatae diutur-

nas et graves I ;' <^

posteritati per aetatum examina commendabunt. Ill 6

(5) at nunc cum auctoritate vestri iudicii II;'
25 rerumque necessitate compulsus I y

ad augustum elatus sum culmen, I ;' 6

deo vobisque fautoribus, II ;'

si fortuna coeptis adfuerit, II y

altius adfecto maiora, I y

30 id prae me ferens I /jf y rf
quod exercitui cuius aequitas armorumque in-

claruit magnitudo III d

domi moderatus visas sum et tranquillus, Illy 6 1

6 siqitae exciderunt^ fuisse conicw verba clans et, vel siniilia. Sed adverteii-
dtmi est verba coalitum gloriosis clausulam explere 8 poterunt Haupt

potuerunt V 9 abiectis V: lac. Eyssenh.^ Wagner abiectus sine lac.

Gardt., Valeshis. Fortasse abiectis uugis, nam ambagibus ( Wagn) pessimc sonaf.

TraxNS. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 9 Oct., 1910.

134 Austin Morn's Harmon,

et in crebritate bellorum I /

contra conspiratas gentium copias II 6

consideratus et cautus. \y6

(6) ut igitur ad versa praeveniamus III y
5 mentium societate iunctissima, II;'

sequimini viam consilii mei I 6

salutarem ut puto, \y 6

cum integritas rerum I 6

intentioni nostrae voluntatique respondeat, II y
10 et dum maioribus vacant praesidiis 7 regiones

Illyricae, II /

inpraepedito cursu tendentes I y

Daciarum interim fines extimos occupemus, ILL 6

exinde quid agi oporteat II y

bonis successibus instruendi. Ill 6

(7) 15 utque vos ex more fidentium ducam, Id

iuramento quaeso concordiam spondete mansu-

ram et fidem ly S
operam mihi navaturo sedulam et sollicitam (IV 6 a)
nequid agatur inconsultum et segne, ly6
et producturo siquis exegerit incorruptam III d
20 conscientiam meam I 6
quod nihil voluntate praeter ea quae in com-
mune conducunt 1/
adgrediar aut temptabo. Ill 6 a

(8) illud sane obtestor et rogo, I y d
observate ne impetu gliscentis ardoris I ;'

25 in privatorum damna quisquam vestrum exiliat, II y
id cogitans quod (hand) ita nos inlustrabunt

hostium innumerae strages I 6

ut indemnitas provinciarum et salus ly6

exemplis virtutum pervulgatae. *A
(finis adhortationis)

(9) hoc sermone imperatoris 7 vice aUcuius oraculi

conprobato III 6

30 mota est incitatius contio, II 6

et rerum cupida novandarum III 6

15 utque vos Pefschenig {Philol. so, p. 348) ut quos V ducam Petschenig
ducum V 17 sollicitam C. F. W. Mnller, Alrsslm^, Lofstedt
sollitam V 25 fortasse enuntiandum exiliat, ut primam efficias formam

26 hand inser. Valesius inlustrabunt Petschetijg {Phil. 50. 348) 28 per-
vulgatae virtutum legendum esse censeo

The Clausula in AiiDiu'aiius Marcellinus. 135

unanimanti consensu voces horrendas \y Yy

immani scutorum fragore miscebat, I y

magnum elatumque ducem I $

et ut experta est fortunatum III y6

5 domitorem gentium adpellans et regum. \y^

( 1 0) iussique universi in eius nomen iurare sollemniter, II y
gladiis cervicibus suis admotis I y
sub exsecrationibusdiris verbis iuravereconceptis \8 \y
omnes pro eo casus quoad vitam profuderint II y

10 si id necessitas exegerit perlaturos : III d

quae secuti rectores omnesque principis proximi II <^

fidem simili religione firmarunt. I y

(11) solus omnium licet proposito stabili lid
audacter tamen praefectus repugnavit Nebridius, II y

15 iuris iurandi nexu contra Constantivim 11/

nequaquam se constringi posse commemorans, II /
cuius beneficiis obligatus erat crebris et multis. I y cV

(12) quibus auditis cum stantes propius milites \y II <)'
acriter inflammati eum adpeterent trucidandum IIIc^ Illd

20 ad genua sua prolapsum I ;'

imperator paludamento protexit ; I y

indeque reversus in regiam, II y 8

cum antegressum eum vidisset supplicemque

iacentem orare \y \y

ut levandi causa timoris ei porrigeret dexteram, I ;' II (V

25 ' ecquid ' ait '• praecipuum 7 amicis servabitur II /
si tu manum tetigeris meam ? Id'

sed hinc quo libet abi securus.' I y

hocque audito I y

ille innoxius ad larem suum recessit in Tusciam. II ;' II y6

(13) 30 his lulianus ut poscebat ncgotii magnitudo prae-

structis, I /

expertus quid in rebus tumultuosis III /

anteversio valeat et praegressus, III d f

per tesseram edicto itinere in Pannonias, IV d c

castris promotis et signis, I y d

35 temere se fortunae commisit ambiguae. II /

(VI. 1) replicare nunc convenit tempora II d

et narrare summatim I /
quae, dum aguntur inGalliis antedicta,Constantius II y

25 s. V. p. 241 s.

136 Austin Morris Harmon,

hiemans Antiochiae IV 6

domi militiaeque perfecit. I ;'

inter conplures alios honore conspicuos II ;'

adoraturi imperatorem peregre venientem III 7 III rf

5 ordinantur etiam extribunis insignibus. II y

(2) cum igitur a Mesopotamia reversus Constantius II y
hoc exciperetur officio, II ;'
Amphilochius quidam extribuno A ?
Paphlago quem dudum sul^ Constante militantem A ? .

10 discordiarum sevisse causas C?

inter primores fratres C ?

suspiciones contiguae veritati ]:)ulsabant, I y

ausus paulo petulantius stare I 6

ut ipse quoque ad parile obsequium admittendus III 6

15 agnitus est et prohibitus, II /^P'

strepentibusque multis 1 6
et intueri lucem ulterius non debere claman-

tibus II ;'

ut perduellem et obstinatum, III y ^

Constantius circa haec lenior solito II 6

20 ' desinite ' ait ' urgere I y

hominem ut existimo sontem ly

sed nondum aperte convictum : I ;'

et mementote quod siquid admisit huiusmodi II ;'

sub obtutibus meis I d

25 conscientiae ipsius sentientia punietur, III 6

quam latere non poterit,' II y 6

et ita discessum est. II ;' ^

(3) postridie ludis Circensibus idem I fV
ex adverse imperatoris ubi consueverat spectans, I <^

30 repentino clamore sublato I ;'

cum certamen opinatum emitteretur, III y

diffractis cancellis I ;'

quibus una cum pluribus incumbebat, III ^

cunctis cum eo in vanum excussis I y

35 laesisque leviter paucis, 1 6

interna conpage disrupta I ;'

efflasse spiritum repertus ^est) solus, (I y d)
unde Constantius futurorum ([uoque praescius ,

exultabat. Ill rf

1 Antiocliiae v. p. 212 8 ^. hunc locum mendosutn esse credo : quoniodo

aiitcm sit sanandiis hacreo. v. p. lyi 37 est Accursium sccutiis addidi

The Clausula in Animianus Marcellmus. 137

(4) eodem tempore Faustinam nomine sortitus est

coniugem, \\.)'h

amissa iam pridem Eusebia, 11 Y

cuius fratres erant Eusebius et Hy patius consulares, III ^
corporis morumque pulchritudine 7 pluribus

antistante HI (V

5 et in culmine tam celso humana, I y

cuius favore iustissimo 11 /

exemptum periculis declaratumqiie Caesarem II ;' II cV
rettulimus lulianum. Ill (V

(5) habita est isdem diebus etiam Florentii ratio II cV
10 e Galliis novitatis metu digressi, I y

et Anatolio recens mortuo IVrfC

praefecto praetorio per lUyricum IV (5 f

ad eius mittitur locum, I ^

cumque Tauro itidem praefecto praetorio per

Italiam IV (Vf

15 amplissimi suscepit insignia magistratus. Ill 'V

(6) paraljantur nihilo minus externorum atque civilium

instrumenta bellorum, I y

et augebatur turmarum equestrium numerus II 6
parique studio supplementa legionibus scripta sunt II (\ C
indictis per provinciam tirociniis, IV (3

20 omnisque ordo et professio vexabatur, III 8

vestem armaque exhibens et tormenta, III <3 6

aurum quin etiam et argentum, III<5f

multiplicisque rei cibariae copias II tV

et di versa genera iumentorum. Ill (5

(7) 25 et quia Persarum rege ob difficultatem hil^erni

temporis aegre contruso I y

reserata caeli temperie 11/

validior impetus timebatur, 111(3

ad Transtigritanos reges et satrapas Il/tV

legati cum muneribus missi sunt amplis, I y^

30 monituri cunctos et hortaturi III;' A

nostra sentire I ;'

et nihil fallax temptare vel fraudulentum. 111/(3

(8) ante omnia tamen Arsaces et Meribanes, IIIj'cV
Armeniae et Hiberiae reges, I (V

35 cultu ambitioso indumentorum emercabantur III ;'

2 Eusebia v. p. 217 28 satrapas v. p. 220 83 Arsaces v. p. 214

138 Austin Morris Harmon,

et multiformibus donis, I (J

damna negotiis inlaturi Romanis (1 7)

si rebus turn etiam dubiis 11 rf

descivissent ad Persas. \yd

(9) 5 inter tot urgentia Hermogene defuncto, \y

ad praefecturam promo vetur Helpidius, Wy

ortus in Paphlagonia, W yd

aspectu vilis et lingua, \yd

sed simplicioris ingenii, incruentus et mitis, II;' ly6

10 adeo ut cum ei coram innocentem quendam

torquere I y

Constantius praecepisset, III 6

aequo animo al^rogari sibi potestatem oraret, I ;'

haecque potioribus aliis II (V

ex sententia principis 7 agenda permitti. I y
(VII. 1) 15 rigore itaque instantium negotiorum anceps

Constantius II y

quid capesseret ambigebat, III 6

diu multumque anxius II S

utrum lulianum peteret et longinqua, \\\6i

an Parthos repelleret II 7

20 iam transituros ut minabantur Euphratem, \y

haerensque tandem, I A

cum ducibus communicate saepe consilio, II ;'
in id flexus est ut finite propiore bello vel certe

mollito, I y

nullo post terga relicto quern formidaret. III;' (5

25 Illyriis percursis et Italia, ut rebatur, III(5f

lulianum inter exordia ipsa coeptorum \y

tamquam venaticiam praedam caperet. IV(5f(?)
hoc enim ad leniendum suorum metum subinde

praedicabat. Ill 6

(2) tamen ne intepesceret III y 6

30 aut omisisse belli videretur aliud latus I 6

adventus sui terrorem ubique dispergens, \y \y

veritusque ne Africa absente eo perrumperetur, III ;'

ad omnes casus principibus oportuna, III 6

velut finibus orientis egressus I y

2 Romanis inlaturi V. transposui 27 venaticiam praedam caperet

claudendi genus insolitum ; -v. p. 184. Ut cadat melius, verbis transpositis

scribe caperet praedam 28 subinde v. p. 208

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 139

per mare notarium misit Gaudentium II;'

quern exploratorem actuum luliani per Gallias II y d

aliquamdiu fuisse praestrinximus. II ;'

(3) hunc enim obsequio celeri cuncta I c^
5 consideratione gemina efficere posse sperabat I /

quod adversam partem metuet ut offensam (III 6 e)
et properabit nanctus banc oportunitatem com-

mendari Constantio II /

quern credebat procul dubio fore victorem : I y
nemo enim omnium tunc ab hac constanti

sententia discrepabat. Ill 6

(4) 10 qui cum eo venisset I y

mandatorum principis memor, I ^

per litteras Cretione comite quid ageretur edocto I /
reliquisque rectoribus, II ;'

lecto undique milite fortiore HI 6

15 translatisque ab utraqueMauritania discursatoribus

expeditis III rf

Aquitaniae etitaliae obiecta litora tuebatur artissime. II /

(5) neque id consilium fefellit Constantium : II ;'
eo enim superstite II y
nullus adversorum illas tetigit terras, I 6

20 licet Oram Siciliensem Illy

a Lilybaeo protentam ad Pachynum II yd

multitudo servabat armata, I y

si patuisset facultas I /

ocius transitura. Ill ^

(6) 25 his pro rerum ratione ut sibi prodesse existimabat

Constantius II y

aliisque minutis et levioribus ordinatis, III 6

ducum nuntiis docebatur et litteris II yd

Persarum copias in unum coactas I y

rege turgido praeeunte III 6

30 iam prope margines tendere Tigridis, 116

incertum quonam erumpere cogitantes. 1116

(7) quibus percitus ut propius agens 16
futuros possit antevenire conatus, I y
quam primum. hibernis egressus, ly

35 accito undique equitatu III 6

peditumque robore quo fidebat, III 6 e

perCapersanam Euphrate navaliponte transcurso I y
6 metuet ut scripsi-^ metueret V v. p. 172 21 Pachynum v. p. 213

140 Austin Morris Harmon,

Edessam petit I (^

uberem commeatibus et munitam, III 6 a

ibi parumper operiens II /

dum exploratores aut perfugae II ;' cV

5 motum castrorum hostilium indicarent. Ill 6

(VIII. 1) discedens inter haec lulianus a Rauracis, II;'(V

peractis quae docuimus dudum, I 6

SallustiumpraefectumpromotumremisitinGallias, II yS
Germaniano iusso vicem tueri Nebridii ; II /

10 itidemque Nevittae 7 magisterium commisit

armorum, I ;'

Gumoarium proditorem antiquum timens, I (V

quern cum vScutarios ageret II <S

latenter prodidisse Veteranionem suum principem

audiebat, III (V

et lovio quaesturam 7 cuius in actibus Magnenti

meminimus, II /

15 et Mamertino largitiones curandas : I y

et Dagalaifum praefecit domesticis, II;'

aliosque plures ex arbitrio suo 7 militibus re-

gendis adposuit II y

quorum merita norat et tidem. I yd

(2) profecturus itaque per Marcianas silvas viasque

iunctas Histri fluminis ripis, I 6

20 inter subita vehementer incertus, I ;'

id verebatur I ^

ne contem])tus ut comitantibus paucis I 6

multitudinem offenderet repugnantem, III d

(3) quod ne fieret consilio soUerti praevidit : I ;'
25 et agminibus distributis, III 6

per itinera Italiae nota I d

quosdam properaturos cum lovino misit et lovio, II y6

alios per mediterranea Raetiarum III 6

magistro equitum Nevittae commissos, 1 /

30 quo diffusi per varia II ;' S

opinionem numeri praeberent immensi I ;'

formidineque cuncta conplerent. I y

id enim et Alexander Magnus 1 6

et deinde alii plures I rf

35 negotio ita poscente periti fecere ductores. ly ly

1 Edessam v. p. 213 11 antiquum v. p. 226

The Clausula in Ammiamis Marcellinus. 141

(4) mandabat tamen egressis I;'

lit tamquam hoste protinus occursuro ' III 6

tutius graderentur, III 8

stationesque nocturnas 7 agerent et vigilias IV b h

5 ne improviso hostium invaderentur excursu. I y

(IX. 1) quibus ita, ut videbatur, apte dispositis, II /

more quo tractus perruperat saepe barbaricos, II /

contextis successibus fidens I d

porrectius ire pergebat, 1/

(2) 10 cumque ad locum venisset \y

unde navigari posse didicit flumen, I rf

lembis escensis I y

quos oportune fors dederat plurimos II (J

per alveum quantum tieri potuit II rf

15 ferebatur occulte; \y

ideo latens I 8

quod toleranter et fortiter II;' (5

nullius cibi indigens mundioris III 6

sed paucis contentus et vilibus 11 / (^

20 oppida forinsecus transibat et castra. \yb

imitatus egregium illud Cyri veteris dictum I (V

qui cum delatus ad hospitem II / rf

interrogaretur alj eo \y6

quid ad convivium parari deberet, I y

25 panem responderat solum ; I d

sperare enim aiebat 7 prope rivum se cenaturum, III;'(i

(3) fama vero, quae mille ut aiunt Unguis \8
rerum mire exaggerat fidem, I 6
per lUyrios omnes celebrior fundebatur, III 6

30 lulianum strata per Gallias multitudine regum

et gentium II y d

numeroso exercitu II y

et successibus tumidum variis adventare. IIIc^

(4) quo rumore perculsus I y
praefectus praetorio Taurus I 6

35 ut hostem vitans externum mature discessit, I ;' I /
vectusque mutatione celeri cursus publici transitis

Alpibus luliis II (V
eodem ictu Florentium 7 itidem praefectum

secum abduxit, I y

(5) levibus tamen indiciis 7 super luliani motu

Lucillianus percitus comes I (J

142 Austin Morn's Haniiori,

qui per illas regiones rem curabat ea tempestate

castrensem, I y

agensqiie apud Sirmium IV (J f

milites congregans II 6

quos ex stationibus propriis acciri celeritatis ratio

permittebat, III 6

5 venture resistere cogitabat. Ill 6

(6) sed ille ut fax vel incensus malleolus II y
volucriter ad destinata festinans, I /
cum venisset Bononeam II y
a Sirmio miliario nono disparatam et decimo, II yd

10 senescente luna ideoque obscurante noctis ma-

ximam partem, I 6

e navi exiluit improvisus : III d

statimque Dagalaifum misit cum expeditis III ;' 6

ad Lucillianum vocandum I y

trahendumque si reniteretur, (V ?)

(7) 15 qui tum etiam quiescens III 6

cum strepitu excltatus turbulento vidisset I ;'

ignotorum hominum se circulo circumsaeptum, III 6
concepto negotio II y

et imperatorii nominis metu praestrictus I ;'

20 praeceptis paruit invitissimus : IV 6

secutusque alienum arbitrium II y

magister equitum paulo ante superbus et ferox, lyd
iumentoque inpositus repentino, III 6

principi ut captivus offertur ignobilis II ;'

25 oppressam terrore vix colligens mentem. I 6

(8) verum cum primitus visus I d
adorandaepurpuraedatamsibicopiamadvertisset, III 6
recreatus tandem suique securus I y

' incaute ' inquit ' imperator et temere II ^^ <5

30 cum paucis alienis partibus te commisisti.' l^

cui amarum lulianus subridens I y

' haec verba prudentia II j'

serva ' inquit ' Constantio ; II y

maiestatis enim insigne I y

35 non vxt consiliario tibi I 6

sed ut desinas pavere porrexi.' ly

14 trahendumque eh: v. p. i6g, adn. i 15 qiiiescens v. p. 22^

16 fortasse h'gendwn est excitus turbulento (IIIcTj, vidisset etc.

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 143

(X. 1) nihil deinde amoto Lucilliano III y

differendum nee agendum segnius ratus, (I S)
ut erat in rebus trepidis audax et confidentior, \M y d

civitatem ut praesumebat dediticiam petens I ^

5 citis passibus incedebat : III (5
eumque suburbanis propinquantem 7 amplis ni-

miumque protentis I y

militaris et omnis generis turba 1 6

cum lumine multo et floribus II /d

votisque faustis I d

10 Augustum adpellans et dominum \S.y6

duxit in regiam. \S.y 6

(2) qui eventu laetus et omine, W.y ^
firmata spe venturorum III y (5
quod ad exemplum url^ium matris 1 6

15 populosae et Celebris \\.y6
per alias quoque civitates 7 ut sidus salutare

susciperetur, III y
edito postridie curuli certamine 7 cum gaudio

plebis, I (5

ubi lux excanduit tertia lid

morarum impatiens II y

20 percursis aggeribus publicis II 6

Succos nemine auso resistere II y

praesidiis occupavit ; III 6

isdemque tuendis Nevittam praefecit ut fidum. \y \y 6

cuius loci situm exnunc . . . conveniet et ostendi. (Ill 6 e)

(3) 25 consertae celsorum montium summitates III d

Haemi et Rhodopes, II y 8

quorum alter ab ipsis Histri marginibus II y

alter ab Axii fluminis citeriore parte consurgit, I y
in angustias tumulosis collibus desinentes III d

30 lUyrios interscindunt et Thracas, I ;' d

hinc vicinae mediterraneis Dacis et Serdicae, II ;' d
inde Thracias despectantes et Philippopolim, IV /d
civitates amplas et nobiles : II }' d

et tamquam natura in dicionem Romanam 7 re-
digendas nationes circumsitas prae-
noscente III 6

2 seguius ratus Novak, Curae AtJimian, Pragae i8g6 segne r. Gardt. segem
catus V 24: sine lac. V et ovi. Gardt. convenieuter ostendam Eyssenh.

Forsitan exciderit describi vel simile quid

144 Austin Morris Harmon,

ita figuratae consulto, I y

inter artos coUes quondam hiantes obscurius, II y
ad magnitudinem splendoremque postea rebus

elatis I y

patefactae sunt et carpentis, III y 6 e

5 aditibusque aliquotiens clausis I d
magnorum ducum populorumque reppulere co-

natus. I ;'

(4) et pars quae Illyricum spectat mollius edita \(S II (5
velut incauta subinde superatur : III 6
latus vero e regione oppositum Thraciis II 6

10 prona humilitate deruptum, I ;'

hincque et inde fragosis tramitibus impeditum, III 6

difficile scanditur II 6

etiam nullo vetante. I ;'

sub hac altitudine aggerum II 6

15 utrubique spatiosa camporum planities iacet 16

superior ad usque lulias Alpes extenta, \y

inferior ita resupina et panda I ;' (V

ut nullis habitetur obstaculis II ;'

adusque fretum et Propontidem. Ill ;' 6

(5) 20 his ut in re tali tanique urgenti conpositis, II ;'

magistro equitum illic relicto, I /

imperator revertitur Naessum, II 6
copiosum oppidum quo inpraepedite cuncta dis-

poneret II y

suis utilitatibus profutura. Ill 6

(6) 25 ubi Victorem apud Sirmium visum scriptorem

historicum, II /

exindeque venire praeceptum, I y

Pannoniae secundae consularem praefecit, I ;'

et honoravit aenea statua, II 6

virum sobrietatis gratia aemulandum, III 6

30 multo post urbi praefectum. I y

(7) iamque altius se extoUens, III 6 a
et numquam credens ad concordiam provocari

posse Constantium, II ;'

orationem acrem et invectivam III ;' 6

probra quaedam in eum explanantem et vitia II ;■ 6

35 scripserat ad senatum. Ill d a

22 Naessum v. p. 220

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellitius. 145

quae cum TertuUo administrante adhiic prae-

fecturam I ^

recitarentur in curia, My 6

eminuit nobilitatis cum speciosa tiducia II;'

benignitas grata. I '^
5 exclamatum est enim 7 in unum cunctorum sen-

tentia congruente, III f^

' auctori tuo reverentiam rogamus.' I ;'

(8) Tunc et memoriam Constantini ut novatoris III y d
turbatorisque priscarum legum et moris anti-

quitus recepti vexavit, I y

eum aperte incusans I y

10 quod barbaros omnium primus I 8
ad usque fasces auxerat et trabeas consulares ; III 6

insulse nimirum et leviter, II ;' is

qui cum vitare deberet \y

id quod infestius obiurgavit, III 8
15 brevi postea Mamertino 7 in consulatu iunxit

Nevittam, I ;'

nee splendore nee usu nee gloria II ;' 6

horum (cuiusqiiam) similem (II d)

quibus magistratum amplissimum 11/

detulerat Constantinus : III 6

20 contra inconsummatum et subagrestem, III y h

et fquod minus erat ferendum) I y

celsa in potestate crudelem, \y

(XL 1) haec et talia cogitanti, III 8

sollicitoque super maximis rebus et seriis, II ;- 8

25 nuntius metuendus 7 intimatur et insperatus, III y is

ansa indicans quorundam immania, II j'

inpeditura cursus eius ardentes I ;'
ni vigilanter haec quoque antequam adulescerent

hebetasset. Ill 6

quae breviter exponentur. Ill d

(2) 30 duas legiones Constantiacas (III ;')

addita una sagittariorum cohorte, I y

quas invenerat apud Sirmium, IV d ^

ut suspectae adhiic fidei III ;' £

per speciem necessitatum urgentium II ;'

35 misit in GaUias. II ;' 6

17 cuiusquam Gchn. et. Ace. oiii. V. 30 Constantiacas 7'. p. 215.

146

Ausfin Morris Harmon,

quae pigrius motae, I 6

spatiaque itinerum longa \6
et Germanoshostes truces et adsiduos formidantes, III 6

novare quaedam moliebantur, III y

5 auctore et incitatore Nigrino, \y

eqviitum turmae tribuno I y

in Mesopotamia genito : II 6

reque digesta per secreta conloquia II ^^

et alto roborata silentio, \\y

10 cum Aquileiam pervenissent, III rf

uberem situ et opibus WyS

murisque circumdatam validis, II 6

eam hostiliter repente clausere, I y

iuvante indigena plebe tumultus horrorem, I;'

15 cui Constanti nomen erat turn etiam amicum. \y}

(3) et obseratis aditibus, II;'

turribusque armatis et propugnaculis, W y 6

futurae concertationi praeparabant utilia, II;'

interim soluti et liberi : II ;' tV

20 hocque facinore ita audaci I ;'

ad favendum Constanti partibus ut superstitis IV dt

Italicos incolas excitabant III 6

(XII. 1) quibus lulianus acceptis, \y

agens tunc apud Naessum II /3 (5

25 nihil a tergo timens adversum, \y

legensque et audiens II / 6

hanc civitatem circumsessam quidem aliquotiens, (IV 6 ?)

numquam tamen excisam aut deditam, II ;' rf

inpensiore studio sibi sociare vel fraude lyd

30 vel diversis adulationum generibus II ;'

antequam mains oriretur aliquid properabat. Ill 6
(2) ideoque lovinum niagistrum equitum venientem

per Alpes I ;' 6

Noricosque ingressum, 1;'

ad id quod exarserat quoquomodo corrigendum III 6

35 redire citius imperavit. Ill d

et nequid deesset, 1 ;'

militesomnesquicomitatumsequebanturautsigna I y<S

retineri iussit per idem oppidum transeuntes, lllcV

10 Aquileiam v. p. 224 15 amicum fortasse eyriuoi' : v. p. 208, n. 1

iiiitinin V 25 an teninens ? 27 quidem aliquotiens v. p. 228 s.

The Clausula in Ainniianns Marcellinus. 147

pro viribus laturos auxilium. II /

(3) hisque dispositis, 11/
ipse haut diu postea cognita morte Constantii II y
discursis Thraciis Constantinopolim introiit : III 6

5 ac saepe doctus lentius fore id obsidium quam

verendum, III(3£

Immone cum comitibus aliis ad hoc destinato 1/3
removit exinde lovinum, ly

alia quae potiores flagitabant necessitates acturvun. I ;'

(4) ordine itaque scutorum gemino Aquileia circum-

saepta, III ()

10 concinentibus sententiis ducum conveniens

visum est \6 II d i^

ad deditionem allicere defensores III 6

minacium blandorumque varietate sermonum : I ;-
et multis ultro citroque dictitatis, III 6

in inmensum obstinatione gliscente, I;'

15 ex conloquio re infecta disceditur. II;'

(5) et quia nihil praeter pugnam iam sperabatur, Ill/rf
curatis utrubique cibo somnoque corporibus, 11/
aurora iam surgente, concrepante sonitu buci-

norum, III 6
partes accensae 7 in clades mutuas ferocientes

magisquam consultius 11/

20 elatis clamoribus ferebantur. \l\6

(6) pluteos igitur praeferentes oppugnatores III /
cratesque densius textas, I d
sensim incedentes et caute, I / (S
murorum ima suffodere 11/

25 ferramentorum multitudine conabantur, 111(5

factas plerique vehentes ad mensuram moenium

scalas ; I cV

iamque parietibus paene contigui 11/

pars lapidibus volutis in pronum conlisi 1/

pars confixi stridentibus iaculis II cV

30 retroqiie gradientes III (V

averterunt secum omnes alios metu similium 7

a proposito pugnandi detortos. I /

3 Constantii scripsi\ Constanti V 7 exinde lovinum v. p. 208

16 fortasse nil praeter pugnam (I) iam sperabatur (I) 19 magisquam

V. p. 207

148 Austin Morn's Harmon,

(7) hoc prime congressu erecti in audaciam clausi I;' Id
adsumpta tiducia meliorum III (^
parvi ducebant restantia : II ;'
mentibusque fundatis I y

5 et conpositis per oportuna tormentis .ly

indefesso labore I y

vigilias et cetera subsidia securitatis implebant. I ;'

(8) contra munitores licet pavore discriminum anxii, II r^
pudore tamen ne socordes viderentur et segnes, I yd

10 ubi parum vis procedebat I ^

Marte aperto temptata, I /
ad instrumenta obsidionalium artium 'se; trans-

tulerunt : (I /:^)

et quia nee arietibus admovendis III d

nee ad intemptandas machinas vel ut possint

forari cuniculi II ;'

15 inveniebatur usquam habilis locus, I 6

disparatione brevi civitatem Natisone amni prae-

terlabente, III ;'

commentum excogitatum est IV ^^

cum veteribus admirandum. Ill d

(9) constructas veloci studio ligneas turres 1 6
20 propugnaculis hostium celsiores III 6

inposuere trigeminis navibus II 6

valde sibi conexis I y

quibus insistentes armati uno parique ardore ly ly

prohibitores dispellere II ;'

25 conlatis ex propinquo viriljus nitebantur ; III 6
subterque expediti velites a turrium cavernis

egressi I /

iniectis ponticulis 7 quos ante conpaginarant III ;'

transgredi festinarunt, III d

indiviso negotio II ;'

30 ut dum vicissim missilibus se jietunt et saxis lyd

utrimquesecus alte locati, I ;'

hi qui transiere per pontes, I yd

nullo interpellante, III ;'

aedificii parte convulsa I ;'

35 aditus in penetralia (hostium) reserarent. (Ill d)

12 se ms. Bent/. 35 peuetrali lac. serarent /ac. iteruni F penetralia
reserarent iterum Gclen. sifie lac. hostium et sed msenii

77?^ Clausula in Ammiafius Marcellinus. 149

(10) (sed) iterum siimma coepti prudentis 1;'
aliorsum evasit ; I ;'
cum enim adventarent iam turres, \yfS
contortis malleolis madentibus pice, II y I ^

5 harundine quin etiam (et) sarmentis, (III (5 1)

ac vario fomite flammarum incessebantur, III ;'

quae quoniam incendio celeri II 8

ponderibusque trepide superstantium IV 6

inclinatae prociderunt in flumen, Yy^
10 armatorum aliqui per earum fastigia interibant, III (5

eminus confixi tormentis. I /

(11) inter quae destituti pedites post navalium so-

ciorum occasum I y

obtriti sunt saxis inmanibus, II y
praeter paucos quos morte scilicet per inpedita

suftugia II y

15 velocitas exemerat i^edum. I (5

ad ultimum certamine protracto in vesperam, Wyfs

datoque signo in receptum ex more, I ;' d

ambo digressi I;'

diei residuum animis egere disparibus. II;' II;'

(12) 20 munitorum enim maerores, \y

funera lugentium propria, II 6

prohibitores spe iam superandi firmabant, I ;'

licet ipsi quoque paucos gemebant amissos. I ;'
properabatur tamen nihilo minus I (^

25 et quantum recreandis viribus quiete et cibo

satis fuit tribute I ;'

per noctis integrae spatium, II d

reparatur lucis exordio proelium II d

incitamento tubarum. I y

(13) et quidam elatis super capita scutis, [ut pug-

naturi levius] Id

30 alii vehentes umeris ut antea scalas, 1 8

ferventique impetu procurrentes, III cV

pectora multiformium telorum ictibus exponebant. Ill d
alii ferratas portarum obices effringendas adorti I ;'
ultro ignibus petel^antur Illrf

35 vel saxis muralibus oppetebant. Ill 6

5 et inseriii : cf. p. 127^ I. ig ; /. /j/, /. 22 17 post receptiim male uiter-

punxit Gardt. 29 ut pugnaturi levius seclust\ quibits verbis inephis quidam
interpretari conatus est illud elatis Super capita SCUtis : v. p. 235

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 10 Oct., 1910.

150 Austin Morris Harmon.

quidam fossas audentius transire conati I ;'
repentinis eoram adsultibus 7 qui erumpebant

clanculo per posticas III cV ^

ruebant incaute I y

vel saucii discedebant. Ill rf

5 recursus enim ad moenia tutior ; II 6

vallumque antemuranum cespitibus fultum I <5

insidiantes ab omni discrimine defendebat. Ill 6

(14) et quamquam prohibitores 7 duritia bellorumque

artibus antistarent, III (5'
quibus nihil praetermoeniumsupereratadiumentum, III d

10 collectus tamen ex potioribus numeris miles, I 6

diuturnas ferre nequiens moras, I 6

suburbana omnia circumibat, III rf

diligenter inquirens I ;'

qua vi vel machinis posset I rf

15 patefactam inrumpere civitatem. Ill 8

(15) quod ubi patrare non poterat, II /rf
magnitudine vetante difficultatum, III ;'
obsideri remissius coepta est : II d ^
et excubiis stationibusque relictis, I ;'

20 praesidiarii milites lid

vastantes agros propinquos I y

omnibus congruentibus abundabant, III 8

raptorum pleraque 1 ;'

concorporalibus suis inpertientes. Ill y

25 mide largiore admodum jiotu \6

saginisque distenti marcebant. I ;'

(16) his relatione Immonis consortiumque cognitis,

lulianus, III (5

Constantinopoli etiamtum hibernans, I ;'

sollerti remedio turbatis consuluit rebus ; II ;' Id
30 moxque Agilonem magistrum peditum ea tem-

pestate probe cognitum miserat, II 6

ut viso honoratissimo viro I d

compertaque per eum morte Constantii II y

solveretur obsidium. II /

(17) inter quae ne cessaret Aquileiae oppugnatio, IV d
35 cum in reliquis opera consumeretur incassum, I y

1 fossas audentius Eyssenh. f. addentius V fossam fidentius Gardt.
28 pleraque .'. /. 2og 28 etiamtum v. p. 207 82 Constanti V

The Clausula in Aiiiiniauus Marccllinus, 151

placuit resistentes acriter ad deditionem siti con-

pelli : I y

et ubi aquarum ductibus intersectis III 6

nihilo minus celsiore fiducia repugnarent, III 6

flumen laboribus avertitur magnis, I 6

5 quod itidem frustra est factum. \y6

attenuatis enim avidius bibendi subsidiis II y

hi quos temeritas clauserat II 6

contenti putealibus aquis 7 parce vixerunt. I ;'

(18) quae dum ag"itantur casibus antedictis, III 6
10 supervenit ut praeceptum est Agilo, \\y6

scutorumque densitate contextus I ;'

prope iidenter accessit ; I ;'

multaque locutus et vera ly6

quibus Constantii obitum (II 6)

15 firmatumque luliani docebat imperium, 11/

non sine conviciis II /

confutabatur ut fallax. \y6

nee ei quisquam credidit gesta narranti I ;'

antequam pacta salute I ;'

20 susceptus ad pugnaculum solus I d

fide religiosius reddita II (S

ea quae docuerat replicaret. Ill 6

(19) his auditis ex diuturno angore portis reclusis I;'I;i^
omnes effusi \y

25 suscepere laeti pacificum ducem ; I 6

seque purgantes, I y

Nigrinum totius furoris auctorem I y

paucosque alios obtulerunt, III <S

eorum supplicio II ;'

30 laesae crimina maiestatis et virbis aerumnas III 6 \y

expiari poscentes. I y

(20) paucis denique post diebus 7 exploratius spectato

negotio, II y

Mamertino tum iudicante praefecto praetorio, II ;'

Nigrinus ut acerrimus belli instinctor I ;'

35 exustus est vivus, \y^

Romulus vero post eum et Sabostius curiales III 6

convicti sine respectu periculi 11;-

in studia saeviisse discordiarum III;'

B avidius scripsi : cf. II. 101. 1.3: 100.20: avidioribus V\\ Constauti V

152 Austin Morris Harmon,

poenali consumjiti sunt ferro. 1 ;' 6

residui omnes abierunt innoxii II ;'

quos ad certaminum rabiem 11^

necessitas egerat non voluntas. Ill d e

5 id enim aequitate pensata statuerat II ;'

placabilis imperator et clemens. I ;' 6

(21) et haec quidem postea gesta sunt : II <5 b
lulianus vero agens etiam turn apud Naessum 11 jhS
curis altioribus stringebatur, Illf^

10 multa utrimque pertimescens. III(V

formidabat enim ne clausorum militum apud

Aquileiam repentino adsultu I y

obseratis angustiis Alpium luliarum, III 6

provincias et adminicula perderet II 6

quae exinde sperabat in dies. Iy6

(22) 15 itidemque opes orientis magnopere verebatur, Hid

audiens dispersum per Thracias militem II 6

contra vim subitam cito coactum I ;'

adventare Succorum confinia II ;'

comite Martiano ducente. I ;'
20 sed tamen congrua instantium sollicitudinum moli 1 6

ipse quoque agitans, II 6

efticaciter Illyricum contrahebat exercitum, II ;'

pulvere coalitum Martio II 6

promptumque in certaminibus bellicoso iungi

rectori. I ;'

(23) 25 nee privatorum utilitates III;'

in tempore adflagranti despiciens, II ;'

litesque audiens controversas III 6

maxime municipalium ordinum II 6

ad quorum favorem propensior II ;'
30 iniuste plures muneribus publicis adnectebat. Ill 6

(24) ibi Symmachum repertum et Maximum Ilyd
senatores conspicuos, II y
a nobilitate legates ad Constantium misses, I 6
exinde reverses honorifice vidit : I rf

85 et potiore posthabito II ;'

in locum Tertulli I ;'

Maximum url)i praefecit aeternae, I ;'

ad Rufini Vulcatii graliam (II 6)

38 Vulcati F

The Clausula in Ainuiiauus Marcellifius. 153

cuius sororis eum filium norat. I 6

hoc administrante alimentaria res abundavit I /3
et querelae plebis excitari crebro solitae cessa-

verunt. Ill 6

(25) tunc ut securitatem trepidis rebus adferret I ;'

5 et oboedientium nutriret fiduciam, II y

Mamertinum praefectum praetorio per Illy ricum IV (5 1
designavit consulem et Nevittam, III cU

qui nuper ut primum augendae barbaricae vili-

tatis auctorem I ;'

inmoderate notaverat Constantinum. Hid

(XIII. i) 10 his ac talibus eo inter spem metumque nova

negotia commovente, III rf

Constantius apud Edessam, IV dC

exploratorum relationi])us variis anxius, II (S

in rationes diducebatur ancipites, II ;'

nvinc ad concursatorias pugnas militem struens, I (V I 6
15 nunc si copia patuisset 111(5

obsidione gemina Bezabden aggressurus ; III 6

consultans prudenter . I y

ne mox partes petiturus arctoas I y

inprotectum Mesopotamiae relinqueret latus. I tV

(2) 20 verum consiliorum ambiguum II y

retinebant multiplices morae, I 6

tardante trans Tigridem rege 1 6

dum moveri permitterent sacra, I 6

nam si permeate flumine nullum qui resisteret

invenisset, III 6

25 absque difficultate penetrarat Euphratem : I ;'

alioqui ad civilia bella custodiens militem, 116

timebat eum periculis obiectare circummuranis. III y
firmitatem moenium munimenti III 6

defensorumque alacritatem expertus. ly

(3) 30 nequiescerettamen7nevecondemnareturinertiae II;'

Arbitionem et Agilonem, III yd

(pedestris) equestrisque militiae magistros, ly

cum agminibus maximis properare coegit, I;'

non ut lacesserent Persas in proelia, Uyd

35 sed praetenturis iuncturos citerioresTigridis ripas, \d

10 eo Petschenig et V om. Gardt. 16 Bezabden v, p. 220 82 textus

incerltis. niinistros V pedestris add. Vales.

154 Austin Morris Harmon,

et speculaturos quonam rex erumperet violentus. \\\ ^
addebatque monendo saepius et scribendo UlcVf

ut si multitudo transire coepisset hostilis I ;'

referrent citius pedem. I (S

(4) 5 dumque conlimitia iussa custodiunt duces If^ Ic^

et occulta fallacissimae gentis observantur, *

agens ipse cum parte validiori exercitus II /

curabat urgentia velut pugnaturus *

oppidaque tuebatur excursu. I y

10 speculatores vero et transfugae su1)inde venientes III d
repugnantia prodebant, I y

ideo futurorum incerti \y

quod apud Persas nemo consiliorum est conscius II yfi
praeter optimates taciturnos et fidos, I ;- ^

15 apud quos silentii quoque colitur numeti. \<)

(5) accersebatur autem a memoratis ducibus impe-

rator adsidue, 11/

orantibus ferri sibi suppetias : II /

testabantur enim se non nisi coactis in unum

viribus cunctis I 6

posse impetum regis ardentissimi sustinere. Ill 6

(6) 20 quae dum aguntur ita sollicite, II;'

nuntii percrebuere certissimi 11/

quorum clara fide conpertum est H/'?
lulianum Italiam et Ilhricum cursu celeri praeter-

gressum III 6

claustra interim occupasse Succorum, \y

25 accita undique praestolantem auxilia II;'

ut multitudine stipatus armorum (\y)

pervaderet Thracias. \\6

(7) quo cognito maerore offusus Constantius II ;'
solacio uno sustentabatur III ;-

30 cjuod intestines semper superaverit motus ; I d

re tamen magnam ei difficultatem III ;'

ad capessendum consilium adferente, in(^

id elegit potissimum II;'

ut vehiculis publicis inpositum paulatim prae-

mitteret militem, II t^

7. 9. ('. p. 172 2*3 armorum /'ainiatorum Gardt, male rf. IT. 78.5;

256. 5 Jibi codd. armorum. rt I. ]S7. 12. Cf. Schneider^ Quaest. Amni., Brrol.
i87g, p. 48, n. 1.

The Clausula in AininiauMS Marcellimts. 155

inminenti casus atrocitati velocius occursurum. Ill ;■ III d

(8) omniumque consensu adprobata sententia, II;'
pergebant ut praeceptum est expediti. 111/(5'
eique haec disponent! Ill;' (5

5 luce postera nuntiatur III 6

regem cum omni manu quam duxerat II ;' 6

ad propria revertisse, III(V

auspiciis dirimentibus ; IV (5

lenitoque metu 16'
10 revocatis omnibus praeter eos quos consuetude

praesidio Mesopotamiae destinarat III 6

re versus est Hierapolim. lYyd

(9) summa itaque coeptorum quorsum evaderet

ambigens, II 6

cum in unum exercitus convenisset, III 6

omnes centurias et manipulos et cohortes Hide

15 in contionem vocavit concinentibus tubis ; I;' I 6
oppletoque multitudinis campo, I 6

ut earn ad firmanda promptius adigeret inperanda, III 6
tribunal! celso insistens (I ;')

stipatusque solito densius, II 6

20 haec prosecutus est II |S i^

ad serenitatis speciem et fiduciae vultu formato. I ;'

(adhoriatio Constantii)

(10) Sollicitus semper nequid re levi vel verbo com-

mittam I ;'

inculpatae parum congruens honestati, III (5'

utque cautus navigandi magister I ;'

25 clavospro fluctuum motibus erigens vel inclinans, 111(56

conpellor nunc apud vos. amantissimi viri, I f)

confiteri meos errores, I y

quin potius si dici liceat verum, I 6

humanitatem quam credidi II;'rf

30 negotiis communibus profuturam. Ill 6

proinde ut sciri facilius possit I d

quae sit huius concilii convocandi materia, II ;'

accipite quaeso aeqviis auribus et secundis. Ill 6 f

(11) Galium patruelem meum tempore quo confun-

dendis rebus pertinaciter Magnentius inhaerebat, III f)

18 insistens Bentl. : sistens F, cf. 1. 143. 4, 236. 25 ; II. 10. 11. 19 sti-
patusque Benth : stipatoque V: cf. I. 91. 19 : 2-54. 22 : 266. 27 passim.

156 A US fin Morn's Harmon,

(quem obruere vestrae virtutes), I ;'

potestate Caesaris sublimatum III S

ad orientis praesidium misi. Id
qui cum a iustitia per multa visu relatuque

nefaria defecisset, III 6"

5 arbitrio punitus est legum. ly 6

(12) atque utinam hoc contenta fuisset Invidia, II /

turbarum acerrima concitatrix ; III 6
et angebat nos una sed securg doloris praeteriti

recordatio. IV 6

at nunc aliud accidit, II 6

10 ausim dicere praeteritis maestius, II d

quod per fortitudinem vobis ingenitam II ;'

adiumenta caelestia coercebunt. Ill S
(13j lulianus quem, dum circumfrementes Illyricum

nationes exteras oppugnatis, III 6

tuendis praefecimus Galliis, II 6

15 levium confidentia proeliorum 1116

quae cum Germanis gessit semermibus II;'

ut vecors elatus, I;-
adscitis in societatem superbam 7 auxiliaribus

paucis 1 6
feritate speque postrema 7 ad perniciosam

audaciam promptis, 16

20 in noxam publicam conspiravit, III 6

aequitate calcata, I ;'

parente nutriceque orbis Romani, I ;'
quam tumentes spiritus tamquam favillas esse

facturam I ;'

perinde vit scelestorum ultricem, ly

25 et ipse expertus I ;'

et docente antiquitate III ;'

facile credo. I<5

(14) quid igitur superest, II 6

nisi ut turbinibus excitis occurramus, III 6

30 subcrescentis rabiem belli 1 6

antequam pubescat validius II;'

celeritatis remediis oppressuri ? Ill 6

nee enim dubium, favore numinis summi praesente I ;'

cuius perenni suffragio 7 damnantur ingrati, I y

S fortassc angeret 24 perinde Eysseith. deinde V: textus mcerttis

scelestorum Va/rs, sceleste laetorum V per dittographiam s. factorum. Gardt.

The Clausula in Amiinanus Mairclliuus. 157

ferrum impie praeparatum III 6

ad eorum interitum esse vertendum I ;'

qui non lacessiti sed aucti 7 beneficiis pluribus II cV

ad insontium pericula surrexerunt. III 6

(15) 5 ut enim mea mens augarat, II yd

iustitiaque rectis consiliis adfutura promittit, I y

spondeo quod si ventum fuerit comminus, II cV

ita pavore torpescent I ;'

utnec oculorum vestrorum vibratae lucis ardorem I ;'

10 nee barritus sonum perferant primum. 1(5

(finis adhortationis)

(16) omnes post haec dicta in sententiam (traxerat)

suam ; (I d)

hastasque vibrantes irati, ly

post multa quae benevole responderunt, (IIJ^<^)

petebant duci se protinus in rebellem. 111(^6

15 qua gratia in laetitiam im]ierator versus ex metu, Iy6

contione mox absoluta, III y 6
Arbitionem ante alios faustum 7 ad intestina bella

sedanda I y

ex ante actis iam sciens, \y6

iter suum praeire I y

20 cum Lanceariis et Mattiariis et catervis expe-

ditorum praecepit, I y

et cum Laetis itidem Gomoarium, IV 6

Venturis in Succorum angustias opponendum, III S

ea re aliis antelatum III 6

quod ut contemptus in Galliis II y 6

25 erat luliano infestus. I y

(XIV. 1) in hoc rerum adversarum tumultu ly

haerens eius fortuna iam et subsistens III y 6 e

adventare casum vitae difficilem II y

modo non loquentibus signis 1 6

30 aperte monstrabat. ly

namque et nocturnis imaginibus terrebatur, III 6

et nondum penitus mersus in somnum lyd
umbram viderat patris 7 obtulisse pulchrum in-

fantem I ;'
eumque suscejitum 7 et locatum in gremio suo I (S

5 mensam V tmde noli facere mens iam (7'. p. 207) 11 traxerat Gelen.
ihant//(7 II j>t : cf. 1. 112. 14 : 1 [. G8. 4 s. \?> responderunt scripsi: responderant V

158 Ai(sti}i Morris Harmon,

excussam sibi proiecisse longius sphaeram I iS

quam ipse dextera manu gestabat. I ;•

id autem permutationem temporum indicabat, III d

licet interpretaiites placentia responderent. Ill 6

(2) 5 post haec confessus est iunctioribus proximis II 6

quod tamquam desolatus III d

secretum aliqviid videre desierit II y

quod interdum adfuisse sibi squalidius aestimabat ; III fS
et putabatur genius [esse] quidam tutelae salutis

adpositus II ;'

10 eum reliquisse mundo citius digressurum. III(^

(3) ferunt enim theologi II 7
in lucem editis hominibus cunctis 1 6
(salva firmitate fatalij I y
huiusmodi quaedam 7 velut actus rectura numina

sociari, III d

15 admodum tamen paucissimis visa \6

quos multiplices auxere virtutes. I y

(4) idque et oracula et auctores docuere praeclari, I ;'
inter quos est etiam Menander comicus, lid
ajjud quern hi senarii duo leguntur : I ;'

{versus omisi)

(5) 20 itidem ex sempiternis Homeri carminibus 11/

intellegi datur I (3

non deos caelestes cum viris fortibus conlocutos, III 6

nee adfuisse pugnantibus vel iuvisse, Illds

sed familiaris genios cum isdem versatos. I ;'

25 quorum adminiculis freti praecipuis II;'

Pythagoras enituisse 7 dicitur et Socrates III <3 g

Numaque Pompilius 7 et superior Scipio II d

et, ut quidam existimant, Marius II d
et Octavianus cui Augusti vocabukmi delatum

est primo, I (3

30 Hermesque Termaximus et Tyaneus Apol-

lonius, II;' 11^3

atque Plotinus I;'

ausus quaedam super hac re disserere mystica lid

alteque monstrare I ;'
quibus primordiis 7 hi genii animis conexi

mortalium II ;'

9 esse seclnsi Gelenhnn secutus

The Clausula in Anmtianus Marcellinus. 159

eas tamquam gremiis suis susceptas tuentur I ;'

[quoad licitum est]

docentque maiora si senserint puras \y 16

et a conluvione peccandi I ;'

inmaculata corporis societate discretas. I ;'
(X"\^ 1) 5 ingressus itaque Antiochiam festinando Con-

stantius II ;'

ad motum certaminum civilium ut solebat III 6 a

avide surrecturus III (S

paratis omnibus exire properabat inmodice, II ;'

renitentibus plurimis murmure tenus : I 6

10 nee enim dissuadere palam audebat quisqiiam

vel vetare. Ill 6 e

(2) autumno iam senescente profectus, I /

cum ad suburbanum venisset I ;'

disiunctum exinde tertio lapide, II d

Hippocephalum nomine, 116

15 lucente iam die \y6

cadaver hominis interfecti III 6

dextra iacens capite avulso conspexit I ;'

contra occiduum latus extensum ; I y

territusque omine, II 6

20 finem parantil^us fatis, I d

destinatius ipse tendebat ; I ;'

venitque Tarsum, I 6

ubi leviore febri contactus I y

ratusque itinerario motu I 6

25 inminutae valetudinis excuti posse discrimen I ;'

petit per vias difficiles Mobsucrenas, III 6

Ciliciae ultimam hinc pergentibus stationem III tV

sub Tauri montis radicibus positam ; II 6

egredique secuto die conatus I y

30 invalente morbi gravitate detentus est ; II ;' l,

paulatimque urente calore nimio venas I 6

ut ne tangi quidem corpus ems posset 1 6

in modum foculi fervens, I 6

cum usus deficeret medelarum III 6

35 ultimum spirans 1 6

deflebat exitium. II ;'

1 quoad licitum est seclnsi tit interpolata vel ex inargine in textitin intro-
dncta : v. p. 235 32 e'lus 7'. /. 224

160 Austin Morris Hannoji,

mentisque sensu turn etiam integro II ('i
successorem suae potestatis statuisse dicitur

lulianum. Ill ^

(3) deinde anhelitu iam pulsante letali conticuit, 11 ;-
diuque cum anima conluctatus iam discessura, Ill;'(^

5 abiit e vita I ;- 6

tertium nonarum Octobrium II y
imperii (tricesimo octavo; vitaeque anno quadra-

gesimo (quarto) (1 d)

et mensibus paucis. I d

(4) post quae supremis cum gemitu conclamatis, III 6
10 excitisque lamentis et luctu, I yd

deliberabant locum obtinentes in aula regia

primum 1 6

quid agerent quidve moliri del^erent ; I ;'
paucisque occulte super eligendo imperatore

temptatis I ;'

incitante ut ferebatur Eusebio II ;-

15 quem noxarum conscientia stimulabat, III 6

cum novandis rebus imminens ol:)sisteret lulianus, 111 6
mittuntur ad eum Theolaifus et Aligildus tunc

comites, II ;' 6

mortem indicantes propinqui, 1 ;'

et oraturi ut mora omni depulsa I y
20 ad obtinendum obtemperare sibi paratum ten-

deret orientem. Ill 6

(5) fama tamen rumorque loquebatur incertus 1 /
Constantium voluntatem ordinasse postremam, 1 ;'
in qua lulianum ut praediximus scripsit [et]

heredem, ijy)
et his quos diligeljat fidei commissa detulit et

legata. llldt

(6) 25 uxorem autem praegnantem reliquit, 1 y

unde edita postuma eiusque nomine appellata II 6 III 6
cum adolevisset matrimonii iure copulata est

Gratiano. Ill;' (3
(XVI. 1) bonorum igitur vitiorumque eius differentia vere

servata I ;'

7 tricesimo octavo, rt quarto nc/i/. Jl'agnci-. J/ai quidem opinione nihil
inutandmn : sin aittem niuldnditiii, alio inodo id fieri oporfrt 23 et delevi

Acciirsium sccutns

The Clausula in Aiiuiiianus Marcelli/iiis. 161

praecipua prima conveniet expediri. Ill cV

imperatoriae auctoritatis cothurnum ubique custo-

diens, II ;'

popularitatem elato animo contemnebat et magno ; I ;' A
erga tribuendas celsiores dignitates inpendio

parens, I (^

5 nihil circa administrationum augmenta I y

praeter pauca novari perpessus, I ;'

numquam erigens cornua militarium. IV (V

(2) tiec sub eo dux quisquam cum clarissimatu pro-

vectus est : II ?' ?

erant enim ut nos quoque meminimusperfectissimi. IV 6

10 nee oceurrebat magistro equitum pro vinciae rector, I 6
nee eontingi ab eo civile negotium permittebat. Ill 6
sed cunctae castrenses et ordinariae potestates III 6
ut honorum omnium apicem II 6

priseae reverentiae more I d

15 praefectos semper suspexere praetorio. II ;'

(3) in conservando milite nimium cautus, I (V
examinatormeritorumnonnumquamsubscruposus, III 6
palatinas dignitates velut ex quodam tribuens

perpendiculo : IV d'

et sub eo nemo celsum aliquid acturus in regia II ;' 6
20 repentinus adhibitus est vel incognitus, 11/^7

sed qui post decennium officiorum magisterium
vel largitiones vel simile quicquam
esset recturus I ;'

apertissime noscebatur. Ill 6

valdeque raro contigerat II y .

ut militarium aliquis II 6

25 ad civilia regenda transiret, I ;'

contraque non nisi pulvere l^ellico indurati III 6

praeficiel3antur armatis. I y

(4) doctrinarum diligens adfectator, III 6
sed cum a rhetorica per ingenium desereretur

obtvuisum I y

30 ad versificandum transgressus I ;'

nihil operae pretium fecit. I 6

(5) in vita parca et sobria II yd

20 melhis caJit si est secludis, tct fiat adliibitus vel iucognitus (IV) : sed
vide p. 2oy 22 magisterium vel largitiones quintam efficr't fornmni

162 Austin Morris Harmon,

edendi potandique moderatione valetudinem ita

retinuit tirmam I 6

ut raros colligeret morbos, I 6

sed eos non procul a vitae periculis : 11 y

id enim evenire corporibus a lascivia dimotis

et luxu I ;- d

5 diuturna experimenta 7 et probationes medendi

monstrarunt. I y

(6) somno contentus exiguo II ;'
cum id posceret tempus et ratio, \\y^
perque spatia vitae longissima II y
inpendio castas I 6

10 ut nee amaro ministro I ;'

saltern suspicione tenus posset redargui : II y

quod crimen etiam si non invenit malignitas tingit I 6
in summarum licentia potestatum. Ill 6

(7) equitandi et iaculandi 7 maximeque perite diri-

gendi sagittas I ;'

15 artiumque armaturae pedestris I /

perquam scientissimus. IV 6

quod autem nee tersisse umquam nares in publico II y^
nee spuisse nee transtulisse in partem alterutram

vultum 1 6

aliquando est visus \y6

20 nee pomorum quoad vixerat gustavisse (III 6)

ut dicta saepius praetermitto. Ill 6

(8) dinumeratis carptim bonis quae scire potuimus, II y
nunc ad explananda eius vitia veniamus. Ill 6
cum esset in negotiis aliis II 6

25 principibus mediis conparandus, III 6

si adfectatae dominationis amplam quandam

falsam reperisset aut levem, 1yd

banc sine tine scrutando, I ;'

fasque eodem loco ducens et nefas, \y6

Caligulae et Domitiani et Commodi \ly6

inmanitatem facile superabat; IIIc^

30 quorum aemulatus saevitiam II ;'

inter imperandi exordia 11/

cunctos sanguine et genere se contingentes stir-

pitus interemit. Ill S

10 trxtiis incertus mare miuistro V 14 perite malim peritus

20 vixerat gustavisse scripsi vixerat gustaverit V

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcelliims. 163

(9) addebatur miseronim aerumnis I y
qui rei maiestatis imminutae vel laesae defere-

bantur III ;'

acerbitas eius 7 et iracundae suspiciones III /

in huiusmodi cuncta distentae. I y

5 et siquid tale increpuisset III ;'

in quaestiones acrius exurgens quam civiliter IV;'f

spectatores adponebat his litibus truces ; I (5

mortemque longius in puniendis quibusdam I y

si natura permitteret II y

10 conabatur extendi, I ;'
in eiusmodi controversiarum partibus etiam Gal-

lieno ferocior. II ;'

(10) ille enim perduellionuni crebris verisque adpetitus

insidiis, II ;'

Aureoli et Postumi et Ingenui IV dt

et Valentis cognomento Thessalonici III y
15 aliorumque plurium 7 mortem factura crimina ali-

quotiens lenius vindicabat : III 6

hie etiam ficta vel dubia II ;' 6

adigebat videri certissima II ;'

vi nimia tormentorum. Ill 6

(11) iustumque in eiusmodi titulis l\S
20 capitaliter oderat, II d

cum maxime id ageret ut iustus aestimaretur

et Clemens. I ;■ 6

et tamquam ex arida silva I 6

volantes scintillae I y

flatu leni ventorum I /

25 adusque discrimina II /

vicorum agrestium II ;'

incohibili cursu perveniunt, II y

ita ille quoque ex minimis causis I cV

malorum congeries excitabat, III 6

30 Marci illius dissimilis principis verecundi, III 6

qui cum ad imperiale culmen in Syria Cassius

surrexisset, III 6

epistularum fascem ab eo ad conscios missum, I 6
perlatore capto sibi oblatum, I y

6 quam v. p. 227

164 Austin Morris Harmon,

ilico si^natum exuri praecepit, 1 y

agens adhuc in Illyrico, H/^J'

ne insidiatoribus cognitis II d

invitus quosdam habere posset offenses. I ;'

(12) 5 utque recte sentientes quidam arbitrabantur, III ;'

virtutis erat jiotius indicium magnae I d

imperio eundem Constantium sine cruore cessisse I ;'
quam vindicasse tarn inclementer. Illj'd

(13) ut Tullius quoqiie docet, I d
10 crudelitatis increpans Caesarem II 6

in quadam ad Nepotem epistula, II ;'

' neque enim quicquam aliud est felicitas ' inquit I 6
• nisi honestarum rerum prosperitas. [II ;■]

vel ut alio modo detiniam, [II j']

15 felicitas est fortuna adiutrix consiliorum bonorum, [I ;-]
quibus qui non utitur [*]

felix esse nullo pacto potest. ['^]

Ergo in perditis impiisque consiliis [II ;']

quibus Caesar usus est [*]

20 nulla potuit esse felicitas [II ;']

feliciorque meo iudicio Camillus exvilans [*]

quam temporibus isdem Manlius, [*j

etiam si — id quod cupierat — regnare potuisset.' [*]

(14) id Ephesius quoque Heraclitus adserens monet I d
25 et ab inertibus et ignavis III 6 a

eventus variante fortuna I ;'

superatos aliquotiens viros fuisse praestantes : I ;'
illud vero eminere inter praecipuas laudes, I tV

cum potestas in gradu I ;' 6

30 velut sub iugum missa nocendi saeviendi(que)

cupiditate et irascendi Ill/rf

in arce victoris animitropaeum erexeritgloriosum. Ill 6

(15) ut autem in externis bellis hie princeps fuit

saucius et adflictus, III (S e
ita prospere succedentibus pugnis civilibus

tumidus, II (3

et intestinis ulceribus rei publicae IV (5^

35 sanie perfusus horrenda : I ;■

quo pravo proposito magisquam recto vel usitato, III yd

triumphalis arcus ex clade provinciarum III ;'

12 s. Tyrrell T'l. p. 2g2 : cpistnla no)i alibi traditur 30 (que) Gr/.

The Clausula in Ammiamts Marcellinus. 165

sumptibus magnis erexit 7 in Galliis et Pamioniis, IV ^£
titulis gestorum adfixis, I ;'

quoad stare poterunt moiiumenta lecturis. I ;'

(16) uxoribus et spadonum gracilentis vocibus et pa-

latinis quibusdam I /

5 nimium quantum addictus I y

ad singula eius verba plaudentibus II y

et quid ille aiat aut neget \y6

ut adsentire possint obseriiantibus. IV ^^

(17) augebat etiam amaritudinem temporum lid
10 flagitatorum rapacitas inexpleta, III 6

plus odiorum ei quam pecuniae conferentium ; IV 6
hocque multis intolerantius videbatur III 6

quod nee causam aliquando audivit I ;'

nee provinciarum indemnitati prospexit I y

15 cum multiplicatis tributis et vectigalibus vexa-

rentur. Ill 8

eratque super his adimere facilis quae donabat. III(5t

(18) Christianam religionem absolutam et simplicem 11;- (3
anili superstitione confundens, I ;'
in qua scrutanda perplexius quam conponenda

gravius (versabatur), (III (5)

20 excitavit discidia plurima, II ^
quae progressa fusius aluit concertatione ver-

borum, I ;'
ut catervis antistitum iumentis publicis ultro ci-

troque discurrentibus IV rf

per synodos quas appellant, III(5£
dum ritum omnem ad suum trahere conantur

arbitrium, II y

25 rei vehiculariae succideret nervos. I d

(19) figura tali situque membrorum : I y
subniger, luce oculorum edita, cernensque acutum, I ;'
moUi capillo, 1 ;'
rasis adsidue genis I c\

30 lucentibus ad decorem, III(5f

usque ad pubem ab ipsis colli continiis longior II (5
brevissimis cruribus et incurvis. Ill 6 s

[unde saltu valebat et cursu.]

(20) pollinctum igitur corpus defuncti ly

8 possint obseruantibus 7'. pp. 182, 233 19 versabatur insend

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 11 Oct., 1910.

166 Austin Morris Harmon,

conditumque in loculis II /(^

lovianus etiamtum protector domesticus II y
cum regia prosequi pompa 7 Constantinopolim

usque iussus est II (5 cj

prope necessitudines eius humandum. I ;'

(21) eique vehiculo insidenti 7 quod portabat reHquias, II /

5 ut principibus solet, I 6

annonae militaris offerebantur indicia II y

(ut ipsi nominant probaj I rf

et animalia publica monstrabantur III (5

et ex usu crebrescebant occursus. I y

10 quae et alia horum similia II /

eidem loviano imperium quidem I rf

sed vicarium et umbratile (IVc^t)

ut ministro rerum funebrium portendebant. III ^

12 sed vicarium scripsi, sede et assum V^ sed et cassum Acciirs.^ unde
sed cassum Gelen. v. p. 173

Chapter i. Nature of the Clausulae.

The most casual glances at the pages of the foregoing selection
from the Histories cannot but reveal the fact that Ammianus secured
a rhythmical effect in his prose through the constant repetition of
a limited number of accentual clausulae. It is almost equally obvious
that the nature of each clausula is chiefly determined by two
factors which must enter into it — the accentual cadence pure and
simple, and the caesura. Founding our classification of the clausulae,
therefore, upon these two essential features, we shall discuss first
the divers accentual cadences or forms that Ammianus uses, and
next the various word-groups or types by which each form is
rendered. Were Ammianus' clausulae purely accentual, we should
not need to carry our investigation any farther; but although accent
is always the principal factor in his rhythm, syllable-quantity is not
left entirely out of account in it. We must therefore give this
element a place in our discussion of the nature of his clausulae,
which we shall conclude with a brief inquiry into the matter of
their origin.

rORMS.

The following table displays the various forms that occur among
the clausulae in Book XXI (I) and in the collection of sentence-
endings previously described (II), and records the frequency with
which they recur. In compiling these statistics I have departed
from Gardthausen's text only in two sentence-endings. ^ In the
latter collection all direct quotations are left out of account; in
Book XXI only two citations from Cicero.

Table of I'orms.
Coll. I

J I r\j n'^ rsj r^ r\j 648

II r^n^r^i<jr^^ 385

Cadences [III r'ij c^ r^ r^ •'^j r<j r^^ 345

IV n\jr^r\jr^r\jr^r\j(\j 47

1425

Coll. II

Total

873

1521

202

587

681

1026

31

78

1787

3212

' Vol. I, p. 48, 1. 14 I read triclini with the Ms. for triclimi ; I.
88. 1 I punctuate after princeps and construe ob devotionem with what
follows. Sti-ictly speaking I should not have introduced the first of these
corrections into my tables, but, once admitted, it was easier to leave it
than to remove it.

168

Austin Morris Harntoii,

Brouo-ht forward

Irregular
Cadences

A r^ r\j r\j n^ r^ r\j
B f^ r\j r\j r\j r^ r\j n^
C r'Li r>^ 1^ rsj
Y) rLi r\j rvj r\j r\j
^ Uncertain

1425

Coll. ]

19

5

7

4

\_

36~~

1461

1787

3212

Coll.

II

Total

13

32

3

8

5

12

2

6

1

2

24

60

1811

3272

These results manifest unequivocally the uniformity of Ammianus'
rhythm. His style is chiefh^ characterized b}' the inordinate re-
petition of the cadences I, II and III, .which are presented in about
95 per cent of the clausulae. This proportion remains approximately
the same whether we take all the clausulae into consideration or
only those which end a sentence, although the discrepancy in the
relative frequency of II and III in the two collections reveals the
fact that II is used more often within the sentence than at its end,
while the reverse is true of III. There can be no doubt, then,
that these three are par excellence the favored forms.

Since cadence IV is counted in tens whereas the cadences just
mentioned are counted in hundreds, I must set forth the reason
that has governed me in classing it with these. It is primarily
that IV would naturally be a rare clausula, because when it is con-
structed in two words it requires that the sentence or kolon end in
a word of 5 or 6 syllables with antepenultimate accent imilitibus
obscurissimis , constanti sollicitndine), and such words are not common.^
Furthermore, its occurrences are guaranted by sound texts and its
rhythm emphasized by responsion, since most of the cases in Book
XXI stand in close proximity to one another.^ It is therefore a good
clausula, though, in comparison with the others, not a frequent one.

In connection with these four clausulae two other forms 'come up
for discussion which are so rare that I have not found a single
certain instance of either one in either of my two collections. In
spite of this their status is quite different from that of the cadences
which I have listed as irregular. These forms are :

VI PLir\jrK/r^r\jr\jr\jr'Lir\jn^

' The actual cases are for the most part present participles in the dative
or ablative plural, and superlatives.
2 See p. 204.

The Clausula in Amiiiia/iits Marcellinus. 169

Of V I can cite five examples in Ammianus : II. 24. 25 pondere cir-
cumveniretur ; 212. 27 venerint allegationum; 242. 18 ve'ritus ut adhiic
durdiHem ; 268. 20 eminuit at Sebastidiii ; 269. 19 e'rat cum moderatione.
To these should perhaps be added three ambiguous clausulae in
Book XXI.^ Of VI I have only two instances : II. 79. 19 postea
Co}istantinop6leos \ 214.6 Ae'sopi cavillationibus. It is possible that
some instances of one form or the other may have escaped me,
but they cannot be numerous. Consequently both the forms are
extremely rare. But we must not let this move us to doubt their
legitimacy, for all of the texts in which they occur seem to be
sound and are very difficult to assail. Moreover, their rarity finds
adequate explanation in the motive that prompted their use : they
were brought into employment simply as a means of handling long
words which' could not easily be disposed of otherwise.^ It is
noteworthy that, if we except the three ambiguous cases of V in
Book XXI, all the examples come from the last 9 books — in fact,
5 of them froni the last two books. This appears to indicate a late
recognition of these forms, and a slightly increasing tendenc}' to
use them, once they are recognized. The fact that their occur-
rences are not in responsion but isolated is somewhat surprising.
I can account for it only on the hypothesis that Ammianus regarded
them as extensions of III and IV, and did not feel that they broke
the rh3thm. It is obvious that forms V and VI stand in the same
relation to III and IV in which the latter stand to I and II. Using
metrical terms to define accentual rhythm (as we do in dealing
with English poetry) we may say that each of these clausulae has

1 P. 142, 1. 14 trahendumque si reniterehir^ listed as doubtful (see below) ;
p. 154, Q>S fal/acissintae geittis obse7-7'dntiir axidi tirgentia velut pugnatiiriis — two
clausulae in apparent responsion, listed as examples of A (see below).

* I note tlu-ee cases in wliicli a final word of 6 syllables witli penul-
timate accent is not preceded by an antepenultimate Avord, but they are
all corrupt. In I. 83. 5 correxerit et libera I /tate the Ms. reads correxit et
libertaie (III), whicli should be retained in spite of tlie change in tense
eget-it-correxit. (v. Lofstedt, Beitrdge ziir Kcnnt)iis d. spdter. Lett. p. 70 ff.)
In II. 12. 14 amittit intempestuosos the ms. lias inteinpesiiosos., corrected into
intempesiuosos by a later hand : the reading of Accursius intempestivos is
in better accord with the usage of Ammianus. In IT. 64. 20 somniorum
adsiduitate we have a case of hidden corruption : a verb has fallen out
(v. Giinther, Phil. 50, p. 69) and it is most natural to supply it at the
end of the clause, after adsiduitate. As for words like cavillatioiiibus.^ I
have not found any instance of their employment before a pause except
in the two cases cited above.

170 Atistin Morris Harmon,

a dactylic-trochaic cadence — they differ from one another only in the
number of trochees that follow the dactyl.^ The longer forms, in
consequence of this similarit}', might well be used out of responsion,
and the lack of it is certainly not a suflicient reason for expelling
them from our text.

Coming now to the four cadences A, B, C and D, listed as irregular,
we may sum up their status in saying that the}^ were certainly
avoided by Ammianus and probably avoided altogether.

None of these cadences is of such a sort as to be naturally un-
common. In a text in which no attention is paid to rhythm (there
are few, if any, such among the ancient authors, but a modern
writer of Latin will do for a test) all of them must needs occur
very frequently. But in Ammianus, taken all together, they are less
frequent in our text than the cadence IV, which would naturally
be very rare. This fact can only be interpreted as evincing a strong
disinclination on the part of Ammianus to employ these cadences.
It justifies us in the statement that his rhythm is as much charac-
terized in a negative way by their avoidance as it is in a positive
way by the abnormal frequency of the cadences I, 11 and III.

Under these circumstances it is natural to draw the inference that
the cadences in question were avoided altogether, and that their
appearance in our text is to be attributed to corruption. And in
fact a study of the individual passages in which they occur makes
it evident that not one of the four cadences can be called valid
with any degree of certainty : on the contrary it is extremely prob-
able that they are each and all corrupt. To put the reader in
possession of sufficient evidence on this point I submit a full list of
the instances found in Book XXI and in my collection of sentence-
endings. ^

' Tims I pnndere veiiit = dactyl -|- trochee, III poudere cjrcum-
veiiit =^ dactyl -\- 2 trochees, V poiidere ci'rcumveniretur = dactj^l -|- 3
trochees; II pondere veniet = dactyl -\- 1^2 trochees (or dactyl-dactyl),
IV pondere circumveniet = dactyl -j- 2 7^ trochees (or dactyl -trochee-
dactyl), VI pondere circuravenientibus = dactyl -j- 3 '/a trochees (or
dactyl-trochee-trochee-dactyl).

^ Cases from the former som-ce are cited in the order In which they
occur, with references to page and line of this treatise; those from the
latter are grouped according to the cadence represented, and the refer-
ences are to page and line of Gardthausen's edition. V = Vat. Lat. 1873,
of which all other existing codices are copies.

The Clausula in Animianus Marcelliims. 171

Book XXI.

(1) p. 125. 1. 18 multa et urgentia Omit et. Cf. curabat urgentia 254. 8 ;
residua urgentia 294. 8.

(2) 127. 21 coniectura fallerentur. interdumque Read fallerentur

interdum. quae with Bcntlcy and Madvig.

(3) 128. 7 prospecta revertatnur Perhaps proposita rev. Cf. I.

14. 28: II. 237. 22: II. 126. 11 proposita veniamus.

(4) 129. 14 Vadomarii exorsos Read N^.^iOvcv^x\\'. for evidence that

Amrnianus uses both forms of the genitive see p. 2j^.

(5) 131. 19 diversorium rediit Read redit {Amrnianus always ac-

cents rediit, interiit, etc. on the penult: v. p. 211).

(6) 131. 20 agi conveniret F conveniet, which should be retained,

in accordance with the usage of Amrnianus: cf. I. 20. 7,
and Petschenig Phil, /o p. J48.

(7) 133. 8 potuerunt et probari The sense demands poterunl, as

Haupt has pointed out (Ind. Led. Berol. iSjf).

(8) 133. 9 abiectius absolvam V abiectis : // is better to assume

a lacuna with Wagner and Eyssenhardt than to read
abiectius tvith Valcsius and Gardthausen.

(9) 134. 17 sedulam et solitam F sollitam : r<?a^ sollicitam with

Mil Her and Kiessling; so also Lofstedt, Eranos, igoc^.
(10) 134. 28 virtutum pervulgatae T'ra/w/o^m^ pervulgatae virtutum
gives a better order, since Amuiianus is very fond of
tr a lectio.
136. 8 ff . Amphilochius quidam extribuno A

(11—14) Paphlago quern dudum sub Constante militantem A

discordiarum sevisse causas C

inter primores fratres C

suspiciones contiguae veritati pulsabant I

The arrangement which I give is merely an attempt
to extract some sort of rhythm from this passage with-
out resorting to conjecture. That it represents the effect
which Aninu'anus intended to produce I do not believe,
since the first pause would naturally follow Paphlago
rather than fribuno, and there is no pause after causas.
If we may assume that he accented Paphlago on the
penult {v. p. 216) this would give us a regidar cadence
(I y) 0.1 Ih^ ^^^<^ of the first kolon : the following (quem
— pulsabant) may have constittded a single long kolon,
or may possibly conceal corruption.

172 Austin Morris Harmon,

(15) 136. 37 repertus solus Insert est, with Accursius: cf. I. 70.14.

(16) 138. 2 Romanis inlaturi Transpose.

(17) 139. 6 metueret offensam Read metuet ut : see Hassenstein,

p. Jjff- and Scliickinger, p. 'jff. The following verb
properabat in the same clause has already been altered
to properabit by Kiessliiig, and there is no reason for
retaining metueret. C/. I. 289. 31 laederet ut offensus.

(18) 143. 2 segne ratus V Segem catus : read segnius ratus with

Novak {Ciirae Anunian., Prague i8cj6).

(19) 143. 24 conveniet ostendi ?^conveniet et ostendi : £j'55^;///rtn/^

reads convenienter ostendam. To me it seems that an
infinitive {perhaps describi) has fallen out of the te.xt
before conveniet.

(20) 145. 17 horum similem IVith Gelenius I have inserted cuius-

qiiam : This emendation is not, however, necessary to
secure a regular clausula, for gloria horum similem
gives cadence IV.

(21) 149. 5 quin etiam sarmentis In conformity to the usage of

Ammianus I would insert et before sarmentis [cf 232. 8 ;
240. 23), but emendation is not necessary as far as con-
cerns the rhythm, for etiam sarmentis gives I ;'.

(22) 149. 29 ut pugnaturi levius These words are to be bracketed

as a marginal gloss which has crept into the text, and
which embodies anerroneous explanation o/'elatis — scutis.
The author of the gloss never saw a testudo in oper-
ation. {On glosses in the text, see p. 2jjff.)

(23) 151. 14 Constanti obitum It is not at all certain that we should

look for a clausula here, but one is easily obtained by
reading Constantii.

(24) 152. 38 Vulcati gratiam Read Vulcatii.

(25—26) 154. 5 ff. damque conlimitia iussa custodiunt duces
et occulta fallacissimae gentis observantur *
agens ipse cum parte validiori exercitus
curabat urgentia
velut pugnaturus *
oppidaque tuebatur excursu

At first glance this seems a case of responsion in A :
it is not certain. hocvever,for(\) the responsion may be in
V: fallacissimae gentis observantur, urgentia velut pug-
naturus, or (2) /'/ may be that the clausulae are III;',
gentis obseruantur (/>. 2jf) and velut propugnaturus
{Gelenius).. The latter view seems to me preferable.

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 173

(27) 154. 26 stipatus armatorum V armorum, zvhich should be re-

tained: cf. p. I J 4, note.

(28) 155. 18 celso sistens Read insistens : cf. p. ijy, note.

(29) 157. 11 ibant suam The verb is omitted in V: ibant Haupt

{a suggestion on which he himself laid no iveight).
Read traxerat ivith Gelcnius, comparing I. 112. 14 and
11. 68. 4 ff.

(30) 157. 13 benivole responderant Read responderunt.

(31) 159. 1 quoad licitum est A gloss on the foregoing words.

(32) 160. 23 scripsit et heredem The word et {which is entirely out

of place in the text) is not to be found in the earlier
editions.

(33) 162. 20 vixerat gustaverit Read vixerat gustavisse : the cor-

ruption is due to the influence of the preceding word
vixerat aided by a certain similitude in the endings
-erit and -isse.

(34) 165. 19 conponenda gravius /// my opinion a tvord {perhaps

versabatur) has been lost after gravius : as the text
stands, the relative clause zvhich ends in these words
has no verb, for excitavit is the verb of the main
clause.

(35) 166. 12 sed cassum et umbratile V sede et assum, hence sed

et cassum Accursius {Eyssenhardt), sed cassum Ge-
lenius {Gardthausen). I am convinced that the proper
reading is sed vicarium. This is just as near the read-
ing of V as Accursius' sed et cassum, but in the latter
conjecture et is indefensible and cassum is nearly synon-
ymous with umbratile. On the other hand vicarium
not only is recommended by the rhythm but adds point
to the sentence. Jovian, riding on the bier of Con-
stantius, received homage in lieu of the dead emperor :
it portended for him imperium quidem sed vicarium,
et umbratile ut ministro rerum funebrium. And there
is especial point in the adjective in view of the con-
fusion caused among the soldiers when he was pro-
claimed emperor by the similarity of the names lovianns
and lulianus {see XXV. 5. 6).

174 Austin Morris Harmon,

Sentence-endings

{arranged according to cadence)

A

(1) 1.26.28 agitari conperissent f^ nove res agitari conpissent;

in this one needs only to correct conpissent to coe-
pissent with Gelenius. On coepi and coeptus sum see
Novak, p. 8o.

(2) 102. 5 stetere cuneati V cunctanti, Reinesiiis cuneati, Read

CLinctantes.

(3) 103. 16 verbis hortabatur. The intolerable baldness of this

expression makes it evident that something has fallen
out of the text. The ivhole passage needs an over-
hauling, for as Langen long ago pointed out {Emend.
Ammian., Dilren, iS6j), the words cautior sui in the
following sentence constitute an undeserved slur on
Jidian^s courage of which Ammianus would have been
incapable. As an attempt at reconstruction I offer'.
verbis hortabatur et (factis), quoniam .... Augustus
existimabat cautior sui. hostium(que) tela etc.

(4) 118. 32 signis ostendentes Fsignibus {followed in Cod.Petrinus),

v^ and Gelenius signis. For his signis read msigrnhw^i.

(5) II. 250. 1 cruditate festinal^at V {cf. Eyssenhardt) festinabat :

read firmabat.

(6) 273. 20 quibus petebantur Pronounce qiiibus: see p. 228.

(7) I. 70. 26 difficile pervadunt V pervaduntur, Haupt pervadunt.

The passage should be so reconstructed as to retain
pervaduntur.

(8) 82. 13 munera curabant Valesius inserted munera: substitute,

perhaps, munus.

(9) 175. 21 febrium arescunt V arescentes, Gelenius arescunt;

arescentes is perhaps defensible on the assumption that
contra is a preposition.

(10) 194. 18 eximit abruptis Read exemit {Gelenius).

(11) 84. 11 exarserat in mains in is conjecturally supplied'.

better exarsit in mains.

(12) 191. 32 globos se inmisit se Gelenius : read sese or trans-

pose.
(13j II. 206. 29 secius hoc modo F rectus : read secus with Accursius,
comparing I. 320. 23. {On the inconsistent accentuation
hoc modo, huiusmodi see p. 210

The Clausula in AtiimiauHs Marcellinus. 175

B

(14) I. 18. 11 lapsorum ac lasciviam Fad: read atque : cf. I. 16. 26.

(15) 142. 5 dedendi se consilium. Read sese or transpose.

(16) 159. 3 afuit quin caperer Ffuit: perhaps this reading should

be retained. But quin may be pronounced as a dissyl-
lable : V. pp. 22"], 22<).

C

(17) I. 145. 7 destinatas remearunt sedes Miiller inserted ad before

destinatas : / should put it before sedes.

(18) 145. 23 ad res consurrexit novas V consurrexerit {Clark).
(19)11.161. 4 misitplebem Transposition must be resorted to {^\&he.m.

misit conductam) unless one reads conducticiam m. p.

(20) 196. 8 trucidari securum fecit Haupt conjectured secure fecit,

Eyssenhardt reads securum efficit. In my opinion
Ammianus wrote secure praecepit : cf. II. 173. 21;
I. 62. 31; 94. 33; 137. 27.

(21) 237. 19 portendatur norunt V portetur, Eyssenhardt porteu-

datur. I should prefer •po?,c\i\\r : c/.poscebatur II. 168.12.

D

(22) II. 226. 3 esse [invidiam] sociam Gardthausen brackets invi-

diam : read individuam with Valesius.

(23) 271. 25 arduo in munimento conditos Set arduo after con-

ditos : V reads ardor, which shows that the eye of the
scribe ivas caught by ardor, below. Hence the trans-
position might easily occur.
The only irregular cadence which, on a priori ground, might be
expected to occur in Ammianus is that type of A in which the
word-division follows the tirst unaccented syllable ((ille properdbat).
As Meyer has pointed out, there are some writers who use this
clausula, though few of them employ it in any great frequency.^
He accredits Ammianus with sporadic use of it, on the basis of
about 15 cases in 800 sentence-endings. But in this matter there
is a discrepancy between Meyer's results and mine.^ Among the
1461 clausulae in Book XXI I find 10 cases, among 1811 sentence-

1 See p. 121, and Ges. Abh. p. 260, p. 263 Anm. 1.

* The difference is probably due to the fact that long and careful
study of the Histories has enabled me to ascertain a number of peculi-
arities in the pronunciation of Ammianus which he was naturally unable
to notice in the hasty examination of a limited material.

176 Austin Morris Harmon,

endings 6: in all, 16 cases in 3272 clausulae, not one-fourth the
proportion that Meyer's figures assign to Ammianus. Furthermore,
a careful scrutiny of the preceding list will disclose that, in point
of fact, there is very little evidence for the occurrence of this clau-
sula in our author at all.

Of the 10 instances in Book XXI, 4 are isolated ; in 2 of the 4
(nos. 6 and 27) the reading of the manuscript, which gives a reg-
ular clausula, is every wa}' preferable, and of the other two (10, 16)
we may say at least that transposition gives a better word-order
in view of Ammianus' excessive fondness for traiectio. The other
6 instances form 3 cases of apparent responsion. But 2 of these
cases must be ruled out of court, for in one of them (11—12) it is
unlikely that the irregular cadences precede pauses, and in the
other (25—26) the interpretation of the cadences as A is uncertain.
In the remaining case (2—3), we have two sentences ending in
Meyer's clausula, separated by about half a page of text : in this
interval there is a quotation from Cicero, in which the same clau-
sula terminates a sentence. At first sight this seems a striking ex-
ample of responsion, motivated b}' the Ciceronian cadence. It is
indeed the strongest example that I have been able to find in Am-
mianus, but it is not as satisfactory as it appears. For in the first
place, however natural such a procedure may appear to us, nowhere
else in Ammianus is an irregular cadence in a quotation balanced
by irregular cadences in the text.^ This case is therefore exceptional,
and the very fact that seems to argue in favor of it is in reality
an argument against it. Secondly, the first occurrence of the clau-
sula is easily disposed of l^y revising the punctuation. Thirdly,
the sentence that follows the quotation is a revocatio, marking a
return to the subject. But elsewhere in Ammianus these revocationes
always terminate in a regular cadence.^ Moreover, in the phrase
ad explicanda prospccta revertanmr we have a figurative use of pro-
specta which is unparalleled : the word usually emplo3'ed in this
sense is proposita. On all these grounds I consider that we should
read proposita here.

1 Cf. XV. 5. 23 : XVI. 1. 5 ; XIX. 12. 18 ; XXII. 7. 4 ; XXIX. 5. 24.

In the fu'st citation, however, the reader should be warned that ipshts
proniulgatafn does not correspond with fortnna revocatur^ but (in virtue
of Ammianus' pronunciation ipsius^ on which see p. 211) with the prece-
ding sententiam Tiillianam^ with which it also rhymes.

* Cf. proposita veniaimis II. 126. 11 : proposittim revertanmr I. 14. 28 ; propo-
siti revertanmr II. 237. 22 ; propositi revertetur L 228. 29 (where Gardthausen
admits the mistaken conjecture rei^erteretur) \ restautia venianms I. 72. 3;

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 177

Turning- now to the instances of Meyer's clausula among the sen-
tence endings, we find still less evidence than in Book XXI. Four
out of the six cases (1, 2, 4, 5) are not founded on the manuscript,
which gives in each instance a regular clausula. Another (3) is
certainly to be held corrupt on internal evidence, and the sixth may
be explained on the basis of the peculiar but not otherwise unsub-
stantiated pronunciation qiiibus} None of these cases is supported
by responding clausulae in the surrounding text.

If the testimony for this clausula is weak, it is weaker still for
the other types of A, and for the cadences B, C and D, for the
admission of which there is no a priori argument. Yet it differs
only in degree and not in kind, since there are examples of each
of these clausulae that are superficially sound. More than that, we
have among the sentence-endings (17, 18) an example of responsion
in C quite as specious as the case in Book XXI just discussed, and I
can cite one in D (II. 215. 15 proferrc gestiens = aequitatis tramitem)
which can only be disposed of by transposition in both clausulae.

For this reason it would not be logical to admit Meyer's clausula
and exclude the others. Nor would it be logical to hold that cases
of responsion in any cadence are valid, and to shut out the isolated
cases, for in the first place the responsions are entirely too few in
proportion to the isolated cases, and in the second place they are
no more difficult to dispose of than the latter. Therefore we must
assume either that Ammianus made an illogical and extremely in-
frequent use of all these irregular cadences, or that he did not
employ any of them at all.

Between these alternatives the decision must be made, it seems
to me, in favor of the latter, when the general condition of
the text of Ammianus is taken into consideration. Were his text-
tradition perfect, we should of course have a perfect reproduction
of his clausulae; but, as we have already seen, it is so far from

mstittita iavt revertamtir I. 201. 13 ; ordines r. II. 100. 24 ; ordinem r. II.
315. 25; fleximus r. II. 137. 27; dedinavimus r. II. 214. 18; tandem ad
coepfa I. 75. 23 ; referamus ad coepta II. 103. 21 ; ad ordinem remeabo coep-
torian I. 306. 32 ; (cf. II. 134. 18) redejindum ad texttim I. 23. 6 ; pergamns ad
reliqua I. 284, 7; II. 66. 5; ad residua narranda pergamns II. 63. 15 ; rfde-
amtis ad cetera II. 151. 22 ; hinc ad exorsa I. 128. 3 ; repetetur ordo gestorum

I. 30. 29 ; redeam unde diverti I. 87. 14 ; II. 246. 10 ; regrediar institiitum

II. 209. 28. The list is, I think, complete; transitiones^ marking the
introduction of a new subject, are of course omitted.

» See p. 228, 230.

178 Austin Morris Harmon,

perfect as to be nearly the worst possible.^ Consequently, in case
Ammianus consistently restricted himself to the use of the regular
forms, we could not expect to tind a consistent reproduction of these
forms in our text of his work. We should look for the introduction
of a moderate number of irregular cadences of all descriptions ;
naturally some few of these cadences would be in close enough
proximity to suggest responsion, and in some few of them the cor-
ruption would be latent. And this is precisely the state of affairs
that we find in our text. The probabilities, then, are strong against
the validity of any of the irregular cadences.

We may therefore bring to a close our long discussion of the
forms employed by Ammianus with the statement that except for
two forms V and VI, used for the handling of long words and so
infrequent as to play but an infinitesimal part in his rhythm, he
seems to have used only the four forms I-IV, which, even in our
corrupt text, are well-nigh universal.

TYPES.

To name the types in which the four regular forms occur I have
adopted the system devised by Zielinski for the quantitative clau-
sula. This consists simply in taking the longest form (IV) and as-
signing a Greek letter to each place in it where a caesura may
occur. Thus :

^ y (V t ^ 1] &

Consequently a clausula having but a single caesura will be denoted
by a single Greek letter, which will be /3 if the caesura follow the
first syllable, ;' if it follow the second syllable, and so on: a clau-
sula having two or more caesuras will be denoted by two or more
Greek letters, each determined after the method just described.
A clausula having no caesura is signified by the letter u.

Under this nomenclature the types which occur in Book XXI
(Coll. I) and among my sentence-endings (Coll. 11) are classified in
the following list, which, for the second collection, also gives com-
plete statistics as to the length of the first word in each type.

» See p. 122.

The Clausula in Amniianus Marcellinus. 179

Table of Types.
Form I.

Coll. I Coll. II

nosse confingit 171

perculsus abscessit 140

353 509 periere conplures 143 509

posteritatis ostendit 45

obstinationis extremae 10

90
104 223

24
5

22

38 112

46
6

23 24

1

2

3]

(5

210

223

passibus citis
confluxerit Romam
inferentibus plura
seditionibus possint

j'd

75

112

vilis et parva
defensor et cautus
aestimatur et salus
instituere non pauca

/3

7

24

sol aestimatur
Thebais adpellatur

^r

1

2

hinc ad exorsa

^r6

1
1

3

(id prae me ferens)
toleraturi

648 873

Coll. I Coll. II

Form II.

semper innocui

21

vertuntur indaginem

25

195

99

properabat intrepidus

41

velocitate letabilis

11

adulatione flagrantium

1

opifex callidus

18

104

28

suppeteret copia

7

civitatibus perviis

3

asper et vehemens

7

68

46

ademptis et dentibus

19

instrumenta non levia

17

lacesseretur ut ceteri

3

vivLis exustus est

8

7

26

fateri conpulsus est

8

374 199

99

28

yd 68 46 ademptis et dentibus 19 46

26

180 Austin Morris Harmon,

Coll. I Coll. II
374 199

remeare j^ermissus est 9

continuare praeceptus est 1

(5^ 4 2 acta vel dicta sunt 1

cadavera tracti sunt 1

(Tyaneus Apollonius)

haec et similia 1

(turn apud Naessum)

(haec prosecutus est)

Form III.

/3

1

^Y

3

1

^6

2

r^

1

885 202

Coll. I Coll. II

magna decernebatur 25

y 37 55 monstrare poUicebatur 18 55

altiora meditaturum 9
perrumperetur impropugnata 3

collibus abdiderunt 284

6 285 540 memoria commendarent 197 540

confidentius inruperunt 51

incitatissimo tribuentes 8

foedus ut apparebat 16

yd 83 43 certabant et dignitate 13 43

documentis et vindicanda 12

felicitatis ut videbatur 2

de 35 36 rexerat pro praefectis 25 36

docebimus et aperte 9

exercitibus et salutem 2

advectae sunt per Catonem 2

obiecti sunt praeter morem 2

fuisse quod evenit 3

Form IV.

tristium clamitantibus 6 15

discrimine penetrabile 9

laturus et necessaria 4
24 19

yds 4

yH

ya 1
345

2

2
3

681

Coll. I
y 18

Coll. II
15

yd 6

4

The Clausula in Amniiatiiis Marcclliuus. 181

Coll. I

Coll. II

24

19

12

4

7

r&

76

iC

7^6

47

31

^f 12 4 eminuit ut docebimus 4

<y^ 6 2 hactenus super Alpibus 2

obsidia praeter solituin

<5i9- 1 5 fVy- lidentius absolutus est 3 5

Y iS 5- ita ut opinati sunt 1

(^6^ restituit ut praeceptum est 1

(possint obseruantibus)

(commentum excogitatum est)

1(76^) posse quod ablatum est 1 1

(missus est ad Hispanias)

On the evidence of the statistics from the second collection the
<[uestion of the length of the first word in the clausula may be dis-
posed of summarily. In any type of any form the first word may
begin either with the accented syllable (as in nosse confiiigil) or
with an}' number of unaccented syllables (as in percidsus ahscessit,
etc.). Moreover, there is no indication of any eftbrt to make the
first word either balance the last or contrast with it in length. The
length of the first word therefore appears to be a matter of com-
plete indifference to Ammianus, and we may dismiss it from fiirther
consideration.

For the ' typology ' of Ammianus' clausula, the first point to claim
our attention is that there is essential agreement between the in-
terior and the final clausulae.^ Both exhibit the same types, and,
roughly speaking, in the same general proportions. One or two
types, to be sure, are somewhat more common before strong pauses
than before weak ones, and vice versa ; but these are minor stylistic
features which we ma}' leave out of account for the present.^

The normal clausula in Ammianus is composed of two words ;
four-fifths of his cadences are constructed in this way. In forms I
and II the only possible two-word types are /:?, 7 and (\, all of
which occur. The 7 types {periere coiiplnrcs, propcrabat intrepidiis)
and the 6 types {passibiis citis, opifex callidns) are very frequent,

1 Of course the statistics from Book XXI include the final clausulae
there, but they form only a small proportion of the whole, and do not
affect the general conclusions drawn from a comparison of the two
collections.

- See p. 202.

Trans. Conn. AcAn., Vol. XVI. 12 Oct , 1910.

182 Austin Morris Harmon,

while the /3 types {sol aestimatur, Tyaneits Apollonius) are rare. Of
II /3 the only instance is the one cited, an interior clausula in
Book XXI (158. 30) : I /3 is more frequent, with 31 cases in all.^
The reason for their infrequency is not far to seek. The first word
in the /? types must be either an oxytone or an accented mono-
syllable. But there are very few native oxytones in Latin {adhuc,
iliac, etc.) and though the adoption of Greek accentuation in loan-
words gave Ammianus a certain number of proper names with the
requisite accent (as Tyaneits, Thebai's), even with this addition the
number of oxytones at his command was very small. And as for
monosyllal)les, those that naturally bear a strong accent are in-
frequent (the nouns) and such as are frequent (the auxiliary sum,
conjunctions etc.) do not ordinarily bear a strong accent except
when their stress is increased by special emphasis or sentence-
accent.2 Consequently combinations capable of producing these
types would seldom have suggested themselves spontaneously to
Ammianus, and we can say that he made use of them when they
occurred to him, without either seeking or avoiding them.^

In III and IV the only possible two-word types are ;' and 6 ;
here again they all occur. But IV ;' is very infrequent. The list
shows but one case (the sentence-ending possint obseriiantibiis), and
I have noted only 17 more in the whole of Ammianus, all of which
are interior clausulae.* The type can only be constructed by using
a six-syllabled word with antepenultimate accent, and its infrequency
must be ascribed in the main to the rarity of such words.

In point of rhythm there is a question regarding the ;' types of III
and IV that should be raised here, although we cannot settle it. Since

' Outside of the collections 1 note half a dozen cases of II (i : they are —
I. 17. 29 urbs venerabiUs \ 28. 3 7trhs perspicabilis \ 228. 22 est supervacu7i7n \
271. 7 ad id pertinentia ; II. 223. 28 7'ex potentisshinis ; 237. 3 est vohiptabile.
They are all interior claiisulae : the type does not occur at all in finals.

' As in iustum quid sit igno7-dnti II. 224. 23. See p. 206 f.

' It may be that some of the clausulae wliicli I have classified under
Illy J and IV yJ" are really I /i and 11 [3 : i. e. instead oi felicitdtis ut
vidcbdtur perhaps we should read lit videbdtnr. But rather than trust the
subjective criterion afforded by my own notion of the probable sentence-
accent, I have preferred the objective one of listing under III and IV
all cases in which the monosyllable is preceded by a word accented on
the penult. Thns felicifatis ut videbatur counts as IllyJ', while impendio
est formidanda counts as I /i.

* I. 81. 8 constanti sollicitudine ; 133. 14 inntsari malivolentia \ I. 183
10 ; 190. 8 ; 269. 9 ; 273. 18, 24 ; 279. 27 ; 290. 30 ; 304. 19 ; 317. 26 ; II.
63. 17: 80. 16; 165. 14; 259. 28; 260. 15; 270. 8.

The Clatisula iji Aiitiiiiaiius Marcelliuits. 183

all words of four syllal)les in Latin must have had a secondary accent
on the first syllable, the cadence in i) types would seem to be collibus db-
dide'riint, militibus obscurissimis. If we might believe that the sec-
ondary accent in polysyllables always fell on the second syllable
before the main accent [exisiimabat, malivolentia), the effect of the
;' types would appear to be the same. Since, however, it is doubtful
if we can make this assumption, we must admit the possibility of
a slight discrepancy in cadence between different examples of the
Y types (perhaps magna dece'rne'batur, but altiora tncditatnrnni). This
discrepancy, if genuine, cannot have been very great.'

Turning now to the three-word clausulae we find that types in
three words are made by the use of an atonic monosyllable or dis-
syllable, and are frequent. Theoretically, a monosyllable may be
introduced either between the accents or after the last accent. In
the first case the possible types are {i y and ;' d in forms I and II,
y 6 and 6 t in forms III and IV. In III and IV both of the two
possible types occur with equal frequency. Both in I and 11 the
type ;' cV is common, while the type li y is extremely rare, for the
same reason that accounts for the rarity of the simple types I /3
and II t^. As to the introduction of a monosyllable after the last
accent, it is virtually impossible in I and III, where the monosyllable
would have to be preceded by a trisyllabic oxytone to produce the
cadence in a three-word clausula.^ Consequently it is not surprising
that we find no examples. On the other hand it is quite possible
in II and IV, and frequently occurs, giving in II the types (^ l, (haec
prosecutus est), y l, {vh'us exustus est) and d ^ {cadavera tracti sunt),
in IV the type 6 0^ {fidentius absolntus est)?

While nearly all the instances of the three-word clausula are
occasioned by the employment of atonic monosyllables in the way
just indicated, there are a few cases produced by the use of a
lightly accented dissyllable. Naturally instances of forms I and II
made in this way are very rare. There is no case of I [i (V in the
table, but I note one good exam])le of it at the end of a sentence
(XL 124. 12 adhiic apud Persas). Of II (i 6 there is one instance

■ See p. 221 f.

''■ Fictitious examples are «//;/f Thebais est, (I), optima Thebais est (III).
The csesura "would be somewhat more likely to occur in a four-word clau-
sula, {usiis est, ars est), but does not.

^ Cf. II. 9. 9 Poliorcete's appellatiis est, a sentence-ending, and two cases
of IV y b- "which I find outside the collections : I. 279. 27 parare adsiiefacti
stmt ; 290. 30 sumil exaniniati siint.

18i Austin Morris llaruion,

listed (I. 25i?. 16 turn apiid Ndcssuni) and another (I. 247. 29 ti'inc
apiid Ndessum), which may be unintentional. In III and IV the
phenomenon occurs more frequently, and gives rise to two types,
;' f and 6 l.- The ;' f types are peculiar in that the dissyllable in
each case but one is due to the vocalization of u in the rela-
tive pronoun. The instances are, in form III : siispectae adhuc
fidei (I. 247. 14), reiaturi quae audirent (I. 7. 5), explicare quae
poscebat (\. 135. 26), /uisse quod evenH (I. 140. 15); in form IV posse
quod ablatnm est (I. 129, 21, a four-word clausula) and possibly
exsurgens quam civiliter (I. 261. 15-16). All are final clausulae
except the last.^ Of (S "Q I find only 2 cases in form III in my
collections, both of which happen to be four- word clausulae (I. 8. 30
obiecti sujit praetcr nwreiu, II. 191. 21 iulatum est ante dictae), and
5 cases of IV (I. 72. 2 hdctenus super Alpibus, 124. 31 obsidia
praeter soiitum, 235. 27 discubuit inter ceteros, 241. 19 venaticiam
praedam caper et, 247. 13 invenerat apud Sirmium). To these may
be added a few cases from the rest of the work: in form III, I.
11. 22. quicquam geri posset; 223. 23 relinqucrat apud Carras:
292. 23 creverat ultra modum ; 294. 4 conlapsa est terrae motu ;
328. 28 gignitur apud Persas; II. 34. 8 caelitus posse labi; 41. 20
dimicans inter primos (cf. 172. 13) ; 43. 14 arcentia praeter pauca ;
95. 25 quiescere prope flunien (cf. 176. 31); 164. 11 numquam facta
fuigit; 269. 9 altius semet ferret — in form IV, I. 22. 16 aliud satis
validmn ; 130. 28 egerat praeter solitwn ; II. 53. 4 quaesita sunt licet
noxia; and perhaps I. 219. 25 magistrum et quosdam alios? Notice
that while Ammianus freely admits dissyllables with light accent,
he is chary of using those with heavy accent.^

1 For other cases outside the collections see p. 227, list of instances
in which the relative counts as a dissyllable.

' 2 Neither militi quies data (I. 225. 29) nor copia data captavi (II. 152.
34) belong here. In the latter phrase Novak rightly takes exception to
captain \ he suggests deletain, but I read conipirssqiii (copssam) which is
very close to captain (V) and com pt a in (G). The other clausula is to be
compared with nocturna qtiies daret II. 48. 31, where since the first word
is penultimate, the cadence cannot have been III. Both are to be ex-
plained as form I, quies being pronounced with the accent on the vocalized
u {qiiies da ret, qiiies data). Cf. qiiics oportiina (II. 22. 8) curdtis et qihe'te
(I. 312. 6) : anrl p. 228 f.

' In iiihnquam facta fingit (i. e. fingit ea quae numquam sint facta),
in venaticiam praedam caperet and the like, the sentence- accent must have
raised the stress of the first word at the expense of the second. In
pntentissimi regis instar (I. 312. 21) the preposition appeal's to bear a heavier
accent than its noun.

The Clausula in Anunianus Marcellinus. 185

Turning now to the four-word clausula, we find that there are
only 15 examples of it; one in form I (I. 237. 19 id prae me. fe'rcyis),
one in form II (I. 146. 17 acta vel dicta sunt), 7 in III (5 of the
type obiecti sunt praeter morem), and 6 in IV, of various types.
Since the four-word clausula can be produced only by making use
of two atonic words, and since such combinations would naturally
occur seldom, we can hardly be surprised at its infrequency.

We have still to discuss the one-word clausula. Though the
forms III and IV cannot be constructed in a single word, it is, of
course, possible to get I and II with a polysyllable, provided its
secondary accent fall in the right place {archipirdta). But Ammianus
certainly avoided such types, and may have avoided them altogether.
For with few exceptions the words capable of rendering them are
used in the construction of two-wo'rd clausulae in other forms, and
in most of the few exceptions the text is obviously corrupt.

The only polysyllable that is commonly found before a pause in
Ammianus is the word of five syllables with accented penult.^ In
my two collections it occurs 98 times ; in 92 cases it is preceded
by another word accented on the penult, thus producing III y.
The 6 exceptions are as follows :

I. 55. 24 negotium praeter inquiri — where we need only pro-
nounce negotium to get the usual III ;-.

100. 24 graviter toleraturi — excise graviter, that the sentence
may run as it ought, non sine ultimorum conatu toleraturi.

236. 21 quam celeritateni — perhaps vocalization of u and shift
of accent (qiiam : p. 228).

244. 19 trahendumque si reniteretur — this should be read as a
case of the rare form V.
II. 183. 21 accolae Igilgitanitin—Y has gilgitanuni, which w'ould
give form III: Forbiger suggests Igilgilitaniwi, which
would give form VI {Alt. Geog. II. 872. 89j.

241. 25 aenmlae tenieritatis— inverting, we get a better re-
sponsion, alter per Tliracias comes, dux alter exiiiosus,
aemulae ambo temeritatis.

To these we may add the following list, which comprises all the
instances in Ammianus that precede a full stop.

* Words of 6 syllables with antepenultimate accent {sollicititdine) are
always used to produce \S y (see p. 182); words of 6 syllables with
penultimate accent, and of 7 syllables with antepenultimate accent
{circjtmveniretur, circumi'enioittbtis) to produce the rare forms V and YI
(see p. 168).

186 Austin Morris Hartiioji,

I. 215. 8 subito renttntiasse — V. redundasset : read redundasse.
228. 29 propositi rcverteretnr—\ revertetur, which should be

retained : Lofstedt, Eranos 1909, p. 4.
273. 20 veiiiae permitteretur — a case of synizesis (yeniae); see

p. 223.
281. 21 tempore disserehamus — V disseremus; as the reference

is uncertain, the reading should not be altered.
310. 34 aliqnid praesagicbat — N praesagebat; read praesagabat
(preferable to praesagibai, cf. Neue, Formenl. Ill, 293).
The next sentence also ends in III ;'.
II. 51. 28 JluiJiinis absorbebantur — V adorbibantiir; read sorbe-
bantnr. Cf I. 162. 35.
84. 30 praesidio custodiebat ~re.3.d custodibat.
138. 1 uiolibus conmuniebat — V conmovebat; read conmunibat,

comparing I. 163. 7 (Neue, Formenl. III. 317-18).
162. 21 agitur et practercunda — perhaps we should read atque

for et.
188. 17 provincia pervaderetiir — S3'nezesis.
In view of the state of the text in most instances, it seems to me
highly unsafe to assert that any of them ought to be interpreted
as examples of I without caesura. The reason for the avoidance
of this clausula is to be sought in the fact that its first accent was
much weaker than the same accent in other types of I, so that it
did not produce a cadence satisfactory to the ear.

We find, then, that Ammianus used practically all the possible
types of each form, avoiding only the one-word types of I and II.
The types that are really common are not many; they are sum-
marized for the sake of convenience in the following conspectus
in which the statistics are ])ased on Book XXI.^

I

II

III

IV

;- 353

;' 202

f) 235

(5 19

d 210

6 108

;' 37

yd 6

yd 75

;'d 68

yd 33

()6 35

dc 12

61 6

638

378

340

43

1399

All other types 10

7

5

4

26

648

385

845

47

1425

' Clausulae in II with C ftesura {vhnts exustus est) and in IV with ^
{fidentius absolutus est) are here classified on the basis of the main caesura
(i. e. Ilyf as II y, VLS^ as II (f, IVcT* as \N 6).

The Clausula in Amniia/ins Marcellinus. 187

In the main the common types owe their frequency, the un-
common types their infrequency, to conditions involved in the
nature of the language.

QUANTITY.

The tables which stand at the end of this dissertation record the
scansion of the clausulae comprised in my collection of sentence-
endings.^ In the face of the returns which they present one would
be impelled at first glance to deny that Ammianus observed quantity
at all. No form, nor even any type, bears evidence of consistent
treatment. On the contrar}-, each form shows examples of almost
every possible variation in metre : in I we find 1 1 different scansions
out of 16 possible to the form, in II 20 out of 32, in III 27 out of
32 and in IV 18 out of 64, in only 31 cases. These facts undoubt-
edly point to neglect of quantity.^ Yet it would be a mistake to
infer from them that Ammianus neglected it altogether. The tables
themselves supply evidence enough to controvert such an assump-
tion in the predominance of the scansion — ^ ^=^ in form I and

in the fact that this form has its third syllable long in 834 out of
870 cases.

The attitude of Ammianus in regard to quantity may be precised
in these terms— in accented syllables he is entirely indifferent to it,
and in unaccented syllables he observes only quantit} due to position.-^
Let us first take up the proof of the statement that he disregards
quantity in accented syllables.

^ Since Ammianus does not elide, syllables standing in hiatus are
credited with their natural length in these tables (e. g. maritnm adscisci^
exemplo adversani). In conformity, moreover, to the usage of contemporary
poets I have marked final o short in moneo, magnitudo, moneudo and
the like, final c short in fere, etc. The tables have not been carefully
revised, because they signify so little. Consequently I cannot vouch for
their absolute accuracy, but the amount of error in them cannot be
material on account of the care expended in compiling them.

- There is no foundation upon which to base any hypothesis that
Ammianus observed quantity solely in responsion. On this point the
reader can easily satisfy himself : I shall refer only to the passage quoted
on page 203 where the responsion is more obvious than in any other passage
in the Histories. There the clausula fere trecentis corresponds to tempus
extretimm^ and ingressits adiiltain (a hexameter-tag !) to bellorum aerumnas.

* The latter statement, strictly taken, is not quite true. But his pref-
erence for a syllable long by nature over a short syllable, or vice versa,
was so slight and so inconsistently exercised as to be virtually neg-
ligible.

188 Austin Morris Harmon,

QUANTITY UNDER ACCENT.

In Latin words quantity under accent is not as free to vary as
it is in Greek. As a result of the penultimate law an accented
penult in any word of more than two syllables is bound to be long.
Only monosyllables, dissyllables and antepenultimate w^ords can have
a short accented syllable. Consequently it is only in these words
that our author's disregard for quantity under accent can show
itself, and in these words it does show itself unequivocally. For
an investigation of the ratio in which short syllables stand to long
in monosyllables under clausula-accent, in dissyllables and in ante-
penultimate words has disclosed that in each case this ratio is
normal.

The monosyllables may be quickly disposed of. Under clausula-
accent they occur only as the first word in I (i, and 5 in 25 are
short. So much variation within a single type can only mean
neglect of quantity, and since monosyllables nearly always end in
a consonant and must therefore make position frequently, there is
no reason for believing the ratio of variation to be anything but
normal.^

Dissyllal^les and antepenultimate words are found in all forms.
The following tables show the proportion of short accented syl-
lables that they display in each place in which they occur.

long short total "/q short

penult penult

I (first word) 155 38 193 20

(last word) 248 87 335 26

II f first word) 29 8 37 22
(last accented word,

followed by an enclitic) 2 2

III (first word) 33 8 41 20
(last word) 2 2

IV (first word) 112

470 142 612 23

* It is confirmed by the fact that in III y d the monos3'llable within
the clausula is short 6 times in 43, in III if 6 6 times in 36. In lycf and
Ilytf, however Ammianus takes care to make the monosyllable long by
position : see below.

The Clausula in Ammia>/us Marcellinus. 189

Antepenultimate Words

long short total "/^ short

antepenult

antepenult

I (first word)

143

80

223

36

II (first word)

18

11

29

38

(last word)

1^00

74

174

43

III (first word)

368

207

575

36

IV (first word)

11

15

26

(last word)

23

8

26

663 390 1053 37

In the dissyllables^ leaving out of account the three collocations
of which there are only two examples each, we observe that in
every position in which they occur the ratio of short penults is
approximately the same as the mean ratio of 23 per cent, the min-
imum being 20 and the maximum 26. Compare with this the state
of affairs in the antepenultimate words. Passing over for the moment
the figures for IV, we find that the lowest proportion of short syl-
lables under accent is 36, the highest 43, with a mean of 37.^
Between the highest ratio of short accented syllables in dissyllabic
words and the lowest in antepenultimates there is a difference of
10 per cent, and between the two averages of 23 and 37 a difter-
ence of 14 per cent. The dissyllables accordingly present a very
constant ratio of approximatel}' three with long penult to one with
short, while the antepenultimate words present an equally constant
but considerably higher ratio of approximately three long accented
syllables to two short.

On the supposition that Ammianus chose his words with any re-
ference to the quantity of their accented syllables the constanc}' of
each of these ratios and the fact that they differ from one an-
other cannot be explained. On the contrary, such a result is just
what we should look for if we knew him to have observed nothing
but accent. For it is obvious that in the Latin vocabulary the dis-
syllables with short penult must stand in a certain numerical relation
to those with long penult, and the words with short accented an-
tepenult to those with long ; and it is highly improbable that the
nvunerical relation would be the same in both cases. In any chance
collection of dissyllables or of antepenultimate words, the one ratio

^ In IV the lai-ge proportion of short syllables in the first word is
due purely to chance ; the small proportion in the second word, on the
contrary, bears witness to the fact that the ratio is naturally smaller in
pentesyllables than in trisyllables and tetrasyllables. See below.

190 Austiji Morris Harmon,

would show itself in the diss3dlal)les, the other in the antepenulti-
mates. The presumption is therefore that the two different ratios
which we actual!}' find are these two natural ratios of frequency ;
and this presumption is not difficult to confirm.

In order to establish the natural proportion of longs to shorts
under accent a count in the dictionary is the first means that sug-
gests itself, but not the best, for it does not take into consideration
the relative frequency of words. I made a small test, however, on
this basis. For the dissyllables I selected the letter F in order to
avoid prepositions, which would cause an abnormal proportion of
long penults, and found that of the dissyllables beginning with that
letter 24 per cent had a short accented syllable. For the antepen-
ultimates I counted three pages at random under each letter of the
alphabet, and found that 42.6 per cent had a short antepenult. A
better means of proof would be afforded by prose writers, could
we hit upon one who did not use ciausulae.^ Unfortunately it is
only in modern Latinity that we can be sure, without investigation,
that quantity is neglected, and I therefore selected Ritschl's Latin
speeches {Opusc. V, 627—684) for examination. The count was made
in the last two or three words preceding each heavy stop, and
yielded 267 dissyllables, of which 25 per cent had a short penult,
and 358 words with antepenultimate accent, of which 43 per cent
had the syllable short. For the dissyllables it was also possible to
make a test in hexameter verse, which admits all the varieties
of scansion that they can assume. Choosing for this purpose the
first Epistle of Horace, I found that 24 per cent of the diss3ilables
occurring in it had a short penult.

Of course we must not press these figures too close, for they
are all of them founded on small counts. But they certainly show
clearl}' that the natural proportion of short accented syllables to
long is much lower in diss3'llables than in antepenultimate words,
and that in the case of dissyllables this natural proportion must be
about 3 long to 1 short, in the case of antepenultimates about 3
long to 2 short. Consequently the ratios which we found in Am-
mianus accord with the natural ratios.

To remove any lingering doubt we may pursue the investigation
a little farther. Up to this point we have lumped all antepenulti-

1 Tliinking that this might be the case in Tacitus I counted the
dissyllables occurring in the chapter-endings of the Histories and found
a proportion of 36 per cent short ! This heavy proportion is abnormal —
it is appai-ently due to his avoidance of the cretic-trocliaic clausula.

The Clausula in Aunmanus Marcellinus. 191

mate words together. Let us now classify them according to length
and see what ratio we find in Ammianus in trisyllables, in tetra-
syllables and in pentesyllables. The facts are expressed in per-
centages in this table. ^

I

II

III

IV

(first word)

(last word)

(first word)

(first word) (la

St word)

"/o short

o/o short

"/o short

<'/o short

average

tris3-llables

29

33

36

29

34

tetrasyllables

46

50

42

[63]

46

pentesyllables

[38]

11

11

17

The results are illuminating. Each sort of word shows a different
ratio, which is constant no matter in what clausula or in what place
in the clausula the word occurs.^ Such a condition cannot be due
to anything but the working of natural laws of frequency, and we
ma}^ spare ourselves the pains of seeking confirmation of each ratio
from outside evidence.

In all words, then, in which the Latin language admits short ac-
cented syllables, we find short syllables occurring in the clausulae
of Ammianus in a proportion which shows no trace of intentional
tampering with quantities, and which can only be ascribed to the
influence of natural laws of frequenc}'. The conclusion therefore is
inevitable that Ammianus was indifferent to quantity under accent.

QUANTITY IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

It remains to be demonstrated that in unaccented syllables Kn\-
mianus observed quantity by position and neglected vowel-quantity.
His regard for position evinces itself in two ways :

(1) in an effort to avoid positional lengthening in the case of
the first unaccented syllable, and

(2) in an effort to secure positional lengthening in the case of
the second unaccented syllable.^

The effort to avoid positional lengthening asserts itself in all forms,
but onl}^ in types with ;' caesura [nosse confingit). For in all other

* Words of 6 syllables are too few to give a ratio of any value.

* In the two percentages bracketed the count is a very small one
(19 tetrasyllables as the first word in IV, 24 pentesyllables as the first
word in I). The percentages given under III are based on the largest
counts. Statistics as to the length of the first word as well as that of
the last are given for all forms in the tables of types, p. 179 ff).

* The first of these two observations is Meyer's {Ges. Abh. II. 264 — 265),
the second is my own.

192 Austin Morris Harmon,

clausulae with the exception of I ii the first unaccented syllable is
the penult of a word with antepenultimate accent {Claudius Caesar,
opijex callidus etc.) and of necessity is always short, except in rare
cases of abnormal accentuation.^ In I [i {sol aestimatur) Ammianus
might easily have shortened the syllable in question, but as a matter
of fact it is long in all 24 cases and long by position in all but 3.^
In types with y caesura {y and ;' (V in each form) the tendency
to avoid positional lengthening manifests itself clearly. These are

the statistics.

makes
does not make position position total

Hiatus

Vowel -f cons.,

V

owel + 2

Final -7it.

,-ns

cons. -f cons.

Form

cons

. -f- vowel

cons.

-\- vow

el

I

60

486

38

22

17

623

II

17

133

8

7

8

173

III

21

73

2

3

6

105

IV

2

2

1

5

100 694 48 32 32 906

It will be remarked that cases in which a syllable ending in -nt
or -ns precedes a vowel (redieruw/ infecto) are registered among the
combinations which do not make position. Although according to
classical usage -7tt and -ns should suffice in themselves to lengthen
the syllable which they terminate, it is certain that they do not in
Ammianus, for when such a syllable precedes the ;- csesura it is
customarily followed by a word beginning with a vowel, while
when it precedes the () ceesura in types in which our second rule
is observed it is followed by a word beginning with a consonant.-^
These syllables are therefore treated exactly as if they ended in a
single consonant.

' Five cases are registered under III in our table above : I. 28. 17
Amano disparanUtr ; I. 43. 21 in Aegypto trucidantnr ; I. 27. 30 CalycaJmts
interscindit ; I. 178. 30 de'inceps prohibcrent ; I. 130. 32 deinde sunt progrcssi.
Tliey show how far Ammianus went in his indifference to quantity.

^ This must not be interpreted as evidence of a desire to lengthcfi the
syllable. In this type Ammianus paid no attention at all to quantity.
See pp. 193, 196.

' In the first case there are 27 instances of -nt and 5 of -ns before a
vowel (as in redierunt infecto) against 3 of -nt before a consonant
{remanerent magistris) : in the second case there are 26 instances of -nt
and 7 of -ns before a consonant (as in nesciens missum) against 2 of -nt
and 1 of -ns before a vowel {snfficiens aqua). The phenomenon is due
to the nasalization of n.

The Clausula in AuDiiiaiius Marcclliinis. 19 3

This point understood, the language of the table needs no further
interpretation.^ And its testimony is extremely clear. We find that
when the first unaccented syllable is followed by caesura it makes
position in less than 3 per cent of the cases in form I, less than
5 per cent of those in form II and less than 6 per cent of those in
form III. As for form IV there are only 5 cases among the sen-
tence-endings, one of which lengthens the syllable by position. The
material is so small that we must bring in further testimony. Among
the clausulae from Book XXI I note that of 9 cases of IV with y
caesura position is made in onl}^ one; and in the 17 cases of IV ;'
cited on page 182 there are only 3 in which the syllable in question
is lengthened. Consequently in this form as well as in the others
Ammianus' inclination to avoid position manifests itself.

It is plain, therefore, that when the first unaccented syllable came
before a caesura, Ammianus did not like to lengthen it by position.
But he had no scruples against allowing it to be long by nature,
for it is thus long in 30 per cent of its occurrences. This proportion
leaves no room for assuming the slightest preference on his part
for a short syllable, since we may ascribe the predominance of
shorts to the fact that almost all finite verb-forms have a short final
syllable. 2

We may note further that Ammianus was very little troubled by
hiatus, for it occurs in 11 per cent of the clausulae.

Let us turn now to a consideration of the state of affairs in the
second unaccented syllable. The tendency here is not to avoid
position, but to secure it. It is not displayed in all forms, but only
in I and II, and is not quite universal within these limits.

In I j3 there is no inclination at all to lengthen the second unac-
cented syllable, which is short in 12 of the 24 cases.

In I y and II ;' the tendenc}' comes to the surface. Here the
syllable follows the caesura, and is in the one case the first syllable
of a penultimate trisyllable (nosse confingit) and in the other the
first syllable of an antepenultimate tetrasyllable (semper innocui).
Examination shows that in I ;' the syllable is long by position in

1 The fact that to the ear of Ammianus a syllable terminating in a
vowel does not make position before a word beginning with 2 consonants
{venire praecepit) is in accordance with the prevailing practice of the
poets and we need not dwell upon it.

' The proportion is approximately the same in all forms : in 1 it is
3G per cent, in II 27 per cent, in IH 42 per cent. This is as close an
agreement as we could reasonably expect.

194 Austin Morris Harmon,

79 per cent of the cases, long by nature without making position
in 17 per cent and short in 4 per cent. In II ;' it is long by pos-
ition in 76 per cent of the cases, long by nature without position
in 16 per cent, and short in 8 per cent. To ascertain how far these
proportions vary from the natural, I took as the basis for an estim-
ate the penultimate trisyllaliles and antepenultimate tetrasyllables
that begin the clausula in various forms and types (as venire prae-
cepit, conjluxerit Romam). Here I found that words like venire had
the first syllable long by position in 31 per cent of their occur-
rences, long by nature without position in 34 per cent, and short in
85 per cent, while words like conjluxerit showed 52 per cent long
by position, 20 per cent long by nature only, and 28 per cent short.
These ratios may not be very accurate, for they were not based
on large counts ; but they are accurate enough for our purpose.
They show clearly that there is a marked tendency toward po-
sitional lengthening of the syllable which we are considering. Though
the actual results attained are similar in both forms, the tendency
is stronger in I than in II, for in the latter form the natural ratio
of syllables long by position is much higher than in form I.^

We come now to the d and ;' cV types, in which the second un-
accented syllable precedes a caesura (as passiZ'//^ citis, vilis et parva).
The two tables which follow will show that position is sought in
I d and ;' 6 and in II ;' cV, and that it is neglected in II (5 and in all
types of III and IV with 6 caesura.

aj Quantity observed
makes
position does not make position total

cons. -j- cons, vowel -^2 final -nt, -ns vowel -|- cons., hiatus
Form consonants -|~ "^'owel cons. -|- vowel

I (J 201 7 1 14 223

yd 110 1 10 112

II 7 d 46 1 47

357 7 3 15 382"

* In I y there seems to be a slight inclination toward conscious
lengthening- of tlie syllable befoi'e the caesura when the S3^11able follow-
ing it is short, as in remanerejit magistros. It is not at all consistently
carried out, for it is only illustrated in 7 sentence-endings, while thei-e
are on the one hand 15 cases in which the short syllable is not preceded
by a lengthened one (as in ruentes aperta^ ferieiida dederimt)^ and on the
other hand 10 in which the lengthened syllable is not followed by a
short one (as in tandem perveni). Yet in view of the fact that each of

The Clausula in Annniauus Marcellinus. 195

«

b) Quantity neglected
makes position does not make position total

cons. 4" cons.

vowel -[-2

final

-nt,

, -ns

vowel -f- cons.,

hiatns

Form

consonants

+ ■

v^ow

el

cons. -|- vow

'el

lid 15

4

2

7

1

29

\\\d 160

29

7

329

15

540

yd 35

4

7

1

47

di 12

1

22

1

36

IV (all 6

types) 12

2

3

13

1

^31

These tables require very little comment. At first glance one
might be tempted to include III ;' (V among the clausulae in which
position is sought, inasmuch as it has its monosyllable long by
position in 75 per cent of the cases. But the ratio is purely natural,
for in I /3 {sol aestimatur) and in III ^ t {poterant nee cavcri) the
monosyllable makes position to precisely the same extent.

Our investigations have shown us that under certain circum-
stances Ammianus made a distinct effort to avoid positional leng-
thening in the first unaccented syllable and to secure it in the
second. It should be mentioned further that in 28 cases of form II
with C caesura {vivus exustus est) and 6 of IV with /> caesura {fiden-
tius absolutus est) the next-to-the last syllable uniforml}' fails to make
position. This fact, however, may be quite unintentional, for even
if no attempt were made to avoid position here it would seldom
occur.^ Consequently it is hardly on a par with the phenomena
that we have been discussing. We may note, though, that the
syllable is long by nature 6 times in II and once in IV. When it
is not in caesura {semper innocui etc.), it is bound to be short as
a result of the penultimate law.

In forms III and IV the third and fourth unaccented syllables
show no trace of any attention to position. But the fact that they
are so often both long {cernebatur) and so rarely both short {tribu-
entes) appears to be indicative of a slight abnormality which I should
refer to Ammianus' desire to avoid the hexameter close.

these two peculiarities is so rare, tlie occurrence of both together in so
many cases cannot be set down to mere coincidence. It points to a

futile desire to avoid the hexameter tag — ^-^ --^ .

' The combinations of participle and auxiliary that would naturally
occur most frequently do not give position {tractns, tracta, tractum est :
tracti^ tractae^ tracta sunt).

196 Austin Morris Ilarnion,

Our investigations thus far have been based on statistics from
the collection of sentence-endings. If we extend them to the inte-
rior clausulae we shall find that there also the same tendencies to-
ward the avoidance of position in the first unaccented syllable and
the effort to secure it in the second assert themselves, but to a less
extent. It will be of advantage to make this evident in such a way
as at the same time to summarize our results for the final clausulae.
The estimates for interior clausulae are founded upon Book XXI.

In form I, type ;' {nosse confingit) when the clausula is final the
syllable preceding the caesura fails to make position in 97 per cent
of the cases, and the syllable following the caesura makes position
in 79 per cent; when the clausula is interior the respective per-
centages are 87 and 68.

In I y6 (vilis et parva) final clausulae show the syllable preceding
the ;' caesura positionally short in 97 per cent of the cases and
the monosyllable long by position in 98 per cent ; interior clausulae
in 95 per cent and 91 per cent respectively.

In I (3 (passihus citis) the first unaccented syllable must always
be short in virtue of the penultimate law: the second displays posit-
ional lengthening in approximateh^ 90 per cent of the clausulae
both final and interior.

In II ;' [semper innocui) the syllable preceding the caesura fails
to make position in 94 per cent of the final clausulae and in 82 per
cent of the interior; the syllable following the ceesura makes position
in 76 per cent of the final clausulae, and in 72 per cent of the
interior.

In II y(^ (asper et vehemens) the syllable preceding the / caesura
fails to make position in 100 per cent of the final clausulae, 94 per
cent of the interior ; the monosyllable makes position in 98 per
cent of the final clausulae and 85 of the interior.

In III ;' and ytS {magna decernebatur) the syllable before the cae-
sura is not lengthened by position in 94 jjer cent of the final clau-
sulae and in 86 of the interior.

There are onl}' 5 cases of IV with ;' caesura among the sentence-
endings, and 9 among the clausulae in Book XXI ; one example in
each case has the syllable before the caesura positionally lengthened.

In I ^, in II /:; and II 6 and in all types of III and IV without
;' caesura quantity by position plays no part.

We find, then, that Ammianus' inclination to observe quantity by
position is nowhere carried out with strict regularit}', and that it
is considerabl}' less prominent in interior clausulae than in final.
The explanation of this fact is that observance of quantity in the

The Clausula in Atnniiaiuis Marcellitms. 197

clausulae is subordinated to observance of accentual rhythm. A clau-
sula quantitatively imperfect is now and then (often, it is to be
presumed, unconsciously) admitted by Ammianus because it satis-
fies the accentual requirements, which are more important ; and
such clausulae are more frequent in the body of the sentence than
at its end, because a cadence which precedes a slight pause is
much less deeply impressed on the ear than one which comes
before a full stop, and any quantitative fault that it may have is
therefore less obvious not only to the reader but to the writer
as well.

ORIGIN OF THE ACCENTUAL CLAUSULA.

In our study of the nature of Ammianus' clausulae we have de-
termined that his rhythm is based on the recurrence of four ac-
centual cadences :

I r\j r\j rv P^ r\j
II rO r\j r\j r^ r^^ rsj

III 1^ f\j rsj r^ r'^ r^ rsj

IV (^r\jr^^rsjr\jr^r\jr\j

Though the rhythm in these cadences is primarily accentual it is
not purely accentual, for in the first and second unstressed syllables
quantity by position plays a certain part in the form of a tendency
to shorten the one and lengthen the other.

It is beyond dispute that these clausulae derive their origin
from corresponding quantitative forms. The metrical prototypes,
in the establishment of which the researches of Meyer and Zielinski
have featured most prominently, are

1 ^ ^-

2 -^ ^

3 -^ — -

4 '- ^ -

The clausula 4 is rare: it is chiefly used, like its accentual deri-
vative, as a means of handling long words, and not all writers
employ it. The other three, however, are extremely frequent, and
show a steady increase in popularity. Without taking into con-
sideration the modifications of these forms produced by substitution
and resolution we find that in entire purity they constitute nearly
45 per cent of Cicero's sentence-endings and 69 per cent of Cyprian's
clausulae. Ziehnski would interpret all of Cicero's clausulae in terms
of these cretic-trochaic forms. However it may be with that theory
(for which I do not hold a brief), it cannot be denied that Cyprian's

Traxs. Coxx. Acad.. Vol. XVI. 13 Oct., 1910.

198 Austin Morris Hariuo)i,

clausulae are to l:)e thus interpreted, for beside the three pure forms
the only clausulae that he uses with any frequency are
^ -^ ^ — : — ^=^ itineris errore

^ ^ v.. ^ : -1- :=i ipse teneatur

j^^ — : -:!- w ^ rursus imposuit

These are obviously all modihcations of form 1, each produced
by the resolution of a single long. All together, the three simple
forms and the three moditications of the tirst form are found in
about 92 per cent of Cyprian's clausulae, and are therefore become
practically universal in him.^

The connecting link between these quantitative clausulae and the
accentual clausulae in Ammianus is to be found in the coincidence
of accent and ictus in the former. Just as through coincidence of
accent and ictus the hexameter-close in Latin usually presents the
accentual scheme f<j r>u r>^ i<j r\j, so the vast majority of unresolved
metrical clausulae of form 1 present the accentual scheme I, those
of form 2 the accentual scheme II and so on. In both cases the
coincidence is purely natural in origin : it is a consequence of the
penultimate law. A little reflection will suffice to convince the
reader of this fact, if he stand in need of conviction. Nearly all
the possible ways of putting into words either the hexameter-tag
or the metrical clausulae must inevitably give a coincidence of
accent and ictus. Combinations of words that do not give it are
of such a sort that they would not suggest themselves frequently
as a means of reproducing the desired quantities (as miles gravis
annis). How far the natural preponderance of combinations giving
a coincidence of accent and ictus was increased in either case by
conscious elimination of combinations which do not give such a coin-
cidence is a questionable point, and one that does not concern us here.
Let us look at the result of this coincidence of accent and ictus
in a concrete example. Cyprian's clausulae are metrical, as we have
said. But the accentual cadences which they exhibit are as follow^s.-

I 30 per cent

II 18 per cent

III 26 per cent

A 14 per cent

88 per cent

1 The statistics in this paragraph are taken from Zielinski {Philol.
Supplemcntbd. 9 and 10).

^ The figures are based on the clausulae in the first four tractates, as
given in de Jonge's list {Les clansules metriques dans Saint Cyprien^ Louvain.
Paris, 1905.

The Clausula in Aiiniiiaiius MarccUiims. 199

Now these fovir cadences are precisely the cadences of the ac-
centual clausula. The cadence A is not employed by Ammianus,
to be sure, but it is used to a greater or less extent b}- many other
writers. And that Ammianus' form IV does not appear is owing
to Cyprian's avoidance of the metrical clausula 4. These dis-
crepancies represent individual peculiarities in the usage of Ammianus
and of Cyprian, which are of little moment in comparison with the
fact that in Cyprian we find a great preponderance (74 per cent)
of Ammianus' ordinary cadences t, II and III.

Thus the accentual cadences are alread}' present in the metrical
clausulae. Consequently, in course of time, as the Latin ear be-
came dulled to quantit}^, it was chiefly the accentual cadence that
was felt. Through lengthening under accent, facit iniiistiim became
the equivalent oi fecit iniustum ; through indifterence to vowel-length
in unstressed syllables uosci confiugit was not differentiated from
nosse confiugit. On the other hand a clausula like nnniquam pie
fecit, which has the sanie quantitative rhythm as inipie fecit,
produced a dift'erent effect because it had not the same accent-
rhythm. For the same reason the resolved forms esse videaiur and
aninia poscentes were dissociated from the pure form nosse con-
fingit, and the clausula semper innocui was no longer identified
with semper in node, but with semper innoxii.

In this way originated the accentual clausulae. Ammianus' four
forms represented the four unresolved metrical forms, and they
retain a clear indication of their models in the fact that the first
unaccented syllable does not make position and that the second
does make it. Almost all sensitiveness to quantit}' is gone in him
except for this crude distinction.

The only other writer in the accentual clausula who has been
subjected to investigation is Sedulius.^ He makes frequent use of
the cadences I, II and III and a very sparing use of the cadence
(^ r>j \ r^ r^ r^ r\j . This latter clausula, being the accentual equival-
ent of a resolved form of the metrical clausula (^. ^ j ^^^^i)
should logically have gone out of use, as did the accent scheme

of the other resolution -^ _ .--I ^ ^=^, but it is conserved, as we

have said, by Sedulius and many others. Its retention seems to
be solely due to the fact that its metrical prototype was the
Ciceronian esse videatur clausula which is recommended b}' all
grammarians in chorus from Quintilian on. Although in . this re-

* These words were written in 1908. Ow^ing to an unfortunate coni-
bination of circumstances I am unable to turn to account several dissei'-
tations which have appeai'ed since then.

200 Aitstin Morris Harmon,

sp;_'Ct and in the disuse of IV Sedulius differs slij^htly from Ammianus,
he is in essential agreement with him in his attitude toward quan-
tity, for he too disregards quantity under accent, and observes
quantity by position in unaccented syllables. Failure rightly to
appreciate this fact has materially lessened the value of Candel's
work upon Sedulius.^ Yet he himself noted that Sedulius in I ;'
and II ;' freely allows the syllable before the caesura to be long by
nature, but does not allow it to make position.^ And there is
another obvious peculiarity of the same sort (not noted by Candel)
in the clausula i<j r\j rsj \ r\j r^ i<j r^, where he objects to positional
lengthening, though not to natural lengthening of the second
syllable in the last word. This is of course a refinement on the
practice of Ammianus, and a closer approximation to the ditrochaic
close of the metrical form 3. In regard to Sedulius' neglect of
quantity under accent I will only point out that in I cV the final dis-
sjdlable has its penult short in 24 per cent of the cases, and that an-
tepenultimate words have their accented syllable short in 44 per
cent of the cases in which they end form II and 40 per cent of
the cases in which they begin form Ill-ratios which correspond to
those we found in Ammianus in like words and determined to be normal.
These considerations point clearly to neglect of quantity under accent,
and to neglect of vowel-length. Ammianus, miles et Graecus, prob-
ably could not have written accurate metrical clausulae had he
wished to ; but Sedulius could, as his Paschale Carmen shows. He
did not, because he was writing for auditors who would not have
appreciated their rhythm.^

' de ciausulis a Scdnl/o . . . adhibitis, Tolosae, 1U04.

* Op. cit. p. 84.

^ In this brief sketch of the origin of the accentual clausula I ad-
here essentially to the view of Meyer, which was combatted not long
since by Schlicher {Origin of KhytJimical Vcrsr in Late Latin^ Chicago
1900). Schlicher denies that there was any appreciable loss of quantity
in Latin except in final syllables, and applies to the accentual clausula
an ingenious theory similar to that which he contrived for accentual
verse, to the effect that the thesis of the cretic clausula is indifferent,
and that in the endeavor to j)ut the uncertain final syllable of a Avord
into this thesis, coincidence of accent and ictus was brought about. But
a vital objection to this theory, as De Jonge has pointed out, lies in
the fact that the thesis of the cretic is not undetermined. Even
Ammianus means to make it short, for that is his object in avoiding
position there. And in the face of the evidence from Ammianus I fancy
he would hardly care to maintain his advocacy of the permanence of a
sense for quantity in Latin. Neglect of quantity in Ammianus is a

The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 201

Chapter ii. The Clausula ix Composition'.

Having discussed in detail the nature of the clausulae which
Ammianus employs, we must now give brief consideration to the
manner of their use in composition.

Each clausula terminates a group of grammatically connected
words, which, in conformity with ancient usage, we may call a
kolon. The kola vary considerably from a minimum of the two
words necessary to contain the clausula -to a seldom-reached maxi-
mum of about ten words. Knowing the number of clausulae in
Book XXI, we may readily estimate from this the average length of
a kolon ; it is three-fourths of a line of the Teubner text. Thus the
typical kolon of Ammianus corresponds very closely to the ideal kolon
of Cicero, the length of which he sets at the length of an hexameter
verse. ^ It is natural to be sure, that they should correspond, for the
length of a kolon is not entirely dependent upon individual caprice ; it
is conditioned by the physiological necessity of pausing for breath.

The average length of a sentence in Book XXI is 3.8 lines ; there-
fore in that book there are 5 kola in the typical sentence. There,
however, the sentences are short; an estimate in the first six and
the last three books shows an average of 5 lines to the sentence.
Consequently we may fix the number of kola at 6 or 7.

This must not be construed as a violation of the dictum of Cicero,
repeated by Quintilian, that the period should consist of 4 kola.^
For the word period (periodus) and its Latin equivalents (ambitus,
comprehensio, continuatio, etc.) to Cicero and Quintilian of course
do not mean what the Germans call a Periode and what we call
a sentence.-^ They mean a combination of closely connected kola
which may be a whole sentence or only part of one.

condition and not a theory. That it began considerably prior to his
time and was general is, it seems to me, clearly enough shown in the
attitude of the grammarians toward quantity. The little treatise De
Finalib2is by Servius (K IV. 449 ff.) is nothing but a guide to quantity,
whicli takes the ignorance of tlie public for granted. It is well worth
reading. See also what he says about sjdlables in his commentary on
Donatus (p. 423), especially the phrase plane quom'avi difficilis est depre-
heusio circa syllabas naturaliter longas^ idcirco primum debemus considerare
quern ad modum naturaliter proferantjir. There is a great deal more evid-
ence of tills sort to be had, and I cannot understand whj" It has been
ignored in the past.

1 Or. 222. ■>■ Cic. /. .-. ; Quint. IX. 4. 125.

^ Tor a discussion of the meaning of the word pei-iod see Blass,
Rkythmen der asian, ti. rom. Kunstprosa, p. 'd ff.

202 Austin Morris Harmon,

We have seen that there is no essential distinction in Ammianus
between the clausulae which end sentences and those which end
interior kola. In both cases the same forms and types occur. "We
fomid, however, that in the interior clausulae he displayed somewhat
more laxity in his observation of positional quantity than in the
final clausulae because it is the final clausulae that dwell longest
in the ear. And we noted in passing another difference which was
reserved for fuller consideration here, in the point that neither in
the relative frequency of the forms with reference to one another,
nor in the relative frequency of the various types of each form is
there close agreement between the statistics furnished from Book
XXI and those from the collection of sentence-endings. As to the fre-
quency of the forms the statistics are here expressed in percentages.

Book XXI

vSentence-endi

I

45.5

48.8

II

27

11.3

III

24.2

38

IV

B.2

1.8

Following the hint given b}' this comparison I have examined
the facts in Book XXI ; they are

Interior Final

I 45.6 45.7

II 30 11.1

III 20.9 40.4

IV 3.3 2.6

The relative proportions of the forms are obviously the same in
the final clausulae in this book as in the other nine books, though
I is slightly less frequent, IV slightly more frequent than usual. But
the relative proportions in the interior clausulae are quite different.
Form II shows a great increase, form III a great decrease in fre-
quency, while I and IV remain aliout the same. We find, then,
that II is preferred over III before minor pauses and that III is
much more favored than II as fiual clausula. If we pursue the in-
vestigation into the typology of these cadences, it becomes clear
that thr falling off in III as an interior clausula is all in type 6
icollibiis abdiderunt) ; the falling off in II as a final clausula is marked
in all t3i)es, but greatest in () (opifcx callidus)} Furthermore, though

* The fact that II ('lausulae with f caesura (v/vus exiistus est) are more
comniou at the end of the sentence than in the interior has uo signif-
icance; it is simply because verbs are more frequent at the end of the
sentence.

The Clausula in Aiuiuia)iiis Marcellinus.

203

I is equally common both at the end of the sentence and within it,
the tyjje I 6 is in slightly greater favor as an interior than as a
final clausula, and, strangely enough, I /3 (50/ aestimalur) is more
common as a final clausula than it is within the sentence.

Beyond this slight contrast between interior and final clausulae,
there is little art superficially discernible in the arrangement and
the sequence of the cadences. In general they seem to follow one
another almost at hap-hazard, and there is little attempt to group
them on principles of balance and contrast. But passages that are
more carefully constructed sometimes occur. Far and away the
best of these is the lofty flight of rhetoric in which Ammianus epit-
omizes the rise and dechne of the Roman commonwealth (XIV.
6. 3—6). This is well worth quoting in its entirety.

Tempore quo primis auspiciis in mundanum fulgorem

surgeret ut victura dum erunt homines Roma,

ut augeretur sublimibus incrementis

foedere pacis eternae Virtus convenit atque Fortuna

plerumqiie dissidentes,

quorum si altera defuisset

ad perfectam non venerat summitatem.

eius populus ab incunabulis primis
adusque pueritiae tempus extremum
quod annis circumcluditur fere trecentis
circummurana pertulit bell^.,

deinde aetatem ingressus adultam
post multiplices bellorum aerumnas
Alpes transcendit et fretum,

in iuvenem erectus et virum,

ex omni plaga quam orbis ambit immensus

reportavit laureas et triumphos,

iamque vergens in senium

et nomine solo aliquotiens vincens

ad tranquilliora vitae discessit.

ideo urbs venerabilis

post superbas efferatarum gentium cervices oppressas

latasque leges

fundamenta libertatis et retinacula sempiterna

velut frugi parens et prudens et dives

Caesaribus tamquam liberis suis

regenda patrimonii iura permisit :

II, I

III, I

III

I, I

III

III

III

16

ir

1/

Id

ir

I/'

!;'()

I 7 (J

Ir

III

II r6

I (5, Id

I7

II

I

I

m

I

I

I

204 Austin Morris Harmon,

el olim licet otiosae sint tribus I

pacataeque centuriae 11

et nulla suffragiorum certamina II

set Pompiliani redierit 7 securitas temporis ; II

per omnes tamen quotquot sunt partes terrarum I

ut domina suscipitur et regina, III

et ubique patrum reverenda cum auctoritate canities II
populique Romani nomen circumspectum et verecundum. Ill

We need not undertake a minute analysis of this passage, for its
rhythmical structure is quite apparent. Even in the sentence which
opens it and in the two sentences at its close there is more regu-
larity displaj'ed in the disposition of the cadences than is character-
istic of Ammianus' ordinary style. But their structure is not nearly
so studied as that of the four connected periods which embrace
the whole history of Rome. The first of these, describing Rome's
infancy, is made up of four kola, while the other three, dealing
respectively with Rome's youth, manhood and old age, are of three
kola each. While all these kola are about of the same length, it
is worth while to notice that in the first period we have three
long kola of 13 syllables each, followed by a shorter one of 10 syl-
lables, in the second, two of 11 syllables followed by one of 8, and
in the third and fourth a long central kolon of 13 syllables (which
in the fourth is broken into two responding kommata) between
shorter kola of al)out 10 syllables. Equally artificial is the responsion
of the clausulae, all in I until we come to the last kolon of the
third period, which is in III (/aureas et triumphos), the change in
rhythm adding emphasis to the kolon, which contains the climax of
the whole thought. From this climax through the medium of a ca-
dence in II we are brought back to the old rh3thm again, in the
two responding kommata and in the close of the sentence. It
should be noted, too, that the responsion extends even to the types.

This is certainl}' a remarkable piece of composition : artifice could
hardly be carried further. But it stands quite by itself in Ammianus,
of whose general style one can get a satisfactory idea from Book XXI.

Though resi^onsion is not regular in Ammianus, it is conspicuous.
The three more favored clausulae occur so freely that in their case
it would be difficult to show this in any way except by referring
to the text itself. Form IV, however, being much less frequent,
furnishes us with interesting results. Its occurrences in Book XXI
are as follows: p. 125, 9; 126, 29; 127, 13, 23; 130, 13, 18; 131, 6,
21,30,32; 133,2; 135,33; 136,1; 137,11,12,14,19; 138,7,27;

The Clausula in Animiamis Marcellimis. 205

141,4; 142,2,20; 143,3,32; 145,32; 146,17,21; 148,17; 149, 8;
150,34; 153,6, 11; 155, 8, 11; 156, 8; 157, 21; 161, 7, 9, 18; 162, 16;
163, 6, 13; 164, 34; 165, 1, 8, 11, 22.

Instead of occurring regularly once in every page, the cadences
are mostly in groups ranging from 2 to 7 clausulae. But there
are also numerous more or less isolated occurrences. The two facts
point at once to the predominance of responsion in Ammianus, and
to the lack of S3'stem in it.

Responsion of course brings it about that in short passages of
Ammianus' text the relative proportions of the clausulae vary con-
siderably. But any passage of three or four pages will be found
to reproduce quite closely the ratios which occur in Book XXI, and
which may be mentioned again here as the general norm of use in

Ammianus :

I 46

II 27

III 24

IV 3

In proof of this consistency in practice I cite the relative per-
centages of the cadences in the sentence-endings of the nine books
that I have examined. Being linal clausulae, they naturally do not
correspond to the ratios in continuous composition, but the uni-
formity which exists in them testifies to a like uniformity in general
st3le.

XIV XV XVI XVII XVII XIX XXIX XXX XXXI Average

I 48.8 51.2 56 46.7 44 42 49 53.9 52.1 48.8

II 9.5 12.1 9 14.6 11.2 8.9 11.7 11.8 11.7 11.3

III 41.1 35 34.3 37.5 41.6 46.8 36.2 34.2 33.9 38

IV 0.4 1.5 0.5 1.1 3.2 2 2.9 2.1 1.8

There are discrepancies in these ratios, to be sure, but they are
really small — never large enough to indicate any abnormal difference
in composition.

The incessant repetition of so limited a number of cadences gives
rise to two phenomena which deserve brief comment : the produc-
tion of unintentional clausulae and of prolonged clausulae. In m}'
text of Book XXI I have signalled the existence of numerous ca-
dences which upon the whole do not seem to me to be intentional
because the pauses which they precede are very slight. ^ But there

' Naturally I do not maintain that I have drawn the line bet^veeu
intentional and unintentional clausulae with any gieat accuracy ; the
definition is, and must needs l.e, subjective in large measure.

206 Austin Morris Harmon,

are also cadences in plent}- which I have not noted, which do not
precede pauses but occur in the midst of a grammatical construc-
tion.^ Tliese cadences certainl}- cannot be intentional, for the}' con-
tradict the whole theory of the clausula, which requires that the
clausula should terminate a word-group and not break it. They
ought, therefore, theoretically speaking, to have been eliminated ;
they occur probably because Ammianus' choice and arrangement
of words was so determined b}' rhythm at the end of the clause
that ' the numbers came ' in spite of him where they were not in
place. To the same cause we must also assign prolonged clausulae
like pueriiiac ianpus extremum and aetdtem ingrcssiis adi'tltam, and
interlocked clausulae like insidiis fallcrctur occi'tltis and celsiore
fidi'icia repugnarent. The interlocked cadences are rather rare ; the
prolonged ' dactylic ' rhythms are numerous.

There is great danger of error in ascribing to the clausula any
profound influence upon the manner of Ammianus. Inquiry would
better be directed into the influence of Ammianus' manner upon
the clausula. But for such an inquiry there is as yet too little
material to give any satisfactor\- results.

INFERENCES BASED UPON THE CLAUSULA.

Chapter III. Matters Of Proxun'Ciatiox.

While the pronunciation of Ammianus in the main conforms to
that which we regard as classical, the clausula reveals many parti-
culars that are important. They are for the most part phenomena
either of accentuation or of syllabication, and we shall discuss them
under these two captions. The illustrative material cited is drawn
from the entire text of the Histories, although, in the case of
phenomena which occur frequently, no attempt has been made to
register every instance.

ACCENT.
In the construction of Ammianus" cadences phrase or sentence
accent, as distinguished from word accent, plays very little part.
I find no instances in which this factor produces a shift of word-

^ The reader will find examples in almost any page of Book XXI.

The Clausula in Aminiamts Marcclliuus. 207

accent, — .such a shift, for example, as ap])ears to occur in ilium
patreni and the hke in Plautus and Terence. To its influence,
however, we must attribute encHsis and prochsis, of which the ex-
amples in Ammianus are frequent but not especially remarkable.
As a rule they are monosyllaljles, including forms of esse, prepo-
sitions, conjunctions, and pronouns. But proclitic dissyllables, usu-
ally prepositions, sometimes occur, as in I. 11.2 tunc apud Siden,
II. 41. 21 dimicans inter primos, I. 235. 27 discubuit inter ceteros. It
is noteworthy that Ammianus' usage is not entirely con.sistent, since
on the one hand words ordinarily atonic sometimes bear accent, and
on the other hand words that are ordinarily accented are sometimes
atonic. Thus monosyllabic forms of esse are not uncommon as the
first word in I (so I. 9. 18 scopulis sunt controversa ; 16. J 4 inditutn
est cognonientum ; II. 224. 23 iustuni quid sit ignoranti), and vice
versa we find monosyllabic nouns deprived of their natural accent
in cases like I. 167. 27 sagittariorum pars maior; 256. 19 mea mens
mtgurat; II. 267. 17 splendore liinari nox fulgens. So there are
many diss\'llal)les that seem to have an abnormally heavy accent
(as I. 14. 7 pubc tc'nus amicti; 16, 26 atque macstitiain-^ 235. 13 erat
acturus; 256. 17 esse vertendum; 256. 30 iter si'iuin pracire; II. 136. 19
saevum quideni d rudein ; 144. 9 ille Cretrnsis), and a few that are
used as if they were atonic, of which the most conspicuous case
is I. 51. 16 noyi potest corpus. Such peculiarities may fairl}^ be as-
cribed to the working" of sentence-accent, although we cannot ex-
clude the possibility that in some cases the stress or the lack of it
may be effected arbitrarily in the effort to secure a clausula.

Though the clausula teaches us little about sentence-accent, it
brings out a number of interesting points in regard to word-accent.
Let us first consider the composita.

In uiagisquam and potiusquam we have two compounds not
previously recognized. For the one I may cite I. 248. 24 magisquam
consultius and II. 127. 29 magisquam severus: for the other, I. 298.3
potiusquam fluit, 137. 12 potiusquam simultate, and II. 41. 8 potius-
quam tdel)atur} Another new compound is rtiamtum, as in II. 162.4
ctia<utum discordes, I. 209.21 etiamtum infirnuum, II. 247. 11 etiamtum
adorentur (I. 135. 19; 148. 5; 166. 32; 251. 10; II. 25. 4; 63. 27;
90. 1; 139. 18). But this compound is not entirely crystallized, for
not only are there cases in which turn has an accent of its own

' On the sj'llabic ?/ see below. It is only from cases of this sort that
we can get decisive evidence as to the accent of potmsqitam, for in-
stances like II. 240. 9 potmsquam tiniori miglit also be read pofius qiiam
timori (form III).

208 Austin Morris Hannon,

like II. 39.7 ciiain li'tiu iucrepabat\ 53.27 ctia)]i ti'nn i)i Italia and
204. 9 etiaiii ti'im praepeditmu), but some in which the two words
are transposed in order, as in I. 247. 24 turn etiaui amiciim}

No other new compounds have come to m}' notice in Ammianus,
l)ut I tind in him vahialjle testimony in regard to the irregular
accentuation of several familiar compounds, wdiich in most cases
agrees with the testimon}^ of grammarians.

The grammarians have asserted that the accent of adJiuc was
oxytone, and their statement has been accepted by modern linguists."^
Ammianus confirms the fact (II. 124. 12 adhi'tc apud Persas; I. 191. 12
adhiic imperator; cf. I. 16. 15; 164. 4; 262. 9; II. 218. 11 ; 253. 13).
But antehac has antepenultimate accent (I, 285. 4 antchac inclytain),
and illuc penultimate (11. 191. 9 illuc irigressus).

Furthermore the grammarians tell us that in compounds of -iiide
the accent is not penultimate but antepenultimate.-^ Here again
the evidence of the clausula aifords full confirmation, and also
shows that deinceps falls into the same category. Thus :

siibinde : I. 333.3 suhinde comnwantibus ; 241.21 subinde prae-
dicabat; 31. 21 subinde per aidaeuni; cf. I. 98. 18; 132. 23;
306. 9; 322. 25; II. 14. 6; 55. 22
deinde: I. 130.32 deinde sunt progressi; II. 21.26 deinde strue-
bafur; 126.20 deinde Tusciam; cf. I. 172.13; II. 132.20;
218. 27
proinde : I. 214. 3 proindc iactans (this word is necessarily rare

in the clausula)

deinceps: I. 10. 7 observatwn est deinceps; H. 208. 19 deinceps

socius; I. 176.6 deinceps nm/tis; II. 10.12 deinceps Iiorta-

batur; I. 178. 30 deinceps proliiberent; I. 202. 13 deinceps

arcerentur.

The accent of exinde, however, is ambiguous, in some cases it

has an accented ante]:)enult like deinde (I. 80. 13 niotus est exinde;

110. 23 exinde Roniani ; 164. 12 exinde flumine ; II. 137. 25 exinde rapuit),

^ The word amicjim here is corrupt : V reads initium. J. Hermann
suggested inthmun^ which is perhaps the best of many attempts to better
the I'eading, but it is far from satisfactoiy. It is possible that Ammianus
wrote lyxi^ov : on this hypothesis the confusion would have come in
early, while the text was still in capitals.

* Lindsay, Lai. Langjiage. p. 163.

' Servius ad Am. VI. 743 ; Priscian, XI\'. 10 ; cf. also Summer, p). 103.
Seelman {/hisspr,. p. 41) is Avrong in interpretiuft- Serv. in Do?!. IV. 444.
26 K against the usage, which Servius admits as a fact (dic/iinis). and
criticizes theoretically'.

The Clausula in AiuDiianus Marcellinus. 209

whereas in others it has an accented penult (I. 105. 14 exinde
acciderat; 248. 13 exinde lovinum; 293. 5 exinde transferri\ 332. 8
exi'nde perductf).

The statement of Priscian that aliquando was pronounced with
antepenultimate accent is not l:)orne out hy the usage of Ammianus.i
Our author accents the word on the penult: so I. 46. 16 aliquando
nee lacessitus; 260. 31 aliquando est visus; 263. 16 aliquando audivit;
II. 234. 5 aliquando contingit; 242. 16 aliquando Roinanuni.'^

We learn from ancient authorities that when the enclitic -que is
attached to a word, the final syllable of that word is accented
even if it be short.-' For this I have noted the following evidence
in Ammianus,— I. 196. 3 pkraque correxit (cf. 296. 19 and II. 147. 27);
11.1 felicitateque correxit; 101. indeque cindoriim; 168. 29 crudeli-
taieqne terrebat; 179. 15 telaqiie dispositis; II. 176. 28 sperandaque
similia.

In patefacit and venumdata we have two verbs with accented
short penult. The one occurs only in the clausula patefacit ingentes
(I. 315. 13), where, however, it is certain, for the sense of the
passage excludes the possibility of altering to patefecit. It is sup-
ported not only by the testimony of Priscian, but by the fact that
in this and kindred words there is no such vowel-weakening as in
afficif, for example.* For the accent of venumdata I have found
no direct evidence from the grammarians ; it occurs in the clausula
four times to my knowledge (II. 129. 12 gentibus venumdata; 213. 6;
227.21; 247.19), and is to be contrasted with pessihndata (11.93.12
pessiimdatae visae sunt).

A .similar peculiarity is to be observed in the penultimate ac-
centuation of qui I i bet and its diiferent case-forms. Thus I. 107. 30
quilibet tunc praesens; II. 147. 1 interftcere cuiuslibet; 136. 21 quahbet
inventa; 237. 8 quolibet occiso ; 236. 16 transenntes quolibet.

Parallel to quolibet is quovfs, which is to ])e found in the sentence-
ending II. 91. 10 internecivo bello quovis graviorem. I have not
found any other instances of this pronoun in clausula.

To the best of my knowledge nihilominus does not occur in
Ammianus; on the contrary, m'hilo minus serves as a clausula in
I. 250. 10.

> Inst. XV. 29; cf. XV. 10.

* Hence II. 105. 21 aliquando Romanorum is to be emended into ali-
qiia7ido Romanum, comparing the instance last cited.

» E. g. Priscian, Inst. V. 63 and Part. 26; cf. Sommer, p. 101.

* Inst. VIII. 35 ; Part. 127 ; cf. Sommer, pp. 102—103.

210 Austin Morris Harmon,

The most interesting observation of this nature in that in hoc
modo the accent falls upon the noun, whereas in Jmiusniodi and
various other compounds of the sort the noun is enclitic.

hoc modo : I. 162. 25 paulatim hoc modo ; II. 85. 10 prudens hoc
modo; 176. 16 inscdens hoc modo; 1.328. 24 autem hoc modo
huiusmodi : I. 13.14 cogitabat hiiinsmodi ; 33. 1 huinsmodi scru-
tahaiiir: 313. 15 huinsmodi forma est; cf. I. 148. 10; 236. 13;
II. 178. 30
uniusmodi : II. 205. 26 uniusmodi pcrfcrentcs
-modo- I. 248. 5 qiioqnomodo corrigcudnm; 305. 19 qnodammodo
spirant; II. 49. 6 tantummodo tcncbatnr; 96. 31 tantununodo
vulneratis
-modum. : I. 28. 2 admoduni pattca ; II. 20. 26 propcmodnm in-
acccsso
Word-accent in Ammianus conforms almost entirely to the classi-
cal usage ; there are, however, a few noteworthy points which
must be enumerated.

Penultimate vowels followed by a mute and a liquid do not take
the accent unless they are long by nature. Thus we have magnae
delubra (I. 285. 18), visitur ant dcliibrum (II. 237. 11), and longius
circnmldtrans^ (I. 305. 16), but —

tenel:)ras : I. 84. 2 tenebras adfulsisse ; II. 222. 1 1 tenebris amcn-

dasset; 172. 7 tenebris reptabamus
latebris: II. 119. 16 latebris amendarunt; 197. 11. /. oportunis
inlecebris: I. 288. 1 rapicbatur inl; II. 14. 24; 123. 31 ; 271. 20
integrum: I. 51. 11 absolvitur integris; 118. 26; 198. 29; II.

175.4
muliebri : I. 1 66. 24 muliebri sexu
lugubres : II. 171.22 higubres inchidebat
The results coincide again with the testimony of the gramma-
rians, which is opposed, however, to that of the Romance languages.
Lindsay is apparently right in assuming that in vulgar speech a
.short penult followed by a mute and a liquid took the accent,
while in educated speech it did not do so.-

The only case in Ammianus of a verb which has shifted con-
jugation is oriri (II. 234. 11 oritur potest; I. 16. 19 adoritur Pauhim;
335.22 inde exoritur; cf 208.21; II. 192.15). This phenomenon,
however, is not confined to late writers.^

1 On the quantity of the a in latmns see Marx, Hiilfsbiichlein^ s. v.

* Lindsay, p. 164.

* Neue, Formenl. III. 253.

TJie Clausula in Aiiniiianus MarcclliiiHs. 211

In the clausula fortuito monstravit 'I. 303. 17) we may note the
penultimate accent oi fortuito.

In all perfect forms endin^- in -iit the accent falls upon the penult :

interiit: I. 50.4; II. 36.10; 90. 15; 130.5; 160.4; 207.13.
introiit: I. 248. 11 ; II. 59. 9; 78. 29 ; 118. 3
abiit : I. 268. 1 ; II. 139. 23
transiit: II. 116. 31
desiit : II. 36. 3

For this also we have testimony from other sources.^

Both the perfect subjunctive and the future-perfect indicative seem
to have an accented penult in the first and second persons ])lural ;
in I. 57. 8 legerimus is subjunctive, while in 11. 10. V^ fecerimus ^.Yl<\
(31) egeritis are indicative. I find no instance of either form with
antepenultimate accent.^

There are several cases in which the third person plural of the
perfect indicative appears to be accented on the antepenult, not
only when the endings is -eruut, but also, oddly enough, where it
is -ere. Thus II. 145. 7 oppositis coeperimt; 147. 6 proccsserunt lon-
gius; 215. 29 coinpulerunt sedes (where V, however, has compulit], and
I. 75. 19 inviae fuere (cf. II. 121. 2fuere gestarum) ; II. 109. 17 intercessere
pauci; 194. 22 parave re casus. As it is hardly possible to do away with
the cases in -ere by changing them all to -erunt, we must exjDlain them
by the inference that the}' derive their accent by analogy from that
of forms in -erunt, which, though exceptional, are legitimate. It is
an interesting example of reciprocal influence, inasmuch as the usual
long e in erunt is thought to have come from -er-e.

In the case of genitives in -ius we may assume that the accentu-
ation varied from one word to another in ordinary speech. Among
the words of this sort employed by Ammianus totius (I. 102. 23 :
154.27; 160.31; 211.11; II. 156.6) and tinius (II. 270. 20) have
penultimate accent. On the other hand, I find antepenultimate ac-
cent in ipsius (I. 58. 10; II. 220. 2b), illius (I. 21. 7; II. 86. 1 ; 151. 3)
and alterius (I. 131. 15; 314. 18).

The only marked lapse from correct pronunciation in the direc-
tion of Romance development is to be found in the penultimate

^ Cf. Serv. ad Aen. I. 451; Lindsay, p. 182; Sommer, p. 612 ; Bednara,
Archiv fiir lat. Lex. XIV. 850.

- See Lindsay, p. 500 and Sommer, p. 623. In II. 206. 24 quoque
voierinuts is ambiguous, for quoque may be pronounced in three sj-llables
(see below).

212 Austin Morris Harmon,

accentuation of iiidiciolnm in the clausula noti iudicioli est nostri
(II. 119. 30 and 146. 11), which is a distinct vulgarism. ^ But he ac-
cents malleolus on the antepenult (I. 244. 14; II. 99.11), and also
Pute'olos (II. 147. 9).

The evidence for the accentuation of words borrowed from other
languages, which has heretofore been somewhat scanty, is con-
siderably increased by the material which we get from Ammianus,
who often employs foreign words in the clausula. Far the greater
part of these words is derived from the Greek, as we should ex-
pect, or from some other language through the mediation of the
Greek. Such words are not affected by the penultimate law, but
they bear an accent derived from the Greek.

In support of this statement I shall adduce first a list of words
borrowed from the Greek or through the Greek, which according
to the penultimate law should be accented on the penult, but are
accented by Ammianus on the antepenult.

OviJiyya^ appellamus I. 127. 1

6()iL,0PTag. appellamus I. 161. 17

Graeco sermone (Siyo/iitjrig I. 200. 21

vocamus (Xjr67i(>ov6iv I. 201. 1

fragmentis et cylindris II. 274. 12

architecti^ promittebant II. 49. 8; cf. II. 18. 15

et prima species luis pandemus adpellatur, . . . secunda

epidemus, . . . tertia loemodes I. 176. 8

monstrat amphicyrti I. 200. 24

heroi consecratis I. 281. 17

Misopogonem appellavit I. 294. 19

Epiphania dictitant I. 2.33. 22 ; cf. Bcfana

operatur Adrastia I. 42. 5 ; cf. 269. 10

Antiochiam venimus II. 58. 13; Antiochiae claudi I. 293. 16;

cf. I. 25.6; 29.6; 153.27; 195.19; II. 59.4; 143.25;

259. 27
Alexandria et Hermupolis 1.331.2; cf. 329.22; Alexandriae

contigit II. 93. 15
Nicomediam pergit II. 83. 18; cf. 84. 23; Nicomediae clades I.

125. 11

• Cf. filioli\ magistro in Commodian {Iiis/r. II. 26. 6, p. 45 Ludwig)^
Faviola and Liliola in Venantius Fortunatus (VIII. 1. 42; 3. 43). See
Lindsaj', p. 164 ; Sommer. p. 103 ; Nyrop, Gramm. histor. d. I. Franfaise I
(2nd. ed.), p. 161, 137, 7; Jespersen, Lrhrh. d. Phonetik p. 192 §198.

"- From u{)-^iiiy.T(><;^ not any^ai-ATMv. V. Saalfeld, Tois. Italogracc. s. v.

The Clausula in Amniiamis Marcellinus. 213

Apamiam positi II. 140. 7

prope Ba.siliam II. 207. 18

Abdera visitur I. 275. 9

Ancyram redit I. 285. 32 ; cf. II. 60. 22

Edessam venit I. 222. 3

Arethusae captus I. 51. 18

Calycadnus interscindit I. 27. 30

ingrossus est Perinthum I. 266. 23; cf. II. 274. 30; 275. 18;

Apris et Perintho II. 103. 5
Aegyptum petens I. 271. 24; Aegypto circumlata I. 306. 1 ;

cf. 306. 12; 295. 21; 43. 21
Euxinus appellatur I. 281. 7; Euxino ponto II. 204. 15
sunt in Hellespontum II. 246. 17 ; cf. 85. 2 ; contentus Hellesponto

I. 160. 23 ; cf. II. 242. 5
Cherronesus est propinqua I. 280. 30 ; cf. II. 90. 31

colonia Miletus II. 126. 9

protentam ad Pachynum I. 242. 8

contingit et Abydon I. 275. 20

est Criumetopon I. 278. 26

Darei pater I. 327. 24.

Seleuci regis I. 27. 31 ; Nicatoris Seleuci 325. 32
Aesopi cavillationibus 1 II. 214.7

magnus somniabat Alexander I. 45. 22 ; cf. II. 86. 31 ; rapuissent

Alexandrum I. 321. 14; cf. 152. 22; 309. 21 ; vicum Alex-

andri I. 119. 25; cf. 321. 20; credatur Alexandre I. 214. 6
Menander comicus I. 257. 23

Miconas videbis et Lachetas II. 149. 29
apud Platonem legitur II. 39. 29

Arachotoscrenem appellatam I. 335. 29
transiere Thermodontis I. 278. 19

cognominantur Acontisma II. 101. 30; cf. 81. 28

Tios et Amastris I. 277. 29

These words obviously derive their accent from the Greek : it
.should be observed, however, that they are emancipated from the
working of the Greek ultima law. For instance, the word cyliudris
in being accented on the antepenult not only violates the Latin law
because of its long penult but also the Greek law because of its
long ultima; both languages (though for different reasons) demand
an accent on the penult. We must conclude, therefore, that in
such words the antepenultimate accent is brought over from the

' See p. 168 ff. regarding this form of clausula.
Trans. Coxn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 14 Oct., 1910.

214 Austin Morn's Hannofi,

Greek casus recti (cylindrus = xrAn'(^()oi;), and then retained through-
out the Latin inflection in accord with the spirit of the Latin lan-
guage. This slight concession to the Latin genius is significant, for
it indicates that the mode of accentuation with which we are deal-
ing was not peculiar to Ammianus, but was at least more or less
general in his time.^

The next list contains words which Ammianus accents in Greek
fashion upon a short penult.

^aOLlia et reliqua L 122. 2

ut hvijd^ii Graeci dicimus stultum, et noctem evcfQODjV
et furias Evfitvidug I. 281. 8

metuens tyrannidis ^ II. 106. 9

pansa chlam3^de I. 83. 14

Rhodopen et fretum II. 253. 7; cf. 101. 25

Anaphe et Rhodus I. 127. 20

Helicen exsurgens I. 278. 25

Meroe et Delta I. 298. 17

dicitur Orsiloche I. 281. 11

portus Acone I. 278. 3

Jovis filius et Danaes I. 28. 5

latitudinem Sauromatas I. 280. 18 ; II. 235. 1

memorantur Odrysae II. 102. 6

Leontino Gorgia II. 209. 22

Anaxagoras adfirmat L 127. 2; cf. 275. 30

Pythagorae decrevit I. 69. 16

dicitur et Socrates I. 258. 2; cf. II. 146. 14

sollertia Dinocratis I. 303. 13

idem Arsaces II. 51. 11 ; cf. 121. 30

Aristoteles adfirmat I. 232. 12

Aristomenes e latebris II. 160. 7

Hermogene defuncto I. 241. 4

Asclepiades philosophus^ I. 293. 20

philosophus Simonides 11. 169. 19

lyrici Bacchylidis II. 40. 3

Euripidis sepulchrum II. 102.1 ;cf.Sidon.Apoll.IX. 234

Thucydides exponit I. 175. 27

> See pp. 218—220.

■^ The word occurs also in Sedulius with this accentuation : see p. 220.
note 1.

' On the accent of philosophus see below, p. 217.

The Clausula in Ammiatius Marcellinus. 215

inLsse Persidos I. 328. 16; Persidis I. 28. 24; 319.4; 321.6;

II. 54. 18; Persidem 74. 17; 206. 11; Perside I. 321. 26

Hesperidas appellant I. 303. 4

clauditur Maeotidos I. 276. 23.

Chalcida transmissi sunt II. 3. 27

Propontideni et Thracias I. 322. 11; cf. 11. 44. 11

insulaeque Stoechades I. 73. 26

atque Cycladas I. 275. 2

sunt Symplegades I. 277. 13

Teredona porrigitur I. 323. 5

The third list comprises a few words that have an accented ultima.

Thebais adpellatur I. 117. 17

Copton et Antinou I. 302. 22

Seston et CallipoUn I. 275. 19

Poliorcetes appellatus est II. 9. 9

Perseus memoratur I. 28. 4

Tyaneus Appollonius I. 258. 6

This list is short, but it should be noted that on the analogy of
Thebais we can postulate nominatives with accented ultima from
the oblique cases of such words as tyrannidis, chlamyde, Persidis,
Maeotidos, Chalcida, Propontideuu and probably Teredona.

We find, then, in Ammianus a great number of instances in which
the Greek accent is taken over with the borrowed word. Against
these I can set only a few exceptional cases in which the Greek
accent is not preserved.

Exceptions are proportionally most frequent among those words
which in Greek have an accented ultima. With Seston and Copton
in the last list we may compare the following words.

choros I. 279. 12

chamiilcis I. 119. 26

Thessali I. 282. 21

Adiabenam I. 310. 25

lyricus I. 18. 11

hydraulica I. 21. 19

hieroglyphicas I. 118. 16

physicae I. 118. 29

mystica I. 171. 19; cf 258. 7

In these cases the accent is thrown back, and its place is appa-
rently determined by the penultimate law. But in Aegyptidcae i\.
296. 17 j and Constantidcas (I. 247. 12j it goes back only to the a,
which is short. This is paralleled by the statement of a grammarian

216 Austin Morris Harmon.

{de acccntilms liber: K. III. 525. 27) : quae autem habent c inter / et u
in paenultimo loco, corripiuntur, ut portions Gallicus Italicus Ale-
mannicus Romanicus : excipiuntur ea quae habent a, ut Taurinacus.
The phenomenon is perhap.s attril^utable to a tendency to accent
the broader vowel.^

Against Teredona, in which the accent is probably on the ultima
in the nominative, we may set Amdzones i\. 278. 9 : II. 235. 22) and
especially Chalccdona (I. 267. 12: 272. 10: II. 89. 27), with recessive
accent. There is nothing to show how Ammianus accented the
nominative in these two words. In Paphlago (I. 239. 18) it appa-
rently falls on a short penult : if this assumption is correct, it may
be derived from the oblique cases iPaphldgonis)?- But it is ill
arguing from isolated instances.

From our limited material it wovild seem that only unfamiliar
proper names retain their Greek accent when that would fall upon
the ultima — that familiar words, and especially common nouns, throw
their accent back to a place usually but not invariabl}' determined
by the penultimate law.

Ammianus almost always retains the Greek accent when it falls
upon the penult or the antepenult. A notable group of exceptions
however, is formed by place-names ending in -la, all of which he
accents on the antepenult, whether they come from the Greek or
not. Thus

Bithynia I. 37. 34 : 276. 5 : II. 85. 1

Sicilia I. 43. 22

Dacia I. 48. 17: II. 101. 20

Syria I. 76. 7

Aegyptia I. 119. 4

Mesopotamia I. 123. 3: 154. 18: 208. 18

Pannonia I. 135. 1 : 189. 19

Armenia I. 222. 2

Hiberia I. 241. 1

Mygdonia I. 277. 6

Paphlagonia I. 277. 27

Cilicia I. 309. 32

iMedia I. 311. 22

Assyria I. 324. 9

Phrygia I. 324. 25

Arachosia I. 335. 25

Cajipadocia II. 59. 19

> Cf. hidicioli above, p. 212. * See p. 171.

The Clausula in Animiatius MarcelUmis. 217

Galatia II. 87. 6

Lycia II. 87. 10

Asia II. 125. 15

Francia II. 208. 22

Thracia II. 240. 20

Pamphylia II. 245. 26

Macedonia II. 245. 27

Moesia II. 252. 18

This practice is of course due not only to the long usage of
Greek names in -m like Mesopotamia, but to their analogy with
names purely Latin like Italia, Graecia. It would have been utterly
impossible to preserve any rational distinction. The clausula The-
baidem et Libyain (I. 302. 17) shows that Libya (Aii-iv)i) belongs in
this category.

From Eusebia (I. 94. 15; 12G. 11; 240. 7j, ecclesia (II. 160. 3) and
philosophia (I. 326. 14) we may perhaps conclude that not only
names of countries but also all other Greek loan-words in -ui were
accented on the antepenult by Ammianus.^ No such convenient and
sensible rule prevailed in later times- -in fact, so great confusion arose
that even native Latin words in -ia occasionally had penultimate
accent. 2

There are in Ammianus a few compound words with exceptional
accentuation for which the reason is not clear to me :

theologi I. 127. 16

philosophus I. 298. 20; II. 169. 19

lotophagi I. 22. 6

galactophagi I. 333, 14

Beyond these exceptions I have observed only the following :

Helena I. 279. 22

Homerus I. 296. 32 ; 276. 6 ; 257. 27 ; 334. 15

Milonem II. 221. 2

Theodoras II. 163.5; 169. 1

Nicaea II. 82. 13; 83. 26; 89. 16; 111. 18

Homerus and Helena may perhaps be accounted for as names known
mainly from books and Latinized through long currency in the
speech of educated men : they are not quite on a par with names
like Alexander, for instance, which on account of its frequency in
every-day use could not be Latinized so easily. A Greek slave
would probably have answered more readil}^ to Alexander than to
Alexander. The pronunciation Milonem as against Platonem may

> Cf. K. III. 522. 9. « E. ff. I'ltalie, from Italia.

218 Austin Morris Harmon,

be due to the influence of the Latin name Milo, but I can see no
satisfactory reason for Theodorus. The penultimate accentuation of
Nicaea is especially odd in view of the fact that the modern names
of the two prominent cities formerly called Nicaea, Isnik in Bith3-nia
(to which Ammianus refers), and Nizza in Italy, both testify to an
original antepenultimate accent. We cannot suspect Ammianus of
ignorance, for having seen much military service in those parts, he
probably had visited the city, and certainly had often heard its name
spoken. Can it be due to some whim of his own or of his imme-
diate circle that the name is not derived from the name of the
daughter of Antipater, but from the adjective vr/.aXo^'i^

The upshot of our investigations is that words having penultimate
or antepenultimate accent in Greek are with few exceptions ac-
cented on the same syllable by Ammianus, and that even among
words with accented ultima some (apparently such as are less
familiar) retain the accent on that S3dlable.

This result tallies with testimony from two other sources, — from
the Latin grammarians and from the language itself.

The grammarians, to be sure, are not all in agreement. Diomed
and Servius, followed by many later and lesser lights, hold that
Greek words should be accented in Greek fashion when the Greek
inflectional forms are preserved, but in Latin fashion when the Latin
terminations are used.- This would sanction Ammianus' pronuncia-
tion Persidos, but not Persidis. hi his case no such distinction can
be drawn, for if we can put any faith at all in the text tradition
he uses Greek and Latin forms indiscriminately and accents all alike
in the Greek fashion.

But this distinction has the ear-marks of pedantry upon it. The
pseudo-Sergius, who gives us the fullest discussion of the question
(K. IV. 526. 9—528. 27), is at once more liberal and more trust-
worthy. His passage is too long to quote in its entirety, though it
merits reading as an example of the work of the Roman grammarian
at his best, displaying unusually careful observation mingled with
a modicum of pedantr}-. According to him, Greek words when
they keep the Greek forms of inflection must retain the Greek ac-

' Cf. Steph. Byz. s. v. 'kiytica Sk nQonaQo^vioyioi. al rf' eari Nixcciog, to
i)-riXvxot' N/xaia. Compare also the fact that Nicaea in Phocis had penul-
timate accent (Forbiger, A/t Geog. III. 612), and the tradition that Nicaea
in Bithynia was founded hj people from this latter Nicaea (Memnon in
Photius. Bihl. 233 Bel-heri).

2 Diomed K. I. 433. 4: Servius in Do7i. K. IV. 427. 10: 525. 8: ad
Georg. I. 59.

The Clausula in Animianus Marcellinus. 219

cent. Similarly, Latin words inflected after Greek models must be
accented as their models are accented ; for instance, Scipiades, Mem-
miades with stressed penult. But Greek words taken over into the
Latin inflectional system may be treated in two ways ; the}' may
be accented either on the Greek basis, as ae'ris^ aethe'ris, Evander,
tyrannus, or on the Latin basis, as deris, ae'theris, Evander, tyrdnmts.
But although the Greek system may be followed at will, it must
be used correctly if at all : in quibiisdam enim nominibus licet vidcre
plerosque, recti casus ambiguo tenore deceptos, mendose oblicos pro-
ferre, ut qui in patrico casii Evandri et tyranni primam syllabam
acuunt potius quam mediant, nullam secuti rationem. This grammarian,
then, freely concedes the propriety of accenting Greek loan-words
in Greek fashion as Ammianus does, and even acknowledges, though
only to censure, the practice of carrying antepenultimate accent
through the inflection regardless of the quantity of the final .syllable.

Donatus and Sergius go eveiT farther than our unknown, for they
no longer admit a choice between the Greek and the Latin basis
of accentuation, l^ut insist upon the Greek : in the words of Sergius
(K. IV. 483. 29) the rule is stated, Graeca autem sins accentibus pro-
nuntianda esse noscamus}

It has seemed best to me to dwell upon the precepts of the gram-
marians at some length in order to bring out the value of the passage
in the pseudo-Sergius, which has heretofore received little attention.
The evidence of the language itself may be despatched briefly.

A certain amount of information as to the pronunciation of loan-
words is obtained from the late poets, in whom we find false quan-
tities which can only be due to Greek accentuation. For example,
Venantius Fortunatus employs scansions like Cycladas (and often
-ades, -idis and the like), Ardtus, eniblema, probleuia, idolutn.'^ But
the bulk of the evidence is afforded by the Romance languages, in
which the rule holds that words introduced into Latin from the
Greek retain the Greek accent in their Romance derivatives, except
when the Greek word was oxytone.'^

In a general way, then, we learn nothing from Ammianus that
is startlingly new. His testimony is chiefly valuable because it
emphasizes with enormous weight a feature of late Latin pronunci-

* Donatus (K. IV. 371. 27) saA^S, sane Graeca verba Graecis accentibus
efferimus. This is quoted from Diomed verbatim, but the siguificant
proviso of Diomed, si isdem Utteris emintiaveri»tus^ is left off.

"^ See Leo's metrical index.

' Meyer-Liibke, Roma?!. Gramm. I. p. 3-4 : Gramm. Storico-comp. delta
Ling. Ital. p. 84.

220 AHsti)i Morris Harmon,

ation that we have been inchned to overlook, and because it shows
that this accentuation was not confined to vulgar speech, but was
in vogue in the best circles as early as the fourth century.

It would be beyond the scope of this treatise to consider how
much older than Ammianus the custom of Greek accentuation may
be. In any case such an investigation would bear little fruit at
present, owing to the paucity of data. Further study of Latin prose-
rh3^thm may eventually help to solve the problem.^

We come now to the matter of loan-words derived from languages
other than the Greek. In the lists of Greek words given above a
number of words like Calycadims are cited, which were borrowed
from some other language through the medium of Greek : their
treatment is of course in no wise different from that of pure Greek
words. So in Ldranda (I. 11. 10) and in Artogc'rassa CAQTCcyfjQai'.
II. 123. 18) Ammianus' accent agrees with the Greek. The curious
name Caenos Gallicanos (I. 38. 1) evidently is influenced by the
Greek : it may be corrupt, for Gallicanus, with which it appears to
be connected, uniformly has an accented penult in Latin (I. 201. 21 :
II. 60. 7 ; 228. 15). Bardxmalcha (II. 5. 24) and Nadrmalcha (II. 6. 24;
21. 29) are not to my knowledge mentioned elsewhere, so that we
are ignorant of the accent which they bore in Greek. How Am-
mianus pronounced Amida is uncertain, for we find both Amida
(I. 168. 2) and Amida (222. 6). Perhaps he was uncertain himself
in the matter. In Amano (I. 28. 17) and Naessum (II. 71. 13; I. 246.
12 ; 247. 30) Ammianus accents the antepenult, whereas in Greek
the accent is certainly on the ultima in the one {rb 'Af/avor) and
probably in the other {iVicior>6<^). The pronunciation of Abarne
(I. 167. 10) with antepenultimate accent is paralleled by the Greek
form "i(jf«(>ro^, but the word itself is a transliteration of 'A^uitvii. A
similar thing occurs in Bczabde (I. 253. 18; 222. 16), a transliteration
of B%iCi^<Stj. Finally, I may cite Gdlatae (I. 68. 18 ; II. 60-61) Sdr-
matae (I. 136. 18; 21 ; 32; 137. 11 ; IL 198. 7), and sdtrapa (I. 181. 2;
II. 51. 19; 36.32; 121. 12). In how far any of these words may
derive its accentuation from the language in which the word itsell
originated I cannot attempt to sa}'.^

' It may be noted here that in Sedulius the words Cycladas (Huemer
p. 171. 11) and (in the oblique cases) tyrannis (p. 210. 11 : 222. 19 :
253. 10) have the Greek accent (cf. Candel p. 87). No other loan-words
occur in the clausula with him, except perhaps Esaias (p. 274. 4).

* On satrapa^ however, see Seelman, p. 49. On a previous occasion (i*?//."/;/.
Mils. 1907, p. 159) I have hinted tliat the accent of rumpia in Latin may
possibly be Tkracian.

The Clausula in Aimiiiaiius Marcellinus. 221

Ammianus of course employs many loan-words which are in no
wise connected with the Greek. To a specialist a study of the
accentuation of these words might reveal much. I shall cite only
a few which have seemed to me in one way or another especially
interesting.

Hannibal I. 285. 3; Hannibalem 156. 14

Saxones II. 151. 24; 152. 12; 222. 13; Santones I. 73. 18

Vasatae I. 73. 19 ; in Ausonius Vasates (III. 5 ; XI. 2. 4 ; XV.
26. 8)

Antennacum I. 147. 32 (Andernachj

Haemimontum II. 90. 10

Vagabanta II. 161. 9

Dibaltum II. 253. 29 ; 264. 16

Alatheus II. 45. 5

Arintheus II. 71. 22

Dagalaifus II. 15. 5

Frigeridus II. 248. 25 ; 249. 4

Richomeres II. 252. 10

Libinonem v. p. 132: uncertain

Saphrax, Saphracis II. 264. 28

Tamsapor I. 90. 23 ; Tamsapore I. 155. 15 ; Sapori I. 123. 23 ; but
Saporem 212. 9

Some of these examples show an accent which does not accord
with the penultimate law and which is probably influenced by a
foreign system. In dismissing them from consideration we may
quote Sergius (K. IV. 483. 29 ff.) : in barbaricis nominibus nulla sui
ratione sunt, sed quali volumus sane non aspero proferamus accentu :
which probably means no more than that Sergius could see that
the penultimate law did not hold, and in the lack of any tangible
system could only refer his readers to good use.

Before leaving the subject of accentuation we should note that
Ammianus does not give us any light on the important question of •
secondary accent, for as we have seen already, he avoids the use
of the one-word clausula, which alone could be of any assistance
to us in this connection.^

There are two considerations, however, that point to the con-
clusion that the secondary accent must have l^een light. In the
first place Ammianus is reluctant to admit two dissyllables (par\-a
manus) as the equivalent of a tetrasyllable ( postulerunt) in the close
of form III.2

' See p. 185 ff. « V. p. 184.

222 Austin Morris Hamton,

Secondly, if it must be conceded that certain pentesyllables had
their secondar}' accent on the first syllable whereas others had it on the
second, this would mean that there is a slight disagreement between
different clausulae of form III, type ;', some presenting the scheme
r^ r>^ ^n^j r<j r\j r<j r\j and others the scheme r<^ r\j\r'(j r\j r>sj i<sj r\j.
Now I find no inclination evinced by Ammianus to avoid this hypo-
thetical difficult}' ; there are no signs that he made any attempt at
all to pick and choose between pentesyllables in the construction
of this cadence. It follows, therefore, either that all pentesyllables
had their secondary accent on the same syllable (which does not
seem in the least likely) or that the discrepancy in the location of
their secondary accents did not bother Ammianus, — in which case
the secondary accent must have been light.*

SYLLABICATION.

Under the head of s3dlabication we may first consider the matter
of elision and hiatus, which can be summarily disposed of. A glance
at the text of Book XXI will show that Ammianus admits hiatus
with great freedom. Under certain circumstances, of course, his
desire to secure length by position bars it out: for example, he
would not admit praecipue artis or Caesarem absens. In such clau-
sulae, however, it is not the hiatus that is objectionable, but the
failure to make position. Wherever a syllable preceding caesura
is not required to make position, it may stand in hiatus, as in dia-
demali utebatur, cogitatione intcnta, eoruni ecclesiaui etc.^ Elision and
ecthlipsis are not employed at all.

Aphaeresis appears to occur in the following clausulae.'

1 V. p. 182-183.

* V. pp. 192, 195. The statistics there given show tliat iu clausulae
with y caesura hiatus occurs in about 10 per cent of the instances, where-
as in those clausulae with cT caesura in which the c)' syllable is not re-
quired to be long it occurs in about 3 per cent. This discrepancy can
hardly be attributed to a desire to avoid hiatus in (f clausulae : in the
one case {cogitatione intcnta^ etc.) it is the last syllable of a penultimate
word that is affected, in the other {diademati tttcbatur) the last syllable
of an antepenultimate word ; hence we could not expect the proportion
of hiatus to be the same in both.

^ In Ammianus there is no reason to assume that when the auxiliary
is the last word it stands, as it were, extra metrum and does not form
part of the clausula. Wherever it occurs last it gives a regular clausula

The Clausula in Avimianus Marcellinus. 223

Rigomagum opjiidumst I. 80. 11

Aquiloni obnoxiast I. 167. 6

interim consentaneumst I. 287. 29

Persidos Gedrosiast I. 336. 1

velut solariumst I. 337. 2

properare dispositust II. 260. 13

cedidisse existimatust II. 271. 7

Tritumst quadriduum II. 48. 8

These examples are hardly numerous enough to establish the use
of aphaeresis be3^ond doubt, but it should be pointed out that while
cases in which it apparently must occur are rare, there are many
in which it ma}^ occur. I refer to clausulae like vivus exustus est,
fidentius absolutus est, which may be classed either without aphae-
resis under forms II and IV respectively or with aphaeresis under
I and III, and also to a few clausulae like dispositunt est consuiumato
(II. 195. 25), which may be read either est consutmnato (I /3) or
dispositumst consurnmato (III 6).

Of syncope I find only one example : in the clausulae exempta
nunc valida sunt (II. 138. 20) we must assume that valida was pro-
nounced valda} It may be that in stivam adprehendit (I. 14. 10) we
have another case (adprendit), but there the clausula is uncertain.
Most of the phenomena which we have to deal with under the
head of syllabication are cases either of synizesis or dialysis — that
is to say, either of diminution in the normal number of syllables in
a word caused by the transformation of vocalic / and u into conso-
nants, or conversely of increase in the normal number of syllables
caused by the transformation of consonantal i and u into vowels.
Examples of S3'nizesis are given in the following list.

-ti etiam I. 268. 5 ; II. 142. 21 (cf. Consentius 395. 3)
negotium I. 55. 24

gignentium I. 332. 5

repugnantia I. 254. 10

reverentiam I. 246. 25

laetior ^ II. 83. 11

Terentio II. 124. 8

notitm II. 171. 22

indicantia II. 218. 7

of form II (vi'vics exustus est) or of form IV {^Jidentms absolutus est), except
in the cases of aphaeresis here cited and in exempta nunc valida sunt (II.
138. 20), where I assume syncope {valda) : see below.

' But tliere are cases in which this word has the normal trisyllabic
pronunciation : cf. validus et castellis I. 30. 5 ; validis iujigeretui- II. 243. 7.

224

Austin

Morris Harmon,

-di

obsidium

11. 20. 29

-ci

provincia 11.

188.

17;

perhaps 11. 72. 3

-si

perpensius

11. 7.3. 16

-ffi

regius

11. 77. 26

-li

alia
melioris

11. 216. 22; 233
I. 77. 14

intellegibilium

1. 199. 6

-ri

S3Tiis

imperium

memoriae

1. 161. 4

I. 805. 2

II. 176. 20

-pi

Aethiopia

I. 28. 5

•chi

Antiochiam

I. 185.9

-cu

promiscue II.

247,

3:

promiscuae I. 76.

These cases do not call for extended comment, since the phen-
omenon which they exemplify is already well known from the oc-
casional practice of the poets, the testimony of the grammarians
and the evidence of the Romance languages.^ It is remarkable only
that instances of synezesis are relatively so infrequent in Ammianus.^
Examples of dialysis are much more common. 1 submit first a
number of instances in which intervocalic /' appears and counts as
a syllable.

Trai'anus II. 203. 25; 248. 12; 249. 8; 260. 1

Troia 1. 279. 21 -^

ai'unt 1. 282. 8 ; 248. 21

Aquileia I. 247. 20 ; 248. 15

Pompeius 1. 87. 4 ; 11. 189, 24

Fonteius I. 75. 10

plebeius 1. 232. 15; II. 98. 19.

ei'us I. 258. 31 ; II. 90. 8

This pronunciation of intervocalic / is occasionally, though rarely,
exemplified in the usage of the poets.* In Ammianus, however, not

> See Miiller de Re Metr. p. 249 ff. : Lindsay, p. 142 ff. : Sommer,
pp. 144, 145.

* It is possible that some cases which I have listed under forms II and
IV {adulatioiie Jlagrantintii : decerneret in pla7xitie) should be read with synezesis
as I and III. But I liave preferred not to assume it when unnecessary.

* Priscian K. II. 287. 8 classes Troia with Italia. Phrvgia, Lydia, etc. Cf.
Part. K. III. 467. 12.

* In pure Latin words it is very rare : see L. Miiller, de Re Metr.
p. 264. Harper's Lexicon (and others') register Pompejus {trisyl.) or Pompeius
[qiiadrisyl.)., plebeiics {-ejus) and Fon tents— on what grounds I know not.

The Claitstila in Amniianus Marcellinus. 225

only does it occur freely, but it is the rule rather than the exception.
At least we may safely assert it to be the rule in the words Trai-
anus, Pompeiiis, plebeitts, Aquileia, Troia, Fonteius, for the clausulae
cited, in which / counts as a syllable, are the only clausulae in
which they occur.^ But in the clausula xit amnt in flammam (11.
131. 4) aiimt has consonantal i, eius often has it (e. g. I. 235. 2;
264. 6; II. 20. 22; 35. 28; 91. 3; 99. 1), and mains occurs several
times with consonantal i (I. 80. 25; II. 45. 31; 136. 7), but not to
my knowledge with syllabic /. Furthermore, intervocalic i seems to
be always (except in Traiamis) consonantal when it is pre-tonic; thus

aiebat I. 94 5; II. 175. 14 akbant I. 318. 22

maiora I. 23. 28 maiore I. 90. 2 maiores II. 145. 18

projecit I. 116. 28

eiectat 11. 19. 30

seiunctum I. 119. 25
Since the syllabication of i regularly appears in certain words, it
follows that we are dealing not so much with a metrical expedient
on the part of Ammianus as with a characteristic feature of his
ordinary pronunciation. Is it peculiar to him, or does he share it
with his times ? Lack of positive information as to the pronunciation
of his period precludes our answering this question definitely, but
it may be pointed out that Ammianus was a Greek, and that pre-
cisely this peculiarity was noted by Consentius as a fault in the
pronunciation of Latin-speaking Greeks.-

Coming now to the instances of the syllabication of n, we may
remark first that the word behia is always a trisyllable in Ammianus
(I. 15. 11 ; 283. 30; II. 32. 13; 46. 31). In this, of course, he agrees
with classical usage.

After 5 in suesco, snadeo and the like u is always syllabic.

suesco I. 89. 15 adsuesco L 137. 19; 11. 232. 28

adsuetus, consuetus I. 11. 20; 88.8; 113.1; 136.31; 271.2;
IL 112. 19 etc.

adsuefactus I. 269. 26; II. 38. 16

suadeo L 124. 23; 308. 31 ; 318. 17 ; H. 247. 8; 262. 21

suasorum I. 219. 15

A fairly extensive search in the poets for an instance of the quadri-
syllabic scansion of Pompehis has not proven fruitful. For Trota see
Sen. Troad. 824, 853.

' Except those in which the word containing i comes last and which
are consequently indecisive ; for example, ventttm est Aqm'leiam (I. 49.
31) may be read either as III or IV.

- Consentius K. V. 394. 11 ff. : Lindsay p. 45.

226 Aitsti)i Morris Harmon,

In the usage of the poets suesco not infrequently is trisyllabic,
suadeo occasionally.^ It is not surprising, then, that Ammianus should
make use of this pronunciation, but very surprising that he should
use it always.

At once the most wide-spread and the most striking phenomenon
of this nature is that u may count as a syllable in the combination
qu-. Though the following list of instances is long, it is by no
means exhaustive. The words cited are classified for the sake of
convenience into three groups according as qu heads a post-tonic
tonic or pre-tonic syllable.

Dialysis in post-tonic syllable

aquis undabundis I. 127. 1

aquae furtim I. 177. 13

aquis et externis I. 280. 4

equis et morigeris I. 134. 15

equis concidit I. 318. 11

equi terrebantur II. 32. 5

eqiios aut aurigas II. 145. 15

eqiiis velocissimis II. 201. 8

eqiiis evolarunt II. 244. 2

antiquum timens I. 242. 27

antiquam sobolem I. 279. 16

antiqiia sed deserta I. 303. 2

longinqiia pertimescens I. 64. 18

longinqiia formidabat I. 236. 7

aeqiium nee laudari II. 57. 9

aequum nee sileri II. 180. 3^

propinquo convectari II. 185. 13

oblique tenebantur I. 218. 31

sequens Lunae I. 295. 29 (cf. I. 71. 18; 79.6)
(enclitic -que)

legibusqiie discrepantes I. 72.7; cf. 86.9; 168.9; II. 236.2;
245. 28 ; 256. 22 ; 268. 26 ^

uterque etc. I. 75. 26; 230. 8 ; 252. 17; II. 15. 17; 17. 2

quisque I. 286. 7 ; II. 4. 30

plerique I. 28. 13; 36. 17; 331. 13; II. \'6. ,32

usque I. 286. 4 ; II . 110. 16 ^_

* With, reference to suadet see also Serv. ad Aen. I. 857 secundum
nattiram dtiae sunt syllabae^ sed multi trisyllabnm putant. Cf. Lindsay, p. 53.

* This justifies aeqiium nee taeeri I. 207. 11, where aequum is inserted
by Gelenius.

' Only a few instances out of many score are here cited.

The Clausula in Af^niiu'anus Marcellinus. 227

quoque II. 143. 25 ; 206. 24
ubique II. 274. 24
(enclitic -quam)—

quisquam I. 16. 32; 128. 28; 145. 16; 146. 11 ; 154. 6; 231. 22;

258. 17; 272. 1; 281. 18; 286. 31; II. 265. 16
perquam I. 189. 5 (p. gnarus) = 147. 20 = II. 104. 12 = 126. 31 =

190. 18 ; I. 260. 29 (p. scientissimus) = II. 2. 21 ; II. 50. 25

(p. oportunum) = 214. 30 ; I. 15. 30 ; 185. 28 ; 331. 1 ; II. 167.

31 ; 235. 10 (trisyllabic in all the cases that I have found)
umquam I. 14. 14; 91. 7

numquam I. 15. 25; 70. 21 ; 167. 13; 260. 5; 325. 6
nusquam I. 300. 30; usquam 319. 30
potiusquam I. 298. 3; cf. I. 65. 24; 124. 13; 137. 12; II. 41. 8

Dialysis in tonic syllable

casu propinquabant I. 11. 13

urbi propinquaret I. 91. 22

ambitioso propinquantis II. 104. 11

editum aequabant II. 14. 20

celsitudinis aeqiiatae I. 179. 20

ominis loquamur II. 144.22

Pannonias et Quadi II. 71. 1 ; cf. 216. 32; 239. 30; I. 134. 5

divisa quattuor I. 72. 24

modis quattuor I. 127. 17

ambigerentur quaedam I. 32. 27

membra quaedam I. 123. 28

opinantur quidam I. 137. 14

(relative pronoun)

relaturi quae audirent I. 7.5; cf. 99. 24; 135. 26; 218.10;

277. 17 ; II. 16. 11 ; 162. 18 ; 207. 6 ; 219. 13
exposuisse quod elegi I. 65. 26; cf. 66. 13; 140. 15; II. 61, 23
discant qui ignorant I. 119. 7
iste qiiem videmus I. 94. 3
adventanti quas petebat II. 214. 21
pacem quam poscebant I. 137. 6; II. 58. 18
nocilura quam delictis II. 125. 8; cf. I. 66. 30; 261. 16

Dialysis in a pretonic syllable

recreati et quiete I. 11. 11; cf 99. 18; 152. 4; II. 199. 14

nimio quassatus II. 21. 24

peritos quaeritabant I. 173. 6; cf. II. 45. 9

regale quaerebatur I. 32. 18 : cf. 292. 31

228 Austin Morris Harmon,

iusta querelarum I. 130. 4; II. 195. 14
tumultuando querebatur I. 288. 31
eum sequebatur I. 98. 16; cf. 178. 21

Combination of dialysis in tonic syllable with shift of accent
quies data I. 225. 29
qiiies daret II. 48. 31
quies dedit II. 189. 29
qiiies parta II. 115. 17
quies prima II. 193. 12
quies oportuna 11. 22. 8
quibus inhiabant I 269. 26
quibus sperabatur II. 98. 21
quibus petebantur II. 273. 20
quibus habitant II. 234. 8
quidem sed deformibus II. 233. 12
quidem aliquotiens I. 247. 31 (p. 146. 1. 27)

Although this phenomenon is frequent, it is not constant like the
vocalization of n in shcsco, sitaiico. In the collection of 1811 sen-
tence-endings which has often heretofore supplied us with statistics
there are in all 71 clausulae in which a word containing qu appears.^
In 35 of these clausulae the n counts as a syllable, while in 36 it
does not. On this basis we may conclude that in general u is
syllabic in about 50 per cent of the instances in which it follows q.
It should be pointed out, however, that this is merely an average,
and that the ratio is not the same for all words.

In reliquus and similar words syllabication does not take place
at all, for the manifest reason that it would be impossible without
a prior shift of accent from the antepenult to the penult. With
this exception qu may count as a syllable, as far as I know, in any
word, no matter what position it occupies in the word. The rela-
tive frequency with which it so functions in any given word depends
upon the word itself rather than upon than the position of qn in
the word. In some words syllabication is optional, while in others
it is the rule. It is optional in -qtie, occurring in about half the
cases. In pronouns and adverbs ending in -qttani, in potiusquam
and the like, it is very nearly universal, for out of 12 clausulae
containing such words, -qnaui counts as a dissyllable in 11. The
relative pronoun is oftener a dissyllable than a monosyllable. Syl-

^ This does not include clausulae like sufficiens aqua^ in which the qu
follows the last clausula-accent. In these cases either pronunciation
would give a regular clausula.

The Clausula in Afnnn'ajius Marcellifius. 229

labication is certainly the rule in adjectives like aequus, and is uni-
versal in the nouns equus and aqua. It is universal also in quies,
both in the nominative, where it is combined with a shift of accent
(qiiies) and in the oblique cases {qiiiete). \\\ some other words, such
as Quadi, quattuor and querela, it seems to be universal, but they
do not occur often enoui^h to conclude this with certainty. In
quaeritabat, in sequcbatur and in propi}iquabaut, among- other words,
s3dlabication is optional.

So unusual is this feature of the pronunciation of Ammianus that
at first it seems almost incredible. But it is certain beyond all per-
adventure, inasmuch as the strength of the evidence which supports
it is in no wise conditioned upon the validity of the h3'pothesis that
all of the clausulae in Ammianus were originall}^ ' regular.' Even
if we reject that hypothesis, we must still admit that ' irregular '
cadences are very infrequent and exceptional. This admission ampl}'
suffices to establish the point in question, for clausulae such as those
cited above are too frequent to be classed as ' irregular.' The truth
comes out unequivocally if we look at the matter in the light of
statistics. In 1811 sentence-endings there are 22 which, taking
Gardthausen's text as it stands, unquestionably present irregular
cadences, and, as we have just seen, 35 which become irregular
unless the syllabication of // after q be admitted. To count these
35 clausulae as irregular would not greatl}' alter the relative status
of the regular and the irregular cadences. But it would bring it
al:)Out on the one hand that irregular cadences, though constituting
but 3 per cent of the total number of clausulae, would occur in
50 per cent of the clausulae which contain the combination qu, and
on the other hand that clausulae containing qu, though amounting
only to 4 per cent of the total number of clausulae, would form
60 per cent of the irregular cadences. It is plain, therefore, that
to avoid creating an inexplicable abnormality we must admit that
all or nearly all the apparently irregular clausulae containing the
combination qu are in reality regular. And they cannot l^e regular
unless qu counts as a syllable in them.

Not only is the principle certain in itself, but there is ample
justification for applying it wherever its application will make a
cadence regular. On this point it will take but little reflection to
convince the most sceptical. For instance in assuming, in order to
explain a single clausula,^ that quin counts as a dissyllable, we are
sup])orted by the analogy of the relative pronoun. If quod may so
count, why not quin ? And in asserting that quod ma}' so count,

' I. 159. 8 afuit quin caperer. v. p. 175.

Trans. Conn. Aoad., Vol. XVI. 15 Oct., 1910.

230 Austijt Morris Harmon,

we are governed by the fact that the ordinary pronunciation of
quod would create an abnormally large number of irregular cadences
containing this word— a fact that hardly calls for proof, as it should
be evident merely from the number of instances cited in the list
above. But to remove any possible doubt we may point out that
in the collection of sentence-endings the relative occurs in only 8
instances, of which 4 are irregular if we give the word its usual
pronunciation, whereas the monosyllable et occurs in 97 clausulae,
not one of which is irregular. While this comparison is not as im-
pressive as it would be if we took the entire text of Ammianus
into consideration, it nevertheless shows clearly that the relative is
not handled like other monosyllables. Hence we must infer that it
is not on all occasions monosyllabic.

Again, in the three words quies, quibus, qiiidein we have asserted
not only that the // counts as a syllable but that it bears the accent.
This remarkable phenomenon is far harder to admit than any other
application of the princijile of syllabic w. Yet it must be admitted,
for in every single clausula in which the word qnics appears it is
treated as if it were an antepenultimate trisyllable like requies instead
of a dissyllable. 1 Since this fact cannot possibly be due to the blind
working of chance, the onl}' admissible explanation is the obvious
one that to the ear of Ammianus the word had the effect of an
antepenultimate trisyllable— an effect which can have been secured
only by pronouncing it qi'iies. Thus the evidence for quies is just
as strong as the evidence for, let us say, subinde. And from quies
we get the key to the explanation of the apparently irregular ca-
dences in which quibus and quidem appear.^ It is very clear, then,
that in Ammianus the syllabication of u after q must be admitted.
In trying to account for a feature of his pronunciation so contrary
to good usage as exemplified in the poets, one is naturally tempted
to see in it an idiosyncracy due to his Greek birth, inasmuch as
transliterations like Koivtoz. indicate that to the Greeks the Latin u
seemed syllabic.^ This consideration should not be ignored, yet we
must not overrate its importance. In the first place it should be

^ Except in patitur quies (II. 67. 32), where either trisj'-llabic or dis-
s^'llabic pronviiiciation of qides would give a regular form.

^ That quibus should occur in 3 appai-eiitly irregular clausulae is in
itself suspicious, in view of the fac^t that it is rareh' to lie found in a
regular cadence.

^ This is shown not only by the fact that the u is represented by a
vowel, but even more conclusively by the accent which falls upon the
vowel.

The Clausula in Anntiiaints Marcelliints. 231

kept in mind not onl\- that the Histories were intended to appeal
to a more or less cultivated ])ublic, but that the}" were actually
read in sections before an audience and were received, if we are
to believe Libanius, with great applause. Consequentl}' we should
be chary of assuming the existence of any conspicuous idiosyncracies
or Hellenisms in the pronunciation of Ammianus ; the}- would not
have escaped attention and censure at the first reading. ^ Further-
more, there is some little outside evidence to show that this phen-
omenon was not entirely foreign to the Latin ear.

Lachmann long ago pointed out that in the earl}' poets the word
aqua is in several instances trisyllabic (aqua).^ This is certainly the
case in Lucretius VL 552 and 1072, and again in VL 868 if we
follow Lachmann in substituting aquae for laticis on the authority
of an unknown grammarian.'^ The same scansion is found in Ennius
in one place {Ann. 1 68 Vahlen), and perhaps in another [Ann. 379j.*
Lachmann, seconded by Bergk, maintained its occurrence in the
drama also ; this Ritschl stoutly denied,^ and the Plautine scholars
have acquiesced in his view. However it may be with this matter,
which in the absence of any new evidence it would be out of place
to discuss, it is certain that u after q in Plautus was not entirely
without effect upon the metre, for Lindsay notes that words like
loqui resist ' iambic ' shortening of the ultima. He explains this by
saying" — "so to the ear of Plautus qu almost made a preceding
vowel long by position, unless ive say that loqui etc. sounded to
Plautus something like a trisyllable.'^ Surel}^, ceteris paribus, the
latter of his alternatives is preferable.

After the time of Lucretius this license apparently is avoided by

* Of course this argument does not apply with the same force to an
inconspicuous feature like the syllabication of intervocalic ?', which we
have hesitatingly ascribed to Ammianus' Greek origin, and wliich affects
so few clausulae that it may well have passed unnoticed.

^ See his note on Lucretius VI. 552.

* In the latter passage Lachmann's reading, vigorousl}' defended by
Bergk and as vigorously opposed by Ritsciil, has been adopted by
Bockemiiller and by Munro. Giussani retains laticis.

* Cf. Bergk, Opusc. I. 309, 345. In Atui. 379 he would read erugit
for exerngit. In Ann 155 Vahlen rejects Tarcuini corpus (Servius) in
favor of exin Tarqiunium (Donatus).

» Lachmann ad Liter. VI. 552; Bergk, Cpusc. I. 72; 345: Ritschl, Opine
II. 600, 604 ; Schroeder, Stndemund's Studien II. 20.

* Lat. Lang. p. 87. The italics are mine. The fact that such words are
occasionally shortened does not invalidate the general truth of his remark.

232 Austin Morris Harmon,

the poets, even by those of Ammianus' own age.' Nor have I l)een
able to find any certain indication of its occurrence in tlie rhythmical
prose of Sedulius, Cassiodorus or Ennodius.^ In the grammarians,
however, there are some traces of the phenomenon. Velius Longus
says,^ aquani qnoqiie per q scribcntes nomen ostendiiinis, per c vera
verbum ab eo quod est aciio, utinam acuam. Now if men had to be
told to write aqiiam when they meant water and acuam when they
meant sharpen, we can fairly infer that they made little if any
distinction between qu and cu in pronunciation. The remark of
another grammarian,* vacua uoii vaqua, vacui nan vaqui, points in
the same direction. And there is still more significance in the state-
ment of Consentius,^ u qnoquc litteram aliqui pingnius ecferunt, ut
cum dicunt ueni putes trisyllabuui iucipcre. To be sure it is the
syllabication of initial ii to which his words primarily bear witness,
but it stands to reason that any i)erson who made ueni a trisyllable
would have treated Quadi, for example, in the same way. In fact,
qu appears to have been much more subject to syllabication than
initial u, inasmuch as Ammianus, who makes so free with qu, does
not allow initial u to count as a syllable.

There is then some evidence for the existence of a considerable
tendency- in Latin toward the syllabication of qu. For aught I see
to the contrary, the tendency may have been especially strong in
late Latin. Even if a pronunciation as Inroad as that of Ammianus
were general in his time, we could not expect to find adequate
recognition of the fact either in the poets, who would follow tra-
dition, or in the grammarians, whose concern was always with the
written rather than with the spoken language. Tliis consideration
undeniably lends much weight to the scanty evidence that we ac-
tually find, which, although it is far from strong enough to be de-
cisive, is yet sufficient to make us hesitate to ascribe the broadness
of Ammianus' pronunciation to Greek influence.

Another fact still remains to be recorded in regard to Ammianus'

> Yet the syllabication of n in ciii (e. g. Martial I. 104, 22) is parallel.

' Subsequent investigation may reveal it in the usage of other writers —
juay perhaps reveal also that some writers who do not allow qu to ooniit
as a syllable have a tendency to avoid using words containing qti in
the clausula, which would be hardly less significant than positive
testimou}'- in support of our point.

» K. VII. 75. 10.

* Probi App. K. IV. 197. 23.

» K. V. 395. 15.

Tlie Clausula in AniDiiamis Marcclli)iiis. 233

treatment of ^/— namely, that syllabication occurs also after r in the
words seruo and obseruo (I. 254. 8 ; 263. 11 ; II. 117. 3; 269. 23; 273.
23), and possibly in paruus (II. 269. 5 ; 33. 1 7). Herein, of course he again
contravenes poetical usage, in which the only approximation to a
parallel is the ante-classical lania, laruatiis, and /(T/nW/s (^Friap. 32. 13j.
Neither initial nor intervocalic u appear to be sul)ject to syllabi-
cation in his pronunciation. 1

QUANTITY.

For the sake of completeness mention should here be made of
the fact already established that Ammianus was to all intents in-
different to vowel-quantity but not to syllabic quantity produced by
position, which within certain limits is observed in his clausulae.^
It has also been demonstrated previously that in his observance of
positional quantity syllables ending in -ns and -nt are not considered
long.'^

FORMS.

In regard to the form of the genitive singular of nouns witli -io-
stems the clausula reveals nothing new in the usage of Ammianus
and simply confirms the testimony of the manuscript to the effect
that in proper names both the old form in -/ and the newer form
in -// are used indifferently, while in common nouns only the newer
form is employed.*

In proper names the old form in -/ is demanded Ijy the clausula
(sometimes against the manuscript) in

Constant! I. 67. 6; 25. 26; 38. 15; 284. 13

Antoni I. 319. 8

Eusebi I. 153. 22

Theodosi II. 185. 26

Vadomari I. 233. 27

Danubi I. 139. 1

The new form is demanded, either with or without manuscript
sanction, in

* There are so many instances in which he does not resort to it tliat
we can hardly employ it to explain the two clausulae Masso Vetemeusi
(I. 42. 30) and saevum reperton-m (IT. 193. 8).

» p. 187 ff.

» p. 192 and note 3.

* Neue, Formenl. I. 154.

234 Austin Morris Harmon,

Constantii 1. 46. 1 ; 150. 21 ; 251. 26

Craugasii I. 168. 19; 208. 18

Chnodomarii 1. 102. 82

Aesculapii I. 296. 9

Procopii II. 89. 17

Strategii II. 75. 16

Vulcatii I. 253. 4

The only case, as far as I know, of a common noun with the
genitive in -i is triclini (I. 48. 17), which is called for by the manu-
script as well as by the clausula, and which is to be accounted for
b}^ the fact that the title triclini rationalis had become formulaic
through long use. Instances of the ordinary genitive in -;'/ may be
found in the following passages: I. 96. 11 ; 103. 15; 113. 4; 175. 25;
193. 11; 279. 17; 284. 13: 317. 16; II. 4.9.

Other points that I have noted in this connection are liut few.
The laws of the clausula support the manuscript reading commmiibal
in I. 163. 7 and require the introduction of the s